Technological Functions

1
___________________
Preface
2
___________________
1Count24V

SIMATIC
ET 200S
Technological Functions
Operating Instructions

06/2010

A5E00124867-07

3
___________________
1Count5V
4
___________________
1SSI
5
___________________
2PULSE

Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.

Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.

Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NRNBERG
GERMANY

A5E00124867-07
06/2010

Copyright Siemens AG 2010.

Technical data subject to change

Table of contents
1

Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 7

1Count24V................................................................................................................................................. 9
2.1

Product Overview...........................................................................................................................9

2.2

Isochronous Mode .......................................................................................................................12

2.3

Brief instructions on commissioning the 1Count24V ...................................................................13

2.4

Terminal Assignment Diagram.....................................................................................................16

2.5

Operating modes and application areas of the 1Count24V.........................................................17

2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.6.6
2.6.7
2.6.8
2.6.9
2.6.10
2.6.11

Count Modes................................................................................................................................19
Overview ......................................................................................................................................19
Endless Counting.........................................................................................................................21
Once-Only Counting ....................................................................................................................23
Periodic Counting.........................................................................................................................26
Behavior of the Digital Input.........................................................................................................29
Gate Functions in Count Modes ..................................................................................................30
Latch Function .............................................................................................................................32
Synchronization............................................................................................................................35
Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes ..........................................................................37
Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interface for the Count Modes...................................45
Parameter Assignment for the Count Modes...............................................................................52

2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.7.4
2.7.5
2.7.6
2.7.7
2.7.8
2.7.9
2.7.10
2.7.11
2.7.12

Measurement Modes ...................................................................................................................54

Overview ......................................................................................................................................54
Sequence of continuous-action measurement ............................................................................55
Frequency measurement with integration time............................................................................59
Continuous Frequency Measurement..........................................................................................61
Rotational speed measurement with integration time..................................................................63
Continuous Rotational Speed Measurement ...............................................................................65
Period measurement with integration time ..................................................................................67
Continuous Period Measurement ................................................................................................69
Gate Functions in Measurement Modes......................................................................................72
Behavior of the Output in Measurement Modes ..........................................................................73
Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interfaces for the Measurement Modes ....................75
Parameter Assignment for Measurement Modes ........................................................................82

2.8
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.8.3
2.8.4
2.8.5
2.8.6

Fast mode ....................................................................................................................................84

Overview ......................................................................................................................................84
Fast mode ....................................................................................................................................85
Gate function in the case of fast mode ........................................................................................85
Synchronization............................................................................................................................86
Assignment of feedback interface for fast mode..........................................................................87
Assigning parameters for fast mode ............................................................................................89

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

Table of contents

2.9
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
2.9.5
2.9.6
2.9.7

Position feedback........................................................................................................................ 90
Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 90
Position Detection ....................................................................................................................... 92
Gate Functions for Position Detection ........................................................................................ 93
Latch Function............................................................................................................................. 96
Synchronization........................................................................................................................... 99
Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interface for Position Feedback.............................. 101
Assigning Parameters for Position Feedback ........................................................................... 107

2.10

Evaluation of count and direction signal ................................................................................... 108

2.11
2.11.1
2.11.2

Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 111
Diagnostics using the LED display............................................................................................ 111
Error types................................................................................................................................. 112

2.12

Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP ................................................................................................ 113

2.13

Technical Specifications............................................................................................................ 115

1Count5V............................................................................................................................................... 119
3.1

Product Overview...................................................................................................................... 119

3.2

Clocked Mode ........................................................................................................................... 122

3.3

Brief instructions on commissioning the 1Count5V .................................................................. 123

3.4

Terminal Assignment Diagram.................................................................................................. 126

3.5

Operating modes and application areas of the 1Count5V ........................................................ 127

3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.6.7
3.6.8
3.6.9
3.6.10
3.6.11

Count Modes............................................................................................................................. 129

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 129
Endless Counting ...................................................................................................................... 131
Once-Only Counting.................................................................................................................. 133
Periodic Counting...................................................................................................................... 136
Behavior of the Digital Inputs .................................................................................................... 138
Gate Functions in Count Modes ............................................................................................... 139
Latch Function........................................................................................................................... 141
Synchronization......................................................................................................................... 143
Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes .................................................................................. 147
Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interface for the Count Modes................................ 155
Parameter Assignment for the Count Modes............................................................................ 163

3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.7.6
3.7.7
3.7.8
3.7.9
3.7.10
3.7.11
3.7.12

Measurement Modes ................................................................................................................ 165

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 165
Sequence of continuous-action measurement.......................................................................... 166
Frequency measurement with integration time ......................................................................... 170
Continuous Frequency Measurement....................................................................................... 172
Rotational speed measurement with integration time............................................................... 175
Continuous Rotational Speed Measurement ............................................................................ 177
Period measurement with integration time................................................................................ 180
Continuous Period Measurement ............................................................................................. 182
Gate Functions in Measurement Modes ................................................................................... 185
Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes ..................................................................... 186
Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interfaces for the Measurement Modes.................. 188
Parameter Assignment for Measurement Modes ..................................................................... 195

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

Table of contents

3.8
3.8.1
3.8.2
3.8.3
3.8.4
3.8.5
3.8.6

Fast mode ..................................................................................................................................197

Overview ....................................................................................................................................197
Fast mode ..................................................................................................................................198
Gate function in the case of fast mode ......................................................................................198
Synchronization..........................................................................................................................199
Assignment of feedback interface for fast mode........................................................................201
Assigning parameters for fast mode ..........................................................................................203

3.9
3.9.1
3.9.2
3.9.3
3.9.4
3.9.5
3.9.6
3.9.7

Position feedback.......................................................................................................................204
Overview ....................................................................................................................................204
Position detection.......................................................................................................................206
Gate Functions for Position Detection .......................................................................................207
Latch Function ...........................................................................................................................210
Synchronization..........................................................................................................................213
Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interface for Position Feedback ..............................215
Assigning Parameters for Position Feedback............................................................................221

3.10

Evaluation of count and direction signal ....................................................................................222

3.11
3.11.1
3.11.2

Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................224
Diagnostics using the LED display ............................................................................................224
Error types..................................................................................................................................225

3.12

Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP .................................................................................................226

3.13

Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................228

1SSI....................................................................................................................................................... 231
4.1

Product Overview.......................................................................................................................231

4.2

Isochronous Mode .....................................................................................................................233

4.3

Example: Starting 1SSI..............................................................................................................234

4.4

Terminal Assignment Diagram...................................................................................................237

4.5

Configuring standard mode and fast mode................................................................................239

4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.6.6
4.6.7
4.6.8
4.6.9

Functions of the 1SSI.................................................................................................................240

Overview of 1SSI functions........................................................................................................240
Encoder Value Detection ...........................................................................................................241
Gray/Binary Converter ...............................................................................................................242
Transmitted Encoder Value and Standardization ......................................................................242
Detection of Direction and Reversal of the Direction of Rotation ..............................................244
Comparator (Only in Standard Mode)........................................................................................245
Latch Function (Only in Standard Mode) ...................................................................................247
Error Detection in Standard Mode .............................................................................................249
Error Detection in Fast Mode .....................................................................................................249

4.7

Behavior at CPU/master STOP .................................................................................................250

4.8

Setting parameters for the 1SSI.................................................................................................251

4.9
4.9.1
4.9.2

Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................254
Diagnostics using the LED display ............................................................................................254
Error types..................................................................................................................................255

4.10

Control and Feedback Interfaces in Standard Mode .................................................................256

4.11

Feedback Interface in Fast Mode ..............................................................................................259

4.12

Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................261

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

Table of contents

2PULSE................................................................................................................................................. 265
5.1

Product Overview...................................................................................................................... 265

5.2

Isochronous mode..................................................................................................................... 267

5.3

Example: Starting 2PULSE ....................................................................................................... 268

5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.9
5.4.10
5.4.11
5.4.12

Modes and Functions................................................................................................................ 271

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 271
"Pulse output" operating mode.................................................................................................. 273
"Pulse width modulation" operating mode ................................................................................ 279
"Pulse train" operating mode..................................................................................................... 289
"On/Off-delay" operating mode ................................................................................................. 295
"Frequency output" operating mode ......................................................................................... 303
Sequence counter ..................................................................................................................... 309
Function: Measurement of current ............................................................................................ 310
Function: Direct Control of the DO Digital Output..................................................................... 311
Function: Error Detection/Diagnostics ...................................................................................... 313
Parallel connection of both channels ........................................................................................ 315
Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP ................................................................................................ 317

5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2

Parameter assignment and compatibility .................................................................................. 318

Configuring the 2PULSE ........................................................................................................... 318
Compatibility of the 2PULSE with predecessor versions.......................................................... 320

5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2

Diagnostics................................................................................................................................ 321
Diagnostics using the LED display............................................................................................ 321
Error types................................................................................................................................. 322

5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6

Application Examples................................................................................................................ 323

Overview ................................................................................................................................... 323
Example: Filling Liquids ............................................................................................................ 324
Example: Heating a Liquid ........................................................................................................ 328
Example: Packing Piece Goods................................................................................................ 332
Example: Applying a Protective Layer ...................................................................................... 337
Current regulation of a valve ..................................................................................................... 341

5.8

Technical Specifications of the 2PULSE, Terminal Assignment............................................... 347

5.9

Technical Specifications for Programming, Reference Lists .................................................... 353

Index...................................................................................................................................................... 359

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

Preface

How this Manual Is Structured...

This manual is supplementary to the ET 200S Distributed I/O System operating instructions.
The ET 200S Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) operating instructions
provide comprehensive information pertaining to the hardware configuration, installation,
wiring, commissioning, diagnostics and technical specifications of the ET 200S distributed
I/O system.
This manual provides a description of functions and the technical specifications of the
ET 200S modules for technological functions: 1Count24V, 1Count5V, 1SSI and 2PULSE.

How to Find Your Way Around

At the beginning of each section you will find a Product Overview, which lists the features
and applications of the module described. You will also find the order number of the module
and the name and release of the software required. For the current GSD file, go to:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/gsd
In each section you will then find a section with the heading Brief Instructions on
Commissioning. These brief instructions tell you in a series of short steps how to install and
configure the module, how to integrate it in your use program, and how to test it in your user
program.

Index
The index contains keywords that come up in the manual.

Standards and approvals

For information about standards and approvals, refer to the section "General technical
specifications" in the ET 200S Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) operating instructions.

Recycling and disposal

The ET 200S 1Count24V, ET 200S 1Count5V, ET 200S 1SSI and ET 200S 2PULSE
modules can be recycled due to the non-toxic materials from which they are assembled. For
environmentally sustainable recycling and disposal of your old device, contact a certified
disposal service for electronic scrap.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

Preface

Additional support
If you have any further questions about the use of products described in this manual and do
not find the right answers here, contact your local Siemens representative
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner):
A guide to the technical documentation for the various products and systems is available on
the Internet:
SIMATIC Guide manuals (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal)
The online catalog and online ordering systems are also available on the Internet:
A&D Mall (http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall)

Training center
To help you get started with automation technology and systems, we offer a variety of
courses. Contact your regional Training Center or the central Training Center in D-90327
Nuremberg, Germany.
Internet: SITRAIN homepage (http://www.sitrain.com)

Technical Support
You can access technical support for all A&D projects via the following:
Online support request form: (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request)

Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive online knowledge base on the
Internet at:
Industry Automation and Drive Technologies - Homepage
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)
There you will find the following information, for example:
The newsletter that provides up-to-date information on your products.
The documents you need via our Search function in Service & Support.
A forum for global information exchange by users and specialists.
Your local partner for Automation and Drives.
Information about on-site service, repairs, and spare parts. Much more can be found
under "Services".

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.1

Product Overview

Order Number
6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0

Compatibility
The 1Count24V with the order number 6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0 replaces the
1Count24V/100kHz with the order number 6ES7 138-4DA03-0AB0 with full compatibility. In
STEP 7 version V5.3 SP2 and later, you can use it in non-isochronous and isochronous
modes.

Features
Connection of a pulse generator to count 24 V signals up to a frequency of 100 kHz.
Can be operated using terminal modules TM-E15S24-01 and TM-E15S26-A1
Isochronous mode
Modified user data interface 1
1 Instead of 8 bytes of input data and 8 bytes of output data, 12 bytes of input data and 6
bytes of output data are used, provided the IM 151 supports this.

The following IM 151 modules support this function:

IM151-1/Standard order no. 6ES7 151-1AA04-0AB0 and higher
IM151-1/HF order no. 6ES7 151-1BA01-0AB0 and higher
Operating modes of the 1Count24V:
Counting modes:
Count continuously
Count once
Periodic Counting
Measuring modes:
Frequency with integration time
Rotational speed measurement
Period measurement

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.1 Product Overview
Position feedback:
Position detection
Fast mode
Gate control, synchronization or latch function via digital input (P or M switch)
One real digital output for direct control or output of the comparison result
One virtual digital output
Firmware update 1
Identification data 1
The following IM 151 modules support this function: IM 151-1 Standard: As of 6ES71511AA04-0AB0 and IM 151-1 High Feature: As of 6ES7 151-1BA01-0AB0
1

Connectable Counting Signals

The 1Count24V can count the signals of the following encoders:
24 V pulse encoder with direction level
24 V pulse encoder without direction level
24 V incremental encoder with two tracks that are 90o out of phase (rotary encoder).

Adjustment During Operation

Counting modes
You can change the function and behavior of the digital outputs during operation
Measuring modes
You can change the function of the DO1 digital output during operation
You can change the integration time and the update time during operation

Configuration
In order to configure the 1Count24V use one of the following options
STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 or higher, or
HSP (hardware support package, available online) as of STEP 7 Version V5.2 SP1

10

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.1 Product Overview

Firmware update
In order to extend the functionality and eliminate errors, firmware updates can be
downloaded to the operating system memory of the 1Count24V by means of the STEP 7 HW
Config software.
Note
When you launch the firmware update, the old firmware is deleted. If the firmware update is
interrupted or canceled for any reason, the 1Count24V will no longer function correctly as a
result. Restart the firmware update and wait until it has completed successfully.

Identification Data 1
Hardware release status
Firmware release status
Serial number
1See

also ET 200S Distributed I/O operating instructions

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348), "Identification data" section.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

11

1Count24V
2.2 Isochronous mode

2.2

Isochronous mode
Note
For basic information on isochronous mode, refer to the Isochronous mode
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045) function manual.

Hardware Requirements
You will require the following for the 1Count24V in isochronous mode:
A CPU that supports isochrone mode
PROFIBUS master or PROFINET controller that supports the constant bus cycle time
An IM 151 that supports isochrone mode

Features
Depending on the system parameter assignment, the 1Count24V works in either nonisochronous or isochronous mode.
In isochronous mode, data communication between the bus master and 1Count24V is
isochronous to the cycle.
In isochronous mode, all 8 bytes / 12 bytes of the user data interface are consistent.
If a parameter assignment error occurs, the 1Count24V does not go into isochronous mode.
If isochronous mode fails due to faults or failure/delay of global control (GC), the 1Count24V
returns to isochronous mode during the next cycle without an error response.
If isochrone mode fails, the user data interface is not updated.
The Ti/To overlap is supported by the module in firmware version V1.0.1 and later.

12

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.3 Brief instructions on commissioning the 1Count24V

2.3

Brief instructions on commissioning the 1Count24V

Introduction
These instructions guide you to a functioning application that will enable you to count the
switching operations of a contact and become familiar with and check the basic hardware
and software functions of the 1Count24V. The counting mode used in this example is "Count
continuously".

Requirements
The following requirements must be satisfied:
You must have put an ET 200S station on an S7 station with a DP master into operation.
You must have the following:
A TM-E15S24-01 terminal module
A 1Count24V,
A momentary contact switch and the necessary wiring material

Installation, Wiring and Fitting

1. Install and wire the TM-E15S24-01 terminal module (see Figure).
2. Plug the 1Count24V into the terminal module. Detailed instructions are provided in the
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) operating instructions.
&RXQW
9N+]
6)

83

'1

(6
'$$%

Figure 2-1

Terminal Assignment for the Example

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

13

1Count24V
2.3 Brief instructions on commissioning the 1Count24V

Configuring with STEP 7 using HW Config

You must first adapt the hardware configuration of your existing ET 200S station.
1. Open the relevant project in SIMATIC Manager.
2. Open the HW Config configuration table in your project.
3. Select 1Count 24V in the hardware catalog.
The number 6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0 C appears in the infotext. Drag the entry to the slot
at which you have mounted your 1Count24V.
4. Double-click this number to open the "Properties - 1Count 24V" tab (R-S Slot Number).
5. On the Addresses tab, you will find the addresses of the slot to which you have dragged
the 1Count24V. Make a note of these addresses for subsequent programming.
6. The Parameters tab contains the default settings for the 1Count24V. Leave the default
settings unchanged.
7. Save and compile your configuration, and download the configuration in STOP mode of
the CPU by choosing "PLC > Download to Module".

Integration into the User Program

(not for modified user data interface)
1. Create block FC 101 and integrate it in your control program (in OB 1, for example).
This block requires the DB1 data block with a length of 16 bytes. The start address of the
module in the following example is 256.
STL

Description

Block: FC101
Network 1: Presettings
L

DB1.DBD0

DB1.DBD4

//Delete control bits

SET
S

DB1.DBX4.0

//Open SW gate

Network 2: Write to the control interface

L

DB1.DBD0

//Write 6 bytes to the 1Count24V

//Configured start address of the outputs

PAD 256

DB1.DBW4

PAW 260

14

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.3 Brief instructions on commissioning the 1Count24V

STL
Network 3: Read from the feedback interface

Description
//Read 8 bytes from the 1Count24V
//Configured start address of inputs

PED 256

DB1.DBD8

PED 260

DB1.DBD12

Testing
Use "Monitor/Modify Variables" to monitor the count value and the gate.
1. Select the "Block" folder in your project. Choose the "Insert > S7 Block > Variable Table"
menu command to insert the VAT 1 variable table, and then confirm with "OK".
2. Open the VAT 1 variable table, and enter the following variables in the "Address" column:
DB1.DBD8 (current count value)
DB1.DBx13.0 (internal gate status)
3. Choose "PLC > Connect To > Configured CPU" to switch to online.
4. Choose "Variable > Monitor" to switch to monitoring.
5. Switch the CPU to RUN mode.
The "internal gate status" bit must be set.
6. Use your counting contact to generate pulses.

Result
You can now see that:
The UP LED on the 1Count24V is on. The status of the UP LED changes with each new
pulse.
The count value in the block changes.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

15

1Count24V
2.4 Terminal Assignment Diagram

2.4

Terminal Assignment Diagram

Wiring Rules
The cables (terminals 1 and 5 and terminals 2 and 8) must be shielded. The shield must be
supported at both ends. To do this, use the shield contact (see the ET 200S Distributed I/O
System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) operating
instructions).

Terminal assignment of the 1Count24V

The tables below show the terminal assignment for the 1Count24V:
Table 2- 1

Terminal assignment of the 1Count24V

View

Terminal Assignment

Remarks
B: Direction input or track B
A: Pulse input or track A

&RXQW
9N+]

24V DC: Sensor supply

M: Chassis ground

6)

DI: Digital input

DO1: Digital output
70(6DQG
&RXQW9
83

'1





(6
'$$%

%
9'&
0
'2

$



9'&





0





',




















Pulse Generator Connection

Encoder Type

Connection

Count Direction

Pulse generator without direction indicator

24 V count pulses at terminal 5 (A)

pulses

Pulse generator with direction indicator

24 V count pulses at terminal 5 (A) and 24

V direction at terminal 1 (B)

Up, down

Pulse generator with 2 tracks that are 90o

out of phase

Track A terminal 5 (A) and track B terminal

1 (B)

Up, down

16

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.5 Operating modes and application areas of the 1Count24V

2.5

Operating modes and application areas of the 1Count24V

Introduction
To begin with, decide how you want to use the 1Count24V. You can choose between the
following modes:
Counting modes

Measuring modes

Position feedback

Fast mode

Count continuously

Frequency measurement

Position detection

Position feedback in short (isochronous) cycles

Count once

Rotational speed
measurement

Count periodically

Period measurement

Parameters are assigned to the various modes. You will find the parameter lists in the descriptions of the modes.
You can integrate the 1Count24V in your project in two different ways. Decide whether you want to work with a GSD file or
with STEP 7.

Integrate 1Count24V using STEP 7

Integrate 1Count24V using STEP 7
(in isochronous and non-isochronous mode)
Select an entry from the hardware catalog that corresponds to the operating mode you want.
For counting modes,
select the "1Count24V
Counting Mode V2.0" entry

For measuring modes,

For position detection,
select the "1Count24V
select the "1Count24V
Measuring Mode V2.0" entry Position Detection V2.0"
entry

For Fast Mode, select the "1

COUNT24V Fast Mode V2.0"
entry

The number 6ES7 1384DA04-0AB0 C appears in

the infotext. Drag the entry
to the slot at which you have
mounted your 1Count24V.

The number 6ES7 1384DA04-0AB0 M appears in

the infotext. Drag the entry
to the slot at which you have
mounted your 1Count24V.

The number 6ES7 1384DA04-0AB0 F appears in the

infotext. Drag the entry to the
slot at which you have
mounted your 1Count24V.

The number 6ES7 1384DA04-0AB0 W appears in

the infotext. Drag the entry
to the slot at which you have
mounted your 1Count24V.

Select the parameters.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

17

1Count24V
2.5 Operating modes and application areas of the 1Count24V

Integrate the 1Count24V with the GSD file

Integrate the 1Count24V with the GSD file
(only in non-isochronous mode)
Select an entry in the GSD file that corresponds to the operating mode you want.
For counting modes, select

For measuring modes, select

For position feedback, select

C 6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0 1CNT24V

M 6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0 1CNT24V

W 6ES7 138-4DA04-0AB0 1CNT24V

Select the parameters.

Note
Fast mode is designed for use in especially short isochronous cycles. You need STEP 7 to
configure isochronous operation.

18

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6

Count Modes

2.6.1

Overview

Principle
The counting modes are used in counting applications (for counting of items, for example).
For the "Counting modes" parameter, you can select from the following modes:
Count continuously (for position detection with incremental encoders, for example)
Count once (for counting items up to a maximum limit, for example)
Count periodically (in applications with recurring counting operations, for example)
To run one of these modes, you have to assign parameters to the 1Count24V (see section
"Parameter Assignment for the Count Modes (Page 163)").

Maximum Count Range

The high counting limit is +2147483647 (231 - 1).
The low counting limit is -2147483648 (-231).

Load Value
You can specify a load value for the 1Count24V.
This load value is either applied directly as the new count value (LOAD_VAL) or it is applied
as the new count value when the following events occur (LOAD_PREPARE):
In the Count once and Count periodically counting modes:
The low or high counting limit is reached when a main count direction is not assigned.
The assigned high counting limit is reached when the main count direction is up.
Zero is reached when the main count direction is down.
In all counting modes:
The counting operation is started by a SW gate or HW gate (if the counting operation is
continued, the load value is not applied).
Synchronization
Latch and retrigger

Gate Control
To control the 1Count24V, you have to use the gate functions.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

19

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Main Count Direction

With the main count direction, you assign which RESET states (status following parameter
assignment) the load value and count value can take on. It is thus possible to create
incrementing or decrementing count applications. The assigned main count direction has no
effect on the direction evaluation when the count pulses are detected.

RESET States of the Following Values after Parameter Assignment

Table 2- 2

RESET States

Value

Main count direction

RESET state

Load value

None
Up
Down

0
0
Assigned high counting limit

Count value

None
Up
Down

0
0
Assigned high counting limit

Comparison value 1 and 2

None
Up
Down

0
0
Assigned high counting limit

Latch value

None
Up
Down

0
0
Assigned high counting limit

Isochrone Mode
In isochronous mode, the 1Count24V accepts control bits and control values from the control
interface in each bus cycle and reports back the response in the same cycle.
In each cycle, the 1Count24V transfers the count or latch value that was valid at time Ti and
the status bits valid at time Ti.
A count controlled by hardware input signals can only be transferred in the same cycle if the
input signal occurred before time Ti.
(See Isochronous Mode (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045)
function manual)

20

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6.2

Endless Counting

Definition
In this mode, the 1Count24V counts continuously starting from the load value:
If the 1Count24V reaches the high count limit when counting up, and another count pulse
then comes, it will jump to the low count limit and continue counting from there without
losing a pulse.
If the 1Count24V reaches the low count limit when counting down, and another count
pulse then comes, it will jump to the high count limit and continue counting from there
without losing a pulse.
The high counting limit is set to +2147483647 (231 - 1).
The low counting limit is set to -2147483648 (-231).
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW

/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 2-2

*DWHVWRS

7LPH

Count Continuously with Gate Function

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Count Modes (Page 30)")
Latch function (see section "Latch Function (Page 32)")
Synchronization (see section "Synchronization (Page 35)")

Function of the Digital Outputs

For the "Function DO1" and "Function DO2" parameters, select one of the following
functions for each digital output:
Output, no switching through comparator
Activation at a counter status greater than or equal to the comparison value
Activation at a counter status less than or equal to the comparison value
Pulse on reaching the comparison value
Switch at comparison values (DO1 only)
(see section "Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 37)")

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

21

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Influencing the Behavior of the Digital Outputs via:

Hysteresis
Pulse duration
(see section "Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 37)")

Changing values during operation

The following values can be changed during operation:
Load value (LOAD_PREPARE)
Counter status (LOAD_VAL)
Comparison value 1 (CMP_VAL1)
Comparison value 2 (CMP_VAL2)
Function and behavior of the digital outputs (C_DOPARAM)
(see section "Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 37)" and "Assignment of
the Feedback and Control Interface for the Count Modes (Page 45)")

22

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6.3

Once-Only Counting

Definition
In this mode, the 1Count24V counts once only, depending on the assigned main count
direction ("Main count direction" parameter).
When there is no main count direction:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
The count limits are fixed at the maximum count range.
If the high or low counting limit is violated, the gate is closed automatically, and the
counter jumps to the respective counting limit.
When the main count direction is up:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
When the high count limit is reached, the counter jumps to the load value and the gate
is closed.
The high count limit can be assigned parameters, and the load value has RESET state
of 0 and can be changed.
When the count direction is down:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
When the low counting limit is reached, the 1Count24V jumps to the load value and
the gate is closed.
The low count limit is fixed at 0, and the load value can be assigned parameters
(parameter: high count limit) and can be changed.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

23

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes
The internal gate is automatically closed in the event of an overflow/underflow at the count
limits. To restart counting, you have to open the gate again.
&RXQWHUVWDWXV

+LJK
FRXQWLQJOLPLW

676B2)/:

/RDGYDOXH
676B1'



/RZ
FRXQWLQJOLPLW

676B8)/:
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 2-3

$XWRPDWLF
JDWHVWRS

*DWHVWDUW

$XWRPDWLF
JDWHVWRS

7LPH

Count Once Without Main Count Direction; Canceling Gate Function

With an interrupting gate function, the 1Count24V remains at the underflow when the gate is
started.
&RXQWHUVWDWXV

676B2)/:

+LJK
FRXQWLQJOLPLW
/RDGYDOXH


/RZ
FRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW $XWRPDWLF
JDWHVWRS

Figure 2-4

24

*DWHVWDUW

$XWRPDWLF
JDWHVWRS

7LPH

Count Once with Up as the Main Count Direction

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Count Modes (Page 30)")
Latch function (see section "Latch Function (Page 32)")
Synchronization (see section "Synchronization (Page 35)")

Function of the Digital Outputs

For the "Function DO1" and "Function DO2" parameters, select one of the following
functions for each digital output:
Output, no switching through comparator
Activation at a counter status greater than or equal to the comparison value
Activation at a counter status less than or equal to the comparison value
Pulse on reaching the comparison value
Switch at comparison values (DO1 only)
(see section "Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 37)")

Influencing the behavior of the digital outputs via:

Hysteresis
Pulse duration
(see section "Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 37)")

Values that Can Be Changed during Operation:

Load value (LOAD_PREPARE)
Counter status (LOAD_VAL)
Comparison value 1 (CMP_VAL1)
Comparison value 2 (CMP_VAL2)
Function and behavior of the digital outputs (C_DOPARAM)
(see section "Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 37)" and "Assignment of
the Feedback and Control Interface for the Count Modes (Page 45)")

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

25

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6.4

Periodic Counting

Definition
In this mode, the 1Count24V counts periodically, depending on the assigned main count
direction ("Main count direction" parameter).
When there is no main count direction:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
The count limits are fixed at the maximum count range.
In the event of an overflow or underflow at the respective count limit, the 1Count24V
jumps to the load value and continues counting from there.
When the main count direction is up:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
The upper limit can be assigned parameters, and the load value has a RESET status
of 0 and can be changed.
When the high count limit is reached, the 1Count24V jumps to the load value and
continues counting from there.
When the count direction is down:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
When the low count limit is reached, the 1Count24V jumps to the load value and
continues counting from there.
The low count limit is fixed at 0, and the load value can be assigned parameters
(parameter: high counting limit) and can be changed.
&RXQWHUYDOXH

+LJKFRXQWLQJ
OLPLW

676B2)/:

/RDGYDOXH


676B1'

/RZFRXQWLQJ
OLPLW

676B8)/:
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 2-5

26

*DWHVWRS

7LPH

Periodic Counting without a Main Count Direction

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJ
OLPLW

676B2)/:

/RDGYDOXH


/RZFRXQWLQJ
OLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 2-6

*DWHVWRS

7LPH

Periodic Counting with Up as the Main Count Direction

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Count Modes (Page 30)")
Latch function (see section "Latch Function (Page 32)")
Synchronization (see section "Synchronization (Page 35)")

Function of the Digital Outputs

For the "Function DO1" and "Function DO2" parameters, select one of the following
functions for each digital output:
Output, no switching through comparator
Activation at counter status greater than or equal to the comparison value
Activation at a counter status less than or equal to the comparison value
Pulse on reaching the comparison value
Switch at comparison values (DO1 only)
(see section "Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 37)")

Influencing the Behavior of the Digital Outputs via:

Hysteresis
Pulse duration
(see section "Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 37)")

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

27

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Values that Can Be Changed During Operation

Load value (LOAD_PREPARE)
Counter status (LOAD_VAL)
Comparison value 1 (CMP_VAL1)
Comparison value 2 (CMP_VAL2)
Function and behavior of the digital outputs (C_DOPARAM)
(see sections "Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 37)" and "Assignment
of the Feedback and Control Interface for the Count Modes (Page 45)")

28

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6.5

Behavior of the Digital Input

Digital input of the 1Count24V

The DI digital input can be operated with different sensors (P switch and series mode or M
switch).
Note
If you have selected the 24V M switch setting for the "Sensor A, B, DI" parameter, you must
use M-switching sensors.
The level of the digital input for the "Function DI = HW gate" configuration with the parameter
"Input signal HW gate" can be inverted.
To filter the input signal, you can switch on a filter depending on the minimum pulse duration
or the maximum signal frequency (parameter: Filter counter input A*, direction input B*,
digital input DI).
The STS_DI feedback bit indicates the level of the digital input.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

29

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6.6

Gate Functions in Count Modes

Software Gate and Hardware Gate

The 1Count24V has two gates
A software gate (SW gate), which is controlled by the SW_GATE control bit.
The software gate can only be opened by a positive edge of the SW_GATE control bit. It
is closed when this bit is reset. Note the transfer times and run times of your control
program.
A hardware gate (HW gate), which is controlled by means of the digital input on the
1Count24V. You assign the hardware gate as the function of the digital input (Function DI
"HW Gate"). It is opened on a positive edge at the digital input and closed on a negative
edge.
Internal gate
The internal gate is the logical AND operation of the HW gate and SW gate. Counting is only
active when the HW gate and the SW gate are open. The STS_GATE feedback bit (internal
gate status) indicates this. If a HW gate has not been assigned, the setting of the SW gate is
decisive. Counting is activated, interrupted, continued, and canceled by means of the
internal gate. In the Count once counting mode, the internal gate is closed automatically
when there is an overflow/underflow at the counting limits.

Canceling- and Interrupting-Type Gate Function

When assigning the gate function ("Gate Function" parameter), you can specify whether the
internal gate is to cancel or interrupt counting. When counting is canceled, after the gate is
closed and restarted, counting starts again from the beginning. When counting is interrupted,
after the gate is closed and restarted, counting continues from the previous value.

30

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes
The diagrams below indicate how the interrupting and canceling gate functions work:
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW
/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 2-7

*DWHVWRS

*DWHVWDUW

7LPH

Count Continuously, Up, Interrupting Gate Function

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW
/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 2-8

*DWHVWRS

*DWHVWDUW

7LPH

Count Continuously, Down, Canceling Gate Function

Gate Control by Means of the SW Gate Only

When the gate is opened, one of the following occurs, depending on the parameter
assignment:
Counting continues from the current count status, or
Counting starts from the load value
If the SW gate is opened in isochronous mode in bus cycle "n" by setting the SW_GATE
control bit, counting starts at time To in cycle "n+1". In the same cycle "n+1", the 1Count24V
delivers the current count value from time Ti. (See Isochronous Mode
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045) function manual)

Gate Control by Means of the SW Gate and HW Gate

If the SW gate opens when the HW gate is already open, counting continues starting from
the current count status.
When the HW gate is opened, one of the following occurs, depending on the parameter
assignment:
Counting continues from the current count status, or
Counting starts from the load value
If the SW gate is opened in isochronous mode in bus cycle "n" by setting the SW_GATE
control bit, counting starts at time To in cycle "n+1" if the HW gate is already open at this
time. If the HW gate opens between To and Ti in cycle "n+1", counting only starts once the
HW gate is open. In both cases, the 1Count24V delivers the current count value in cycle
"n+1" starting from time Ti.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

31

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6.7

Latch Function

Introduction
There are two latch functions:
The Latch and Retrigger function
The Latch function

The Latch and Retrigger Function

Requirement
In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "Latch and Retrigger on Positive
Edge" parameter from the possible functions of the digital input.
Description

&RXQWSXOVHV

6:B*$7(

',GLJLWDOLQSXW

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

/DWFKYDOXH

Figure 2-9

Latch and Retrigger with Load Value = 0

This function stores the current internal counter status of the 1Count24V and retriggers
counting when there is a positive edge on the digital input. This means that the current
internal counter status at the time of the positive edge is stored (latch value), and the
1Count24V is then loaded again with the load value, from which counting resumes.
The counting mode must be enabled with the SW gate before the function can be executed.
It is started with the first positive edge on the digital input.
The stored counter status rather than the current counter status is indicated in the feedback
interface. The STS_DI bit indicates the status of the latch and retrigger signal.

32

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes
The latch value is preassigned with its RESET state. It is not changed when the SW gate is
opened.
Direct loading of the counter does not cause the indicated stored counter status to be
changed.
If you close the SW gate, counting is only interrupted; this means that when you open the
SW gate again, counting is continued. The digital input DI remains active even when the SW
gate is closed.
Counting is also latched and triggered in isochronous mode with each edge on the digital
input. The counter status that was valid at the time of the last edge before Ti is displayed in
the feedback interface.

The Latch Function

Requirement
In order to use this function, the Function DI parameter must be set to "Latch on Positive
Edge".
Description

&RXQWSXOVHV

6:B*$7(

',GLJLWDOLQSXW

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

/DWFKYDOXH

Figure 2-10

Latch with a Load Value of 0

Counter status and latch value are preassigned with their RESET states.
The counting function is started when the SW gate is opened. The 1Count24V begins at the
load value.
The latch value is always the exact counter status at the time of the positive edge on the
digital input DI.
The stored counter status rather than the current counter status is indicated in the feedback
interface. The STS_DI bit indicates the level of the latch signal.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

33

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes
Direct loading of the counter does not cause the indicated stored counter status to be
changed.
In isochronous mode, the counter status that was latched at the time of the last positive edge
before Ti is displayed in the feedback interface.
When you close the SW gate, the effect is either canceling or interrupting, depending on the
parameter assignment. The digital input DI remains active even when the SW gate is closed.

Modified User Data Interface

If the 1Count24V is inserted behind an IM 151 that supports the reading and writing of
broader user data interfaces, the current count value can be read from bytes 8 to 11 of the
feedback interface.

34

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6.8

Synchronization

Requirement
In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "Synchronize on Positive Edge"
Function DI parameter.

Description
,QWHUQDOFRXQWSXOVHV
XSRUGRZQ

'LJLWDOLQSXW
]HURPDUN

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
RQFHRQO\
(QDEOH
&57/B6<1

&RXQWYDOXH

/RDGYDOXH

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
SHULRGLF
(QDEOH
&57/B6<1

&RXQWYDOXH
/RDGYDOXH

Figure 2-11

Once-Only and Periodic Synchronization

If you have configured synchronization, the rising edge of a reference signal on the input
sets the 1Count24V to the load value.
You can select between once-only and periodic synchronization ("Synchronization"
parameter).

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

35

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes
The following conditions apply:
The counting mode must have been started with the SW gate.
The "Enable synchronization CTRL_SYN" control bit must be set.
Synchronize once only: If the enable bit is set, the first edge loads the 1Count24V with
the load value.
Synchronization periodically: If the enable bit is set, the first and every further edge loads
the 1Count24V with the load value.
After successful synchronization, the STS_SYN feedback bit is set. It must be reset by
the RES_STS control bit.
The signal of a bounce-free switch or the zero mark of a rotary encoder can serve as the
reference signal.
The STS_DI feedback bit indicates the level of the reference signal.
In isochrone mode, the set feedback bit STS_SYN indicates that the rising edge on the
digital input was between time Ti in the current cycle and time Ti in the previous cycle.

36

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6.9

Behavior Types of the Outputs in Count Modes

Introduction
The 1Count24V allows you to store two comparison values, which are assigned to the digital
outputs. The outputs can be activated, depending on the counter status and the comparison
values. The various ways of setting the behavior of the outputs are described in this section.

Description
The 1Count24V has a real digital output and a virtual digital output that exists only as a
status bit in the feedback interface.
Parameters can be assigned for both outputs ("Function DO1" and "Function DO2"
parameters).
You can change the function and the behavior of the digital outputs during operation. The
new function takes effect immediately.
You can choose from the following functions:
Output
Counter status comparison value
Counter status comparison value
Pulse on reaching the comparison value
Switch at comparison values (DO1 only)

Output
You can switch the outputs on and off with the control bits SET_DO1 and SET_DO2.
The control bits CTRL_DO1 or CTRL_DO2 must be set for this.
You can query the status of the outputs with the status bits STS_DO1 and STS_DO2 in the
feedback interface.
The status bits STS_CMP1 and STS_CMP2 indicate that the relevant output is or was
switched on. These status bits retain their status until they are acknowledged. If the output is
still switched, the corresponding bit is set again immediately. These status bits are also set
when the control bit SET_DO1 or SET_DO2 is operated without DO1 or DO2 being enabled.
Isochronous mode: In isochronous mode, the output DO1 is switched at time To. The status
of the virtual output DO2 is signaled at time Ti.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

37

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Counter status Comparison Value and Counter Status Comparison Value

If the comparison conditions are fulfilled, the respective comparator switches on the output.
The status of the output is indicated by STS_DO1 and STS_DO2.
The control bits CTRL_DO1 or CTRL_DO2 must be set for this.
The comparison result is indicated by the status bits STS_CMP1 or STS_CMP2. You cannot
acknowledge and thus reset these bits until the comparison conditions are no longer fulfilled.
Isochronous mode: In isochronous mode, as well, the DO1 output is switched as soon as the
comparison condition is fulfilled and is therefore independent of the bus cycle. The status of
the virtual output DO2 is signaled at time Ti.

Comparison Value Reached, Output Pulse

If the counter status reaches the comparison value, the comparator switches on the
respective digital output for the assigned pulse duration.
The control bit CTRL_DO1 or CTRL_DO2 must be set for this.
The status bits STS_DO1 and STS_DO2 always have the status of the corresponding digital
output.
The comparison result is indicated by the status bit STS_CMP1 or STS_CMP2 and cannot
be reset by acknowledgment until the pulse duration has elapsed.
If a main count direction is assigned, the comparator switches only when the comparison
value in the main count direction is reached.
If a main count direction is not assigned, the comparator switches when the comparison
value is reached from either direction.
If the digital output is set by control bit SET_DO1 or SET_DO2, it is reset when the pulse
duration has elapsed.
Isochronous mode: In isochronous mode, as well, the DO1 output is switched as soon as the
comparison condition is fulfilled and is therefore independent of the bus cycle. The status of
the virtual output DO2 is signaled at time Ti.

Pulse Duration when the Comparison Value is Reached

The pulse duration begins when the respective digital output is set. The inaccuracy of the
pulse duration is less than 2 ms.
The pulse duration can be set to suit the actuators used. The pulse duration specifies how
long the output is to be set for. The pulse duration can be preselected between 0 ms and
510 ms in increments of 2 ms.
If the pulse duration = 0, the output is set until the comparison condition is no longer fulfilled.
Note that the count pulse times must be greater than the minimum switching times of the
digital output.
Isochronous mode: In isochronous mode, as well, the DO1 output is switched as soon as the
comparison condition is fulfilled and is therefore independent of the bus cycle. The status of
the virtual output DO2 is signaled at time Ti.

38

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Switch at Comparison Values

The comparator switches the output when the following conditions are met:
The two comparison values must be loaded using the load functions CMP_VAL1 and
CMP_VAL2, and
After the comparison values are loaded, the DO1 output must be enabled with
CRTL_DO1.
The following table shows you when the DO1 is switched on or off:
DO1 is switched on when

DO1 Is switched off when

V2 < V1
(see Figure below)

V2 counter status V1

V2 > counter status

or
counter status > V1

V2 = V1

V2 = counter status = V1

V2 counter status V1

V2 > V1
(see Figure below)

V1 > counter status

or
counter status > V2

V1 counter status V2

The comparison result is indicated by the status bit STS_CMP1. You can only acknowledge
and thus reset this bit when the comparison condition is no longer fulfilled.
There is no hysteresis in the case of this output behavior.
It is not possible to control the DO1 output with the SET_DO1 control bit in the case of this
output behavior.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

39

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes
Isochronous mode: In isochronous mode, as well, the DO1 output is switched as soon as the
comparison condition is fulfilled and is therefore independent of the bus cycle. The status of
the virtual output DO2 is signaled at time Ti.
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
9
9



W

'2

Figure 2-12

W

V2 < V1 at the Start of Counting

&RXQWHUVWDWXV
9
9



W

'2

Figure 2-13

W

V2 > V1 at the Start of Counting

Setting or Modifying the Function and Behavior of the Digital Output DO1
When setting or modifying the behavior of DO1, you must take all assignable
interdependencies into account. Failure to do so will generate a parameter assignment error
or a loading error.
Boundary conditions:
If you assign "Switch at Comparison Values" for DO1, you must:
Set hysteresis = 0, and
Assign "Output" for the DO2 output

Hysteresis
An encoder can remain at a particular position and then fluctuate around this position. This
state causes the counter status to fluctuate around a particular value. If there is a
comparison value in this fluctuation range, for example, the associated output is switched on
and off in accordance with the rhythm of the fluctuations. The 1Count24V is equipped with
programmable hysteresis to prevent this switching in response to small fluctuations. You can
assign a range between 0 and 255 (0 means: hysteresis switched off).
Hysteresis also works with overflow and underflow.

40

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Method of Operation with Counter Status Comparison Value and Counter Status Comparison
Value
The diagram below provides an example of how hysteresis works. The figure shows the
differences in the behavior of an output when hysteresis of 0 (= switched off) is assigned as
opposed to hysteresis of 3. In the example, the comparison value is 5.
The following settings are assigned for the counter: "Main count direction" = "Up" and
"Switch on at counter status comparison value".
When the comparison condition is met, hysteresis becomes active. While the hysteresis is
active, the comparison result remains unchanged.
If the count value goes outside the hysteresis range, hysteresis is no longer active. The
comparator switches again according to its comparison conditions.
&RXQWYDOXH











+\V

+\V

Figure 2-14

Example of How Hysteresis Works

Note
If the count direction changes on the comparison value when hysteresis is active, the output
is reset.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

41

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Method of Operation when the Comparison Value Is Reached and the Pulse Duration = 0
The diagram below provides an example of how hysteresis works. The figure shows the
various responses of an output with a hysteresis of 0 (= switched off) as opposed to
hysteresis of 3. In the example, the comparison value is 5.
The following settings are assigned for the counter: "Pulse on reaching the comparison
value", "No main count direction" and "Pulse duration = 0".
When the comparison conditions are met, hysteresis becomes active. While the hysteresis is
active, the comparison result remains unchanged. If the count value goes outside the
hysteresis range, hysteresis is no longer active. The comparator deletes the result of the
comparison.
&RXQWYDOXH











+\V

+\V

Figure 2-15

42

Example of How Hysteresis Works

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Method of Operation when the Comparison Value Is Reached, Output Pulse Duration
The diagram below provides an example of how hysteresis works. The figure shows the
various responses of an output with a hysteresis of 0 (= switched off) as opposed to
hysteresis of 3. In the example, the comparison value is 5.
The following settings are assigned for the counter: "Pulse on reaching the comparison
value", "No main count direction" and "pulse duration > 0".
When the comparison conditions have been met, hysteresis becomes active and a pulse of
the assigned duration is output.
If the count value goes outside the hysteresis range, hysteresis is no longer active.
When hysteresis is enabled, the 1Count24V stores the count direction.
If the hysteresis range is exited in a different direction to the one stored, a pulse is output.
&RXQWYDOXH











+\V

+\V

Figure 2-16

Example of How Hysteresis Works

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

43

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Controlling the Outputs Simultaneously with the Comparators

If you have selected a comparison function for the outputs, you can continue to control the
outputs with SET_DO1 or SET_DO2. This allows you to simulate the effect of the
comparison functions on your control program:
The output is set with the positive edge of SET_DO1 or SET_DO2.
However, if the Pulse on Reaching the Comparison Value function is selected, only one
pulse with the specified duration is output. SET_DO1 and SET_DO2 have no effect when
pulse duration = 0.
The SET_DO1 control bit is not permitted with the Switch at Comparison Values output
behavior.
A negative edge of SET_DO1 or SET_DO2 resets the output.
Note that the comparators are still active and can set or reset the output if the comparison
result changes.
Note
An output set by SET_DO1 or SET_DO2 is not reset by the comparator.

Loading Comparison Values

You transfer the comparison values to the 1Count24V. The counting is not affected by this.

Valid Range for the Two Comparison Values

Main count direction:
None
Low counting limit
to
high counting limit

Main count direction:

Up
2147483648
to
high counting limit 1

Main count direction:

Down
1
to
2147483647

Modifying the Function and Behavior of Digital Outputs

You can modify the functions and behavior of the outputs during operation using the control
interface. The 1Count24V deletes the outputs and accepts the values as follows:
Function of digital outputs DO1 and DO2: If you change this function so that the
comparison condition is satisfied, the output is not set until after the next count pulse.
However, if hysteresis is enabled, the 1Count24V does not make any changes at the
output.
Hysteresis: An active hysteresis (see How Hysteresis Works) continues to be active
following the change. The new hysteresis range is applied the next time the comparison
value is reached.
Pulse duration: The new pulse duration takes effect with the next pulse.

44

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6.10

Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interface for the Count Modes
Note
For the 1Count24V, the following data of the control and feedback interface are consistent:
Bytes 0 to 3
Bytes 4 to 7
Bytes 8 to 11 (modified user data interface)
Use the access or addressing mode for data consistency over the entire control and
feedback interface on your master (only for configuration using the GSD file).

Assignment Tables
Table 2- 3
Address

Feedback Interface (Inputs)

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3
Byte 4

Count value or stored count value in the case of the latch function on the digital input
Bit 7:
Short circuit of the encoder supply
Bit 6:
Short circuit / wire break / overtemperature
Bit 5:
Parameter assignment error
Bit 4:
Reserve = 0
Bit 3:
Reserve = 0
Bit 2:
Resetting of status bits active
Bit 1:
Load function error
Bit 0:
Load function is running
Byte 5
Bit 7:
Down direction status
Bit 6:
Up direction status
Bit 5:
Reserve = 0
Bit 4:
DO2 status
Bit 3:
DO1 status
Bit 2:
Reserve = 0
Bit 1:
DI status
Bit 0:
Internal gate status
Byte 6
Bit 7:
Zero-crossing in the count range when counting without a main count
direction
Bit 6:
Low counting limit
Bit 5:
High counting limit
Bit 4:
Comparator 2 status
Bit 3:
Comparator 1 status
Bit 2:
Reserve = 0
Bit 1:
Reserve = 0
Bit 0:
Synchronization status
Byte 7
Reserve = 0
Bytes 8 to 11 Count value 1
1 Modified user data interface

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

Designation
ERR_24V
ERR_DO1
ERR_PARA

RES_STS_A
ERR_LOAD
STS_LOAD
STS_C_DN
STS_C_UP
STS_DO2
STS_DO1
STS_DI
STS_GATE
STS_ND
STS_UFLW
STS_OFLW
STS_CMP2
STS_CMP1

STS_SYN

45

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes
Table 2- 4

Control Interface (Outputs)

Address

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3

Load value direct, preparatory, comparison value 1 or 2

Byte 0

Behavior of DO1, DO2 of the 1Count24V

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Function DO1

Output

Switch on at counter status comparison value

Switch on at counter status comparison value

Pulse on reaching the comparison value

Switch at comparison values

blocked

blocked

blocked

Bit 5

Bit 4

Function DO2

Output

Switch on at counter status comparison value

Switch on at counter status comparison value

Pulse on reaching the comparison value

Bits 3, 6, and 7: Reserve = 0

Bytes 1 to 3

Byte 4

Pulse duration [2ms] DO1, DO2 (range 0 to 255)

Byte 3:

Reserve = 0

Bit 7:

Error diagnostics acknowledgment

CTRL_DO2

Bit 6:

Enable DO2

SET_DO2

Bit 5:

Control bit DO2

CTRL_DO1

Bit 4:

Enable DO1

SET_DO1

Bit 3:

Control bit DO1

RES_STS

Bit 2:

Start resetting of status bit

CTRL_SYN

Bit 1:

Enable synchronization

SW_GATE

Bit 0:

SW gate control bit

Bit 7:

Reserve = 0

Bit 6:

Reserve = 0

Bit 5:

Reserve = 0

C_DOPARAM

Bit 4:

Change function and behavior of DO1, DO2

CMP_VAL2

Bit 3:

Load comparison value 2

CMP_VAL1

Bit 2:

Load comparison value 1

LOAD_PREPARE

Bit 1:

Load counter preparatory

LOAD_VAL

Bit 0:

Load counter direct

Bytes 6 to 7

46

Hysteresis DO1, DO2 (range 0 to 255)

EXTF_ACK

Byte 5

1 Not

Byte 1:
Byte 2:

Reserve = 0 1

used for modified user interface

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Notes on the Control Bits

Table 2- 5

Notes on the Control Bits

Control bits

Notes

C_DOPARAM

Change function and behavior of DO1, DO2

The values from bytes 0 to 2 are applied as new function, hysteresis, and pulse duration of DO1,
DO2. This may result in the following error: The conditions for the "Switch at comparison values"
behavior are not fulfilled.

CMP_VAL1

Load comparison value 1

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is transferred to comparison value 1 with the control bit "Load
comparison value CMP_VAL1".

CMP_VAL2

Load comparison value 2

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is transferred to comparison value 2 with the control bit "Load
comparison value CMP_VAL2".

CTRL_DO1

Enable DO1
You use this bit to enable the DO1 output.

CTRL_DO2

Enable DO2
You use this bit to enable the DO2 output.

CTRL_SYN

You use this bit to enable synchronization.

EXTF_ACK

Error acknowledgment

LOAD_PREPARE

Load counter preparatory

The error bits must be acknowledged with the EXTF_ACK control bit after the cause is removed.
The value from bytes 0 to 3 is applied as the load value.
LOAD_VAL

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is loaded directly as the new count value.

RES_STS

Start resetting of status bit

The status bits are reset through the acknowledgment process between the RES_STS bit and the
RES_STS_A bit.

SET_DO1

Control bit DO1

Switches the DO1 digital output on and off when CTRL_DO1 is set.

SET_DO2

Control bit DO2

SW_GATE

SW gate control bit

Switches the DO2 digital output on and off when CTRL_DO2 is set.
The SW gate is opened/closed via the control interface with the SW_GATE bit.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

47

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Table 2- 6

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Feedback bits

Notes

ERR_24V

Short circuit of the encoder supply

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit
Diagnostic message if assigned.

ERR_DO1

Short circuit/wire break/overtemperature due to overload at output DO1

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit
Diagnostic message if assigned.

ERR_LOAD

Load function error

The LOAD_VAL, LOAD_PREPARE, CMP_VAL1, CMP_VAL2, and C_DOPARAM bits cannot be set
simultaneously during transfer. This results in setting the ERR_LOAD status bit, similar to loading an
incorrect value (which is not accepted).

ERR_PARA

Parameter assignment error ERR_PARA

RES_STS_A

Resetting of status bits active

STS_C_DN

Down direction status

STS_C_UP

Up direction status

STS_CMP1

Comparator 1 status
The STS_CMP1 status bit indicates that the output is or was switched on. It must be acknowledged
with the RES_STS control bit. If the status bit is acknowledged when the output is still switched on,
the bit is set again immediately. This bit is also set if the SET_DO1 control bit is used when DO1 is
not enabled.

STS_CMP2

Comparator 2 status
The STS_CMP2 status bit indicates that the output is or was switched on. It must be acknowledged
with the RES_STS control bit. If the status bit is acknowledged when the output is still switched on,
the bit is set again immediately. This bit is also set if the SET_DO2 control bit is used when DO2 is
not enabled.

STS_DI

DI status
The status of the DI is indicated in all modes with the STS_DI bit in the feedback interface.

STS_DO1

DO1 status
The STS_DO1 status bit indicates the status of the DO1 digital output.

STS_DO2

DO2 status
The STS_DO2 status bit indicates the status of the virtual DO2 digital output.

STS_GATE

Internal gate status: Counting

STS_LOAD

Load function is running

STS_ND

Zero-crossing in the count range when counting without a main counting direction. The bit must be
reset by the RES_STS control bit.

STS_OFLW

High counting limit violated

STS_UFLW

Low counting limit violated

Both bits must be reset.

STS_SYN

Synchronization status
After successful synchronization, the STS_SYN bit is set. It must be reset by the RES_STS control
bit.

48

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Table 2- 7

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Configuring with STEP 7
using the GSD file 1)
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUS-DP\Additional
FIELD DEVICES\I/O\ET 200S)

Configuring with STEP 7

using HW Config
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUSDP\ET 200S)

Feedback interface

Read with SFC 14 "DPRD_DAT"

Load command (e.g. L PID)

Control interface

Write with SFC 15 "DPWR_DAT"

Transfer command (e.g. T PQD)

Load and transfer commands are also possible with CPU 3xxC, CPU 3xx with MMC, CPU 4xx (V3.0 and later), and
WinLC RTX (PC CPU).

Resetting of the Status Bits

STS_SYN, STS_CMP1, STS_CMP2, STS_OFLW, STS_UFLW, STS_ND
(YHQWVWLOOSHQGLQJRQUHVHW

)HHGEDFNVLJQDOV
RQHRIWKHVWDWXVELWV

&RQWUROELW
5(6B676

)HHGEDFNELW
5(6B676B$
W

5HVHWH[HFXWHG
5HTXHVWFDQFHOHG
&RXQW9H[HFXWHVWKHUHVHW
5HTXHVWUHVHW

Figure 2-17

Resetting of the Status Bits

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

49

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

(UURUELW
(55B/2$'
&RQWUROELW
/2$'B9$/
/2$'B35(3$5(
&03B9$/
&03B9$/
&B'23$5$0

)HHGEDFNELW
676B/2$'
W
9DOXHDSSOLHG(QGRIWUDQVIHU
5HPRYDORIUHTXHVWDQGYDOXH
FRQWLQXHSURYLGLQJ
&RXQW9KDVXQGHUVWRRGWKHUHTXHVW
5HTXHVWYDOXHWUDQVIHUDQGPDNHYDOXHDYDLODEOH

Figure 2-18

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

Note
Only one of the following control bits can be set at a particular time:
CMP_VAL1 or CMP_VAL2 or LOAD_VAL or LOAD_PREPARE or C_DOPARAM.
Otherwise, the ERR_LOAD error is reported until all the specified control bits are deleted
again.
The ERR_LOAD error bit is only deleted when the following is carried out correctly.

50

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

In isochronous mode, exactly 4 bus cycles are always required to reset the status bits and to
accept values during the load function.
VW'3F\FOH

QG'3F\FOH

UG'3F\FOH

WK'3F\FOH

&RQWUROELW
LQXVHU
SURJUDP

6WDWXVELW
RIPRGXOH
7L
7'3

Figure 2-19

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

Error Detection
The program errors must be acknowledged. They have been detected by the 1Count24V
and are indicated at the feedback interface. Channel-specific diagnostics are performed if
you have enabled group diagnostics in your configuration (see device manual of the
interface module used).
The parameter assignment error bit is acknowledged by means of correct parameter
assignment.
$QHUURUKDVRFFXUUHGWKH&RXQW9VHWVDQHUURUELWD
GLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHPD\DSSHDUHUURUGHWHFWLRQFRQWLQXHV

(UURUHOLPLQDWHGZKHQ(;7)B$&.LVVHWE\WKHXVHU
SURJUDPWKH&RXQW9GHOHWHVWKHHUURUELWDGLDJQRVWLF
PHVVDJHPD\DSSHDU

HJHUURUELW
(55B9

(UURUDFNQRZOHGJPHQW
(;7)B$&.

Figure 2-20

Error Acknowledgment

In the case of continuous error acknowledgment (EXTF_ACK=1) or at CPU/Master Stop, the

1Count24V signals errors as soon as they are detected and resets them as soon as they
have been eliminated.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

51

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes

2.6.11

Parameter Assignment for the Count Modes

Introduction
You can use either of the following to assign parameters for the 1Count24V:
STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 or later
A GSD file (http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/gsd)

Parameter List for Counting Modes

Table 2- 8

Parameter List for Counting Modes

Parameters

Value range

Default

Disable/enable

Disable

Enable
Group diagnostics

Response to failure of the higher-level controller

Response to CPU/master STOP

Turn off DO1/

Continue working mode/
DO1 substitute a value/
DO1 keep last value

Turn off DO1

Pulse and direction/

Rotary encoder single/
double/
quadruple

Pulse and direction

Encoder parameters
Signal evaluation A, B

Encoder and input filter

At count input (track A)
At direction input (track B)
At digital input DI

2.5 s/25 s
2.5 s/25 s
2.5 s/25 s

2.5 s
2.5 s
2.5 s

Sensor A, B, DI

24V P switch, normal mode/

24V M switch

24V P switch, normal

mode

Direction input B

Normal/Inverted

Normal

Function DO1

Output/
Switch on at counter status comparison value/
Switch on at counter status comparison value/
Pulse on reaching the comparison value/
Switch at comparison values

Output

Function DO2

Output/
Switch on at counter status comparison value/
Switch on at counter status comparison value/
Pulse on reaching the comparison value

Output

Substitute value DO1

0/1

Off/on

Off

Hysteresis DO1, DO2

0...255

Pulse duration [2 ms] DO1, DO2

0...255

Output parameters

Diagnostics

52

DO11

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.6 Count Modes
Parameters
Mode

Value range

Default

Counting mode

Continuous counting/
Once-only counting/
Periodic counting

Count continuously

Gate function

Cancel counting/
Interrupt counting

Cancel counting

Input signal HW gate

Normal/Inverted

Normal

Function DI

Input /
HW gate /
Latch and retrigger at positive edge /
Synchronization at positive edge /
Latch at positive edge

Input

Synchronization2

Once-only/Periodically

Once-only

Main count direction

None/Up/Down

None

High counting limit

2 7FFF FFFF

7FFF FFFF

DO1 diagnostics (wire break, short circuit) is possible only with pulse lengths of > 90 ms on digital output DO1.

Only relevant if Function DI = Synchronization at positive edge

Parameter Assignment Error

Incorrect mode
Incorrect main count direction
The "Input signal HW gate" parameter is set to inverted and the "Function DI" parameter
is not set to HW gate.
High counting limit incorrect
The value for the behavior of DO2 is not set to output although "Switch at comparison
values" has been assigned for DO1.
The value for hysteresis does not equal 0 although "Switch at comparison values" has
been assigned for DO1.

What to Do in the Event of Errors

Check the set value ranges.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

53

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7

Measurement Modes

2.7.1

Overview

Introduction
For the "Measuring Mode" parameter, you can select from the following modes:
Frequency measurement
Period measurement
Rotational speed measurement
For the "Measuring Method" parameter, you can select from the measurement methods:
With integration time
Continuous
To run one of these modes, you have to assign parameters to the 1Count24V.
(see section "Parameter Assignment for Measurement Modes (Page 82)")

Sequence of Measurements with Integration Time

The measurement is carried out during the assigned integration time. When the integration
time elapses, the measured value is updated.
The end of a measurement is indicated by the STS_CMP1 status bit. This bit is reset by the
RES_STS control bit in the control interface.
If there were not at least two rising edges in the assigned integration time, 0 is returned as
the measured value.
A value of -1 is returned up until the end of the first integration time.
You can change the integration time for the next measurement during operation.

Direction Reversal
If the direction of rotation is reversed during an integration time, the measured value for this
measurement period is uncertain. If you evaluate the STS_C_UP and STS_C_DN feedback
bits (direction evaluation), you can respond to any process irregularities.

54

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.2

Sequence of continuous-action measurement

Measuring Principle
The 1Count24V counts each positive edge of a pulse and assigns it a time value in s.
The update time indicates the time interval at which the measured value is updated by the
module in the feedback interface.
Rule for pulse sequences with one or several pulses per update time:
Dynamic measuring time =

Time of last pulse in the current update time interval

minus
Time of last pulse in the previous update time interval

When the update time has elapsed, a new measured value is calculated and output with the
dynamic measuring time.
If the current update time does not contain a pulse, the following dynamic measuring time
results:
Dynamic measuring time =

Time of current, elapsed update time

minus
Time of last pulse

When the update time has elapsed, an estimated measured value is calculated with the
dynamic measuring time under the assumption that a pulse occurred at the end of the
update time.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

55

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes
If the "1 Pulse per dynamic measuring time" estimated measured value is less than the last
measured value during the frequency and speed measurement, this estimated measured
value is output as the new measured value. With the period measurement, the dynamic
measuring time is output as the estimated period if the dynamic measuring time is greater
than the last measured period.
8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH

'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH
'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH
'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH

Figure 2-21

Measuring Principle

The 1Count24V measures continuously. When assigning parameters, you specify an update
time.
During the time until the end of the first elapsed update time, a value of "-1" is returned.
The continuous measurement begins after the gate is opened with the first pulse of the pulse
train to be measured. The first measured value can be calculated after the second pulse, at
the earliest.
A measured value (frequency, period, or speed) is output in the feedback interface each time
the update time elapses. The end of a measurement is indicated with the STS_CMP1 status
bits. This bit is reset with the RES_STS and RES_STS_A bits according to the complete
acknowledgement principle.
If the direction of rotation is reversed during an update time, the measured value for this
measurement period is undefined. By evaluating the STS_C_DN and STS_C_UP feedback
bits (direction evaluation), you can respond to any process irregularities.

56

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes
The following figure illustrates the principle of continuous measurement using frequency
measurement as an example.
*DWH

3XOVHWUDLQ
0HDVXUHG
YDOXH








8SGDWHWLPH



Figure 2-22

Principle of Continuous Measurement (Frequency Measurement Example)

Gate Control
To control the 1Count24V, you have to use the gate functions.

Isochronous Mode
In isochronous mode, the 1Count24V accepts control bits and control values from the control
interface in each bus cycle and reports back the response in the same cycle.
In each cycle, the 1Count24V transfers a measured value and the status bits that were valid
at time Ti.
The measurement starts and ends at time Ti.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

57

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Integration Time and Update Time in Isochronous Mode

If the integration time/update time lasts several TDP cycles, you can recognize the new
measured value in the user program at the bit STS_CMP1 status bit (measurement
completed) of the feedback interface. This enables monitoring of the measuring operation or
a synchronization with the measuring operation. It takes 4 TDP cycles, however, for this
message to be acknowledged. The minimum integration time/update time in this case is
(4 x TDP).
If the application can tolerate a jitter in the integration time/update time of TDP and a
measured value that remains constant for several cycles, you do not need to continually
evaluate status bit STS_CMP1. Integration times/update times of (1 x TDP) to (3 x TDP) are
then possible.
Because isochronous operation was lost in the last TDP cycle of the integration time, the
integration time/update time is increased by one TDP cycle. This does not corrupt the
measured value.
Note
The value range limits for the integration time/update time must not be exceeded (see tables
for the individual measuring modes).
A violation of the value range limits will result in a parameter assignment error, and the
1Count24V will not go into isochronous mode.
Note
When you change the configuration from non-isochronous to isochronous mode and vice
versa, you must always adjust the integration time/update time parameter if you want to keep
the length of the integration time/update time.

58

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.3

Frequency measurement with integration time

Definition
In frequency measurement mode, the 1Count24V counts the pulses that arrive within a set
integration time.

Integration time
Your preset the integration time with the integration time parameter (see table).
Table 2- 9

Calculation of the Integration Time

Boundary Conditions

Integration time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous Mode

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

nmax
1

(10 ms/TDP [ms]) +1

1

1000
1

1000
10000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

1 Any

digits after the decimal point that come about after dividing by TDP are omitted.
It is not permitted to violate these limits. If these limits are violated, the 1Count24V generates a parameter assignment
error and will not go into isochronous mode.

Frequency Measurement
The value of the calculated frequency is made available in the unit 10-3 Hz. The measured
frequency value can be read in the feedback interface (byte 0 to 3).
,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDOJDWH
%HJLQQLQJRIIUHTXHQF\
PHDVXUHPHQW

Figure 2-23

(QGRI
)UHTXHQF\PHDVXUHPHQW

Frequency Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

59

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
Low limit fu
0 to 99,999,999

High limit fo
10-3

Hz

fu+1 to 100,000,000 10-3 Hz

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

Integration time

60

fmin absolute error

fmax absolute error

10 s

0.1 Hz 0.001 Hz

100 000 Hz 18 Hz

1s

1 Hz 0.001 Hz

100 000 Hz 11 Hz

0.1 s

10 Hz 0.002 Hz

100 000 Hz 10 Hz

0.01 s

100 Hz 0.013 Hz

100 000 Hz 13 Hz

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.4

Continuous Frequency Measurement

Definition
In frequency measurement mode, the 1Count24V counts the pulses that arrive within a
dynamic measuring period.

Update Time
The 1Count24V updates the measured values cyclically. You preset the update time with the
Update Time parameter (see table). You can change the update time during operation.
Table 2- 10

Calculation of the Update Time

Boundary conditions

Update time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

nmax
1

(10 ms/TDP [ms]) +1

1

1000
1

1000
10000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

Any digits after the decimal point resulting from division by TDP are omitted.
These limits may not be violated. If these limits are violated, the 1Count24V generates a parameter assignment error and
will not go into isochronous mode.
1

Frequency measurement
The value of the calculated frequency is made available in the unit 10-3 Hz. The measured
frequency value can be read in the feedback interface (byte 0 to 3).
8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDOJDWH
6WDUWRIIUHTXHQF\
PHDVXUHPHQW

Figure 2-24

(QGRI
IUHTXHQF\PHDVXUHPHQW

Frequency Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

61

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
Encoder type

Low limit fu

24-V encoders 0 to 99,999,999

High limit fo
10-3

Hz

fu+1 to 100,000,000 10-3 Hz

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

Frequency f

Absolute error

0.1 Hz

0.001 Hz

1 Hz

0.001 Hz

10 Hz

0.003 Hz

100 Hz

0.02 Hz

1 000 Hz

0.18 Hz

10 000 Hz

1.8 Hz

100 000 Hz

18 Hz

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Measurement Modes (Page 72)")

Function of the Digital Output DO1

For the "Function DO1" parameter, select one of the following functions for the DO1 digital
output:
Output (no switching by the limit-value monitoring)
Measured value outside the limits
Measured value under the low limit
Measured value over the high limit
(see section "Behavior of the Output in Measurement Modes (Page 73)")

Changing Values during Operation

The following values can be changed during operation:
Low limit (LOAD_PREPARE)
High limit (LOAD_VAL)
Function of the Digital Output DO1 (C_DOPARAM)
Integration time/update time (C_INTTIME)
(see section "Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interfaces for the Measurement
Modes (Page 75)")

62

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.5

Rotational speed measurement with integration time

Definition
In rotational speed measurement mode, the 1Count24V counts the pulses that arrive from a
tachometer generator within a set integration time and calculates the speed of the connected
motor.

Integration Time
You preset the integration time with the Integration Time parameter (see table).
Table 2- 11

Calculation of the Integration Time

Boundary conditions

Integration time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

nmax
1

(10 ms/TDP [ms]) +

1

1000
11

1000
10000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

1 Any

digits after the decimal point that come about after dividing by TDP are omitted.
These limits must not be violated. If these limits are violated, the 1Count24V generates a parameter assignment error and
will not go into isochronous mode.

Rotational Speed Measurement

For rotational speed measurement mode, you also have to assign the pulses per encoder or
motor revolution.
The rotational speed is returned in the unit 1x10-3 /min.
,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDO*DWH
%HJLQQLQJRIURWDWLRQDO
VSHHGPHDVXUHPHQW

Figure 2-25

(QGRIURWDWLRQDO
VSHHGPHDVXUHPHQW

Rotational Speed Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

63

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
Low limit nu

High limit no

0 to 24 999 999

x10-3

/min

nu+1 to 25 000 000 x10-3 /min

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

Table 2- 12

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication (Number of Pulses per Encoder
Revolution = 60)

Integration time

64

nmin absolute error

nmax absolute error

10 s

1 /min 0.03 /min

25000 /min 4.5 /min

1s

1 /min 0.03 /min

25000 /min 2.8 /min

0.1 s

10 /min 0.03 /min

25000 /min 2.6 /min

0.01 s

100 /min 0.04 /min

25000 /min 3.2 /min

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.6

Continuous Rotational Speed Measurement

Definition
In rotational speed measurement mode, the 1Count24V counts the pulses that are received
from a tachometer generator within a dynamic measuring time, and calculates the speed
from this value with the number of pulses per encoder revolution.

Update time
The 1Count24V updates the measured values cyclically. You preset the update time with the
Update Time parameter (see table). You can change the update time during operation.
Table 2- 13

Calculation of the Update Time

Boundary conditions

Update time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

nmax

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

1000

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

(10 ms/TDP [ms]) + 1 1

1000

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

10000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

1 Any digits after the decimal point resulting from division by TDP are omitted.
These limits may not be violated. If these limits are violated, the 1Count24V generates a parameter assignment error and
will not go into isochronous mode.

Rotational Speed Measurement

For the rotational speed measurement mode, you must also assign the pulses per encoder
revolution.
The rotational speed is returned in the unit 1x10-3 /min.
8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDOJDWH
6WDUWRIURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
PHDVXUHPHQW

Figure 2-26

(QGRI
URWDWLRQDOVSHHGPHDVXUHPHQW

Rotational Speed Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

65

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
Low limit nu

High limit no

0 to 24 999 999

x10-3

/min

nu+1 to 25 000 000 x10-3 /min

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

Table 2- 14

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication (Number of Pulses per Encoder
Revolution = 60)

Rotational speed n

Absolute error

1 /min

0.04 /min

10 /min

0.04 /min

100 /min

0.05 /min

1 000 /min

0.21 /min

10 000 /min

1.82 /min

25 000 /min

4.50 /min

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Measurement Modes (Page 72)")

Function of the Digital Output DO1

For the "Function DO1" parameter, select one of the following functions for the DO1 digital
output:
Output (no switching by the limit-value monitoring)
Measured value outside the limits
Measured value under the low limit
Measured value over the high limit
(see section "Behavior of the Output in Measurement Modes (Page 73)")

Values that Can Be Changed During Operation

Low limit (LOAD_PREPARE)
High limit (LOAD_VAL)
Function of the digital output DO1 (C_DOPARAM)
Integration time/update time (C_INTTIME)
(see section "Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interfaces for the Measurement
Modes (Page 75)")

66

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.7

Period measurement with integration time

Definition
In period measurement mode, the 1Count24V measures the time between two positive
edges of the counting signal by counting the pulses of an internal quartz-accurate reference
frequency (16 MHz) within a preset integration time.

Integration Time
You preset the integration time with the Integration Time parameter (see table).
Table 2- 15

Calculation of the Integration Time

Boundary conditions

Integration time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

Any TDP

nmax

n x 10 ms

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

1
10 ms/TDP [ms]
1

12000
+1 1

12000
120000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

Any digits after the decimal point resulting from division by TDP are omitted.
These limits may not be violated. If these limits are violated, the 1Count24V generates a parameter assignment error and
will not go into isochronous mode.
1

Period measurement
The value of the calculated period is given in the unit 1 s or 1/16 s. The measured period
can be read in the feedback interface (byte 0 to 3).
,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

3HULRG

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDOJDWH
6WDUWRISHULRG
PHDVXUHPHQW

Figure 2-27

(QGRISHULRG
PHDVXUHPHQW

Period Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

67

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
1 s resolution
Low limit Tu

High limit To

0 to 119 999 999 s

Tu+1 to 120 000 000 s

1/16 s resolution
Low limit Tu

High limit To

0 to 1 919 999 999 s

Tu+1 to 1 920 000 000 s

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

1 s resolution
Integration time

Tmin absolute error

T absolute error

100 s

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (100 000 000 10 000)

10 s

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (10 000 000 1 000)

1s

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (1 000 000 100)

0.1 s

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (100 000 10)

0.01 s

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (10 000 1)

1/16 s resolution
Integration time
100 s

68

Tmin absolute error

T absolute error

1/16 s* (160 0)

1/16 s* (1 600 000 000 160 000)

10 s

1/16 s* (160 0)

1/16 s* (160 000 000 16 000)

1s

1/16 s* (160 0)

1/16 s* (16 000 000 1 600)

0.1 s

1/16 s* (160 0)

1/16 s* (1 600 000 160)

0.01 s

1/16 s* (160 0)

1/16 s* (160 000 16)

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.8

Continuous Period Measurement

Definition
In period measurement mode, the 1Count24V indicates the dynamic measuring time as a
period. If the period is less than the update time, then an average is calculated for the period.

Update Time
The 1Count24V updates the measured values cyclically. You preset the update time with the
Update Time parameter (see table). You can change the update time during operation.
Table 2- 16

Calculation of the Update Time

Boundary conditions

Update time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

nmax
1

10 ms/TDP [ms] +1
1

12000
1

12000
120000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

Any digits after the decimal point resulting from division by TDP are omitted.
These limits may not be violated. If these limits are violated, the 1Count24V generates a parameter assignment error and
will not go into isochronous mode.
1

Period measurement
The value of the calculated period is given in the unit 1 s or 1/16 s. The measured period
can be read in the feedback interface (byte 0 to 3).

8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

3HULRG

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDOJDWH
6WDUWRISHULRGPHDVXUH
PHQW

Figure 2-28

(QGRISHULRGPHDVXUH
PHQW

Period Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

69

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
1 s resolution
Low limit Tu

High limit To

0 to 119 999 999 s

Tu+1 to 120 000 000 s

1/16 s resolution
Low limit Tu

High limit To

0 to 1 919 999 999 s

Tu+1 to 1 920 000 000 s

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

1 s resolution
Period Tmin Absolute error

Period Tmin Absolute error

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (100 000 10)

1 s* (100 0)

1 s* (1 000 000 100)

1 s* (1 000 0)

1 s* (10 000 000 1 002)

1 s* (10 000 0)

1 s* (100 000 000 10 020)

1/16 s resolution

70

Period Tmin Absolute error

Period Tmin Absolute error

1/16 s* (160 1)

1/16 s* (1 600 000 160)

1/16 s* (1 600 1)

1/16 s* (16 000 000 1 600)

1/16 s* (16 000 3)

1/16 s* (160 000 000 16 000)

1/16 s* (160 000 20)

1/16 s* (1 600 000 000 160 000)

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Measurement Modes (Page 72)")

Function of the Digital Output DO1

For the "Function DO1" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital output:
Output (no switching by the limit-value monitoring)
Measured value outside the limits
Measured value under the low limit
Measured value over the high limit
(see section "Behavior of the Output in Measurement Modes (Page 73)")

Values that Can Be Changed During Operation

Low limit (LOAD_PREPARE)
High limit (LOAD_VAL)
Function of the Digital Output DO1 (C_DOPARAM)
Integration time/update time (C_INTTIME)
(see section "Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interfaces for the Measurement
Modes (Page 75)")

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

71

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.9

Gate Functions in Measurement Modes

Software Gate and Hardware Gate

The 1Count24V has two gates
A software gate (SW gate), which is controlled by the SW_GATE control bit.
The software gate can only be opened by a positive edge of the SW_GATE control bit. It
is closed when this bit is reset. Note the transfer times and run times of your control
program.
A hardware gate (HW gate), which is controlled by means of the digital input on the
1Count24V. You assign the hardware gate as the function of the digital input (Function DI
"HW Gate"). It is opened on a positive edge at the digital input and closed on a negative
edge.
Internal gate
The internal gate is the logical AND operation of the HW gate and SW gate. Counting is only
active when the HW gate and the SW gate are open. The STS_GATE feedback bit (internal
gate status) indicates this. If a HW gate has not been assigned, the setting of the SW gate is
decisive.

Gate Control
Gate control by means of the SW gate only
The opening/closing of the SW gate starts/stops measurement.
If the SW gate is opened in isochronous mode in bus cycle "n" by setting the SW_GATE
control bit, measurement starts at time Ti in cycle "n+1".
Gate control by SW gate and HW hate
The opening and closing of the SW gate with the HW gate open starts/stops measurement.
The opening and closing of the HW gate with the SW gate open starts/stops measurement.
The SW gate is opened/closed by means of the control interface with the SW_GATE bit.
The HW gate is opened/closed by means of a 24-V signal on the digital input.
In isochronous mode, when the SW gate is open, measurement starts at time Ti,
immediately after the HW gate has opened. The measurement ends at time Ti, which occurs
immediately after the HW gate has closed.
When the HW gate is open, the measurement starts at time Ti in the cycle, immediately after
the SW has opened, and ends at time Ti in the cycle, which occurs immediately after the SW
gate has closed.

72

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.10

Behavior of the Output in Measurement Modes

Introduction
The various ways of setting the behavior of the output are described in this section.

Behavior of the Output in Measuring Modes

You can assign parameters for the digital output of the 1Count24V.
You can store a high and a low limit for frequency measurement, rotational speed
measurement or period measurement. If the limits are violated, digital output DO1 is
activated. These limit values can be assigned and changed with the load function.
You can change the function and the behavior of the digital output during operation. The new
function takes effect immediately. In isochronous mode it always takes effect at time Ti.
You can choose from the following functions:
Output
Measured value outside the limits (limit-value monitoring)
Measured value under the low limit (limit-value monitoring)
Measured value over the high limit (limit-value monitoring)

Output
If you want to switch the output on or off, you must enable it with the CTRL_DO1 control bit.
You can switch the output on and off with the SET_DO1 control bit.
You can query the status of the output with the STS_DO1 status bit in the feedback
interface.
In isochronous mode, the output is switched at time To.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

73

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring

2)/:

8)/:

*DWHVWDUW

0HDVXUHGYDOXH
/RZ
OLPLW

Figure 2-29

+LJK
OLPLW

Limit-Value Monitoring

After the integration time elapses, the measured value obtained (frequency, rotational speed,
or period) is compared with the assigned limit values.
If the current measured value is under the assigned low limit (measured value <low limit), the
STS_UFLW = 1 bit is set in the feedback interface.
If the current measured value is over the assigned high limit (measured value > high limit),
the STS_OFLW = 1 bit is set in the feedback interface.
You must acknowledge these bits with the RES_STS control bit.
If the measured value is still outside or again outside the limits after acknowledgment, the
corresponding status bit is set again.
If you set the low limit at 0, you switch off dynamic monitoring of violation of the low limit
value.
Depending on the parameter assignment, the enabled digital output DO1 can be set by the
limit-value monitoring:
"Function DO1" parameter

DO1 is Set ...

Measured value outside the limits

Measured value < low limit

OR
measured value > high limit

Measured value under the low limit

Measured value < low limit

Measured value over the high limit

Measured value > high limit

In isochronous mode the output is switched at the end of measurement at time Ti.

74

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.11

Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interfaces for the Measurement

Modes
Note
For the 1Count24V, the following data of the control and feedback interface are consistent:
Bytes 0 to 3
Bytes 4 to 7
Bytes 8 to 11 (modified user data interface)
Use the access or addressing mode for data consistency over the entire control and
feedback interface on your master (only for configuration using the GSD file).

Assignment Tables
Table 2- 17
Address

Feedback Interface (Inputs)

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3
Byte 4

Measured value
Bit 7:
Short circuit of the encoder supply
Bit 6:
Short circuit / wire break / overtemperature
Bit 5:
Parameter assignment error
Bit 4:
Reserve = 0
Bit 3:
Reserve = 0
Bit 2:
Resetting of status bits active
Bit 1:
Load function error
Bit 0:
Load function is running
Byte 5
Bit 7:
Down direction status
Bit 6:
Up direction status
Bit 5:
Reserve = 0
Bit 4:
Reserve = 0
Bit 3:
DO1 status
Bit 2:
Reserve = 0
Bit 1:
DI status
Bit 0:
Internal gate status
Byte 6
Bit 7:
Reserve = 0
Bit 6:
Low limit of measuring range
Bit 5:
High limit of measuring range
Bit 4:
Reserve = 0
Bit 3:
Measurement completed
Bit 2:
Reserve = 0
Bit 1:
Reserve = 0
Bit 0:
Reserve = 0
Byte 7
Reserve = 0
Bytes 8 to 11
Count value 1
1 Modified user data interface

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

Designation
ERR_24V
ERR_DO1
ERR_PARA

RES_STS_A
ERR_LOAD
STS_LOAD
STS_C_DN
STS_C_UP

STS_DO1
STS_DI
STS_GATE
STS_UFLW
STS_OFLW
STS_CMP1

75

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes
Table 2- 18

Control Interface (Outputs)

Address

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3

Low limit or high limit

Function of DO1
Byte 0:

Bit 1

Bit 0

Function DO1

Output

Measured value outside the limits

Measured value under the low limit

Measured value over the high limit

Bytes 1 to 3:

Reserve = 0

Integration time
Byte 0, 1:

Integration time [n*10ms]

(Range 1 to 1000/12000)

Byte 4

Byte 5

Bytes 6 to 7
1

Byte 2, 3:

Reserve = 0

Bit 7:

Error diagnostics acknowledgement EXTF_ACK

Bit 6:

Reserve = 0

Bit 5:

Reserve = 0

Bit 4:

Enable DO1 CTRL_DO1

Bit 3:

Control bit DO1 SET_DO1

Bit 2:

Start resetting of status bit RES_STS

Bit 1:

Reserve = 0

Bit 0:

SW gate control bit SW_GATE

Bit 7:

Reserve = 0

Bit 6:

Reserve = 0

Bit 5:

Reserve = 0

Bit 4:

Change function of DO1, C_DOPARAM

Bit 3:

Reserve = 0

Bit 2:

Change integration time, C_INTTIME

Bit 1:

Load high limit LOAD_PREPARE

Bit 0:

Load low limit LOAD_VAL

Reserve = 0 1

Not used for modified user interface

76

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Notes on the Control Bits

Table 2- 19

Notes on the Control Bits

Control bits

Notes

C_DOPARAM

Change function of DO1

C_INTTIME

Change integration time

CTRL_DO1

Enable DO1

EXTF_ACK

Error acknowledgment

The value from byte 0 is adopted as the new function of DO1.

The value from bytes 0 and 1 is adopted as the new integration time for the next measurement.
You use this bit to enable the DO1 output.
The error bits must be acknowledged with the EXTF_ACK control bit after the cause is removed.
LOAD_PREPARE

Load high limit

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is adopted as the new high limit.

LOAD_VAL

Load low limit

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is adopted as the new low limit.

RES_STS

Start resetting of status bit

The status bits are reset through the acknowledgment process between the RES_STS bit and the
RES_STS_A bit.

SET_DO1

Control bit DO1

Switches the DO1 digital output on and off when CTRL_DO1 is set.

SW_GATE

SW gate control bit

The SW gate is opened/closed via the control interface with the SW_GATE bit.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

77

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Table 2- 20

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Feedback bits

Notes

ERR_24V

Short circuit of the encoder supply

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message if assigned.

ERR_DO1

Short circuit/wire break/overtemperature at output DO1

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message if assigned.

ERR_LOAD

Load function error

The LOAD_VAL, LOAD_PREPARE, C_DOPARAM, and C_INTTIME bits cannot be set
simultaneously during transfer. This results in setting the ERR_LOAD status bit, similar to loading an
incorrect value (which is not accepted).

ERR_PARA

Parameter assignment error ERR_PARA

RES_STS_A

Resetting of status bits active

STS_C_DN

Down direction status

STS_C_UP

Up direction status

STS_CMP1

Measurement completed
After every elapsed time interval (update time/integration time), the measured value is
updated.
Measurement with integration time
The end of a measurement (after the interval has elapsed) is indicated with the STS_CMP1 status
bit.
Continuous measurement
At the end of the update time, the end of the measurement is signaled with status bit STS_CMP1 if a
measured value is output. The bit remains 0 if an estimated measured value is output.
This bit is reset by the RES_STS control bit in the control interface.

STS_DI

DI status
The status of the DI is indicated in all modes with the STS_DI bit in the feedback interface.

STS_DO1

DO1 status

STS_GATE

Internal gate status: Measuring

STS_LOAD

Load function is running

STS_OFLW

High measuring limit violated

STS_UFLW

Low measuring limit violated

Both bits must be reset.

78

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Table 2- 21

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Configuring with STEP 7
using the GSD file 1)
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUS-DP\Additional
FIELD DEVICES\I/O\ET 200S)

Configuring with STEP 7

using HW Config
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUSDP\ET 200S)

Feedback interface

Read with SFC 14 "DPRD_DAT"

Load command (e.g. L PID)

Control interface

Write with SFC 15 "DPWR_DAT"

Transfer command, e.g. T PQD

Load and transfer commands are also possible with CPU 3xxC, CPU 3xx with MMC, CPU 4xx (V3.0 and later), and
WinLC RTX (PC CPU).

Resetting of the Status Bits

STS_CMP1, STS_OFLW, STS_UFLW
(YHQWVWLOOSHQGLQJRQUHVHW

)HHGEDFNVLJQDOV
RQHRIWKHVWDWXVELWV

&RQWUROELW
5(6B676

)HHGEDFNELW
5(6B676B$
W

5HVHWH[HFXWHG
5HTXHVWFDQFHOHG
&RXQW9H[HFXWHVWKHUHVHW
5HTXHVWUHVHW

Figure 2-30

Resetting of the Status Bits

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

79

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

(UURUELW
(55B/2$'
&RQWUROELW
/2$'B9$/
/2$'B35(3$5(
&B'23$5$0
&B,177,0(

)HHGEDFNELW
676B/2$'
W
9DOXHDSSOLHG(QGRIWUDQVIHU
5HPRYDORIUHTXHVWDQGYDOXH
FRQWLQXHSURYLGLQJ
&RXQW9KDVXQGHUVWRRGWKHUHTXHVW
5HTXHVWYDOXHWUDQVIHUDQGPDNHYDOXHDYDLODEOH

Figure 2-31

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

Note
Only one of the following control bits can be set at a particular time:
LOAD_VAL or LOAD_PREPARE or C_DOPARAM or C_INTTIME.
Otherwise, the ERR_LOAD error is reported until all the specified control bits are deleted
again.
The ERR_LOAD error bit is only deleted when a correct value is transferred as follows.

80

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

In isochronous mode, exactly 4 bus cycles are always required to reset the status bits and to
accept values during the load function.
VW'3F\FOH

QG'3F\FOH

UG'3F\FOH

WK'3F\FOH

&RQWUROELW
LQXVHU
SURJUDP

6WDWXVELW
RIPRGXOH
7L
7'3

Figure 2-32

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

Error Detection
The diagnostic errors must be acknowledged. They have been detected by the 1Count24V
and are indicated at the feedback interface. Channel-specific diagnostics are performed if
you have enabled group diagnostics in your configuration (see device manual of the
interface module used).
The parameter assignment error bit is acknowledged by means of correct parameter
assignment.
$QHUURUKDVRFFXUUHGWKH&RXQW9VHWVDQHUURUELWD
GLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHPD\DSSHDUHUURUGHWHFWLRQFRQWLQXHV

(UURUHOLPLQDWHGZKHQ(;7)B$&.LVVHWE\WKHXVHU
SURJUDPWKH&RXQW9GHOHWHVWKHHUURUELWDGLDJQRVWLF
PHVVDJHPD\DSSHDU

HJHUURUELW
(55B9

(UURUDFNQRZOHGJPHQW
(;7)B$&.

Figure 2-33

Error Acknowledgment

In the case of constant error acknowledgement (EXTF_ACK = 1) or in CPU/master STOP

mode, the 1Count24V reports the errors as soon as they are detected and clears the errors
as soon as they are eliminated.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

81

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes

2.7.12

Parameter Assignment for Measurement Modes

Introduction
You can use either of the following to assign parameters for the 1Count24V:
STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 or later
A GSD file (http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/gsd)

Parameter List for Measuring Modes

Table 2- 22

Parameter List for Measuring Modes

Parameter

Value Range

Default

Disable/enable

Disable

Enable
Group diagnostics

Response to failure of the higher-level controller

Response to CPU/master STOP

Turn off DO1/

Continue working mode/
DO1 substitute a value/
DO1 keep last value

Turn off DO1

Pulse and direction/

Rotary encoder (single)

Pulse and Direction

- At count input (track A)

2.5 s/25 s

2.5 s

- At direction input (track B)

2.5 s/25 s

2.5 s

- At digital input DI

2.5 s/25 s

2.5 s

Sensor A, B, DI

24V P switch, normal mode/

24V M switch

24V P switch, normal mode

Direction input B

Normal/Inverted

Normal

Diagnostics DO1 1

Off/on

Off

Function DO1

Output/
Outside the limits/
Under the low limit/
Over the high limit

Output

Substitute value DO1

0/1

Encoder parameters
Signal evaluation A, B
Encoder and input filter

Output parameters

82

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.7 Measurement Modes
Parameter
Mode

Value Range

Default

Measuring mode

Frequency measurement/
Rotational speed measurement/
Period measurement

Frequency measurement

Measuring method

With integration time/continuous

With integration time

Resolution of period

1 s

1 s

1/16 s
Function DI

Input/HW gate

Input

Input signal HW gate

Normal/Inverted

Normal

Low limit

Frequency measurement:
0...fmax-1

Rotational speed measurement:

0...nmax-1

Period measurement:
0...Tmax-1

Frequency measurement:
low limit+1...fmax

fmax

Rotational speed measurement:

low limit+1...nmax

nmax

Period measurement:
low limit+1...Tmax

tmax

Frequency measurement:
1 to 1000

10

Rotational speed measurement:

1 to 1000

10

Period measurement:
1 to 12000

10

1...65535

High limit

Integration time [n*10ms] (update time)

Encoder pulses per revolution

DO1 diagnostics (wire break, short circuit) is possible only with pulse lengths of > 90 ms on digital output DO1.

Only relevant in rotational speed measurement mode

Parameter Assignment Error

The following parameter assignment errors may occur:
Incorrect mode
Low limit incorrect
High limit incorrect
Integration time incorrect
Encoder pulses incorrect

What to Do in the Event of Errors

Check the set value ranges.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

83

1Count24V
2.8 Fast mode

2.8

Fast mode

2.8.1

Overview

Introduction
This mode is suitable for position detection is especially short isochronous cycles.
This mode encompasses a subset of the functionality of the continuous counting mode.
It is intended for isochronous mode and differs from continuous counting by having a lower
TDP Modulemin and a TWA equal to zero. The module is operated in this mode as a pure
input module, i.e., there is no control interface in this operating mode.
This mode is available starting with FW Version V2.0 of the module. The module must be
configured as "1Count24V Fast Mode V2.0" in HW Config.
You can find the parameter assignment for "Fast Mode" in the chapter "Assigning
parameters for fast mode (Page 89)".

Maximum Count Range

A total of 25 bits are available for the count value.

Load Value
You can specify a load value for the 1Count24V.
This load value is applied directly as the start value.

Gate Control
To control the 1Count24V, you can use the HW gate.

State according to Parameter Assignment

Count value corresponds to the load value set in HW Config.

Isochronous Mode
In each cycle, the 1Count24V transfers the counter satus and the status bits that were valid
at time Ti.

84

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.8 Fast mode

2.8.2

Fast mode

Definition
In this mode, the 1Count24V counts continuously starting from the start value:
When counting up, if the 1Count24V reaches the maximum value that can be represented
with 25 bits (all bits of the counter are set) and another count pulse arrives, the count value
jumps to "0" and resumes counting from there without losing a pulse.
When counting down, if the 1Count24V reaches the value "0" and another count pulse
arrives, the count value jumps to the maximum value that can be represented with 25 bits (all
bits of the counter are set) and resumes counting without losing a pulse.

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select between the following functions:
Digital input off.
Input
HW gate (see chapter "Gate function in the case of fast mode (Page 85)")
Synchronization on positive edge (see chapter "Synchronization (Page 86)")

2.8.3

Gate function in the case of fast mode

Hardware Gate
The 1Count24V has a HW gate, which can be controlled via the digital input on the
1Count24V.
You assign the hardware gate as the function of the digital input (Function DI "HW Gate"). It
is opened on a positive edge at the digital input and closed on a negative edge.
If no HW gate is assigned, counting becomes active immediately.
The STS_GATE checkback signal indicates whether counting is active.
When the HW gate is opened, this causes counting to continue starting from the current
count.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

85

1Count24V
2.8 Fast mode

2.8.4

Synchronization

Introduction
In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "Synchronize on Positive Edge"
Function DI parameter.
,QWHUQDOFRXQWSXOVHV
XSRUGRZQ

'LJLWDO,QSXW
]HURPDUN

&RXQWYDOXH
6WDUWYDOXH

If you have assigned synchronization, the positive edge of a reference signal on the input
sets the 1Count24V to the start value.
The following conditions apply:
Fast mode must be active (HW gate).
When synchronization is activated, the first edge and each additional edge loads the
1Count24V with the start value.
The signal of a bounce-free switch or the zero mark of a rotary encoder can serve as the
reference signal.
The STS_DI feedback bit indicates the level of the reference signal.

86

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.8 Fast mode

2.8.5

Assignment of feedback interface for fast mode

Note
For the 1Count24V, the following data of the feedback interface are consistent:
Bytes 0 to 3
Use the access or addressing mode for data consistency over the entire control and
feedback interface on your master (only for configuration using the GSD file).

Assignment Tables
Address

Assignment

Name

Bytes 0 to 3

Bit 31

Sign of life

LZ

Bit 30

Isochronous mode applied

STS_TIC

Bit 29

Parameter assignment error

ERR_PARA

Bit 28

Group error
Encoder supply short circuit

EXTF

Bit 27

DI status

STS_DI

Bit 26

Status of direction up/down

STS_DIR

Bit 25

Status of (internal) gate

STS_GATE

Bits 0 to 24

Count value

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Feedback bit

Notes

LZ

The sign of life is toggled on each update of the feedback interface, i.e. the last sent value is inverted.

STS_TIC

Isochronous mode (if assigned) was applied.

ERR_PARA

The assigned module parameters are faulty.

EXTF

Group error
Possible cause:
Encoder supply short circuit
EXTF is reset when the causes of the errors are eliminated.

STS_DI
STS_DIR

The bit displays the status of the digital input DI.

Status of direction;
for encoder value change from larger to smaller encoder positions (including zero crossover) "1 "
for encoder value change from larger to smaller encoder positions (including zero crossover) "0 "

STS_GATE

Status of (internal) gate: Counting

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

87

1Count24V
2.8 Fast mode

Access to the Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Configuring with STEP 7 using HW Config
Feedback interface

Load command, e.g. L PID

Error Detection in Fast Mode

The encoder supply short circuit error is detected by the 1Count24V and indicated in the
feedback interface (EXTF).
The fault indication in the feedback interface is extinguished as soon as this error is no
longer detected by the 1Count24V.
The parameter error bit is acknowledged by means of a correct parameter assignment.

88

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.8 Fast mode

2.8.6

Assigning parameters for fast mode

Introduction
You use the following to assign parameters for the 1Count24V:
STEP 7 Version 5.4 or higher; if necessary, the HSP (hardware support package) must
be downloaded from the Internet

Parameter List for Fast Mode

Parameter

Value Range

Default

Response to failure of the higher-level controller

Response to CPU/master STOP

Stop operating mode

Stop operating mode

Continue operating mode

Basic parameters
Signal evaluation A, B

Pulse and direction/

Pulse and direction

Rotary encoder
single/double/quadruple
Encoder and input filter
At counter input (track A)
At direction input (track B)
At digital input DI
Sensor A, B, DI

2.5 s/25 s

2.5 s

2.5 s/25 s

2.5 s

2.5 s/25 s

2.5 s

24V P switch, push-pull/

24V P switch, push-pull

24V M switch
Direction input B

Normal/inverted

Normal

Fast mode

Fast mode

Fast mode

Gate function

Cancel counting/

Cancel counting

Mode

Interrupt counting
Input signal HW gate

Normal/inverted

Normal

Function DI

Input /

Input

HW gate/
Synchronization at positive edge
Load value

-16777216 ... +16777215

Parameter Assignment Error

The "Input signal HW gate" parameter is set to inverted and the "Function DI" parameter
is not set to HW gate.

What to Do in the Event of Errors

Check the set value ranges.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

89

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

2.9

Position feedback

2.9.1

Overview

Description
This mode encompasses a subset of the functionality of the continuous counting mode. It is
intended for isochronous mode and differs from continuous counting by a smaller TDP
Modulemin and a TWA equal to zero. This TWA equal to zero makes it possible to operate the
module as an input module only. In this case, however, the possible controls are no longer
synchronized with To but rather are executed in the TDP cycle before or after Ti.
To run this mode, you have to assign parameters to the 1Count24V (see section "Assigning
Parameters for Position Feedback (Page 107)").

Maximum Count Range

The high counting limit is +2147483647 (231 1).
The low counting limit is 2147483648 (231).

Load value
You can specify a load value for the 1Count24V.
This load value is either applied directly as the new count value (LOAD_VAL) or it is applied
as the new count value when the following events occur (LOAD_PREPARE):
The counting operation is started by a SW gate or HW gate (if the counting operation is
continued, the load value is not applied).
Synchronization
Latch and retrigger

Gate Control
To control the 1Count24V, you have to use the gate functions.

RESET States of the Following Values after Parameter Assignment

Table 2- 23

90

RESET States
Value

RESET state

Load value

Count value

Latch value

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

Isochronous mode
In isochronous mode, the 1Count24V accepts control bits and control values from the control
interface in each bus cycle and reports back the response in this mode in the same cycle or
in the next cycle.
In each cycle, the 1Count24V transfers the count or latch value that was valid at time Ti and
the status bits valid at time Ti.
A count controlled by hardware input signals can only be transferred in the same cycle if the
input signal occurred before time Ti.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

91

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

2.9.2

Position Detection

Definition
In this mode, the 1Count24V counts continuously starting from the load value:
If the 1Count24V reaches the high count limit when counting up, and another count pulse
then comes, it will jump to the low count limit and continue counting from there without
losing a pulse.
If the 1Count24V reaches the low count limit when counting down, and another count
pulse then comes, it will jump to the high count limit and continue counting from there
without losing a pulse.
The high counting limit is set at +2147483647 (231 1).
The low counting limit is set to 2147483648 (231).
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW

/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 2-34

*DWHVWRS

7LPH

Count Continuously with Gate Function

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions for Position Detection (Page 93)")
Latch function (see section "Latch Function (Page 96)")
Synchronization (see section "Synchronization (Page 99)")

92

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

2.9.3

Gate Functions for Position Detection

Software Gate and Hardware Gate

The 1Count24V has two gates
A software gate (SW gate), which is controlled by the SW_GATE control bit.
The software gate can only be opened by a positive edge of the SW_GATE control bit. It
is closed when this bit is reset. Note the transfer times and run times of your control
program.
A hardware gate (HW gate), which is controlled by means of the digital input on the
1Count24V.
You assign the hardware gate as the function of the digital input (Function DI "HW Gate").
It is opened on a positive edge at the digital input and closed on a negative edge.

Internal Gate
The internal gate is the logical AND operation of the HW gate and SW gate. Counting is only
active when the HW gate and the SW gate are open. The STS_GATE feedback bit (internal
gate status) indicates this. If a HW gate has not been assigned, the setting of the SW gate is
decisive. Counting is activated, interrupted, continued, and canceled by means of the
internal gate.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

93

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

Canceling- and Interrupting-Type Gate Function

When assigning the gate function, you can specify whether the internal gate is to cancel or
interrupt counting. When counting is canceled, after the gate is closed and restarted,
counting starts again from the beginning. When counting is interrupted, after the gate is
closed and restarted, counting continues from the previous value.
The diagrams below indicate how the interrupting and canceling gate functions work:
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW
/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 2-35

*DWHVWRS

*DWHVWDUW

7LPH

Position Detection, Up, Interrupting Gate Function

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW
/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 2-36

94

*DWHVWRS

*DWHVWDUW

7LPH

Position Detection, Down, Interrupting Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

Gate Control
Gate control by means of the SW gate only
When the gate is opened, one of the following occurs, depending on the parameter
assignment:
Counting continues from the current counter status
or
Counting starts from the load value
If the SW gate is opened in isochronous mode in bus cycle "n" by setting the SW_GATE
control bit, counting starts before or after Ti, depending on the position of Ti.
Gate control by means of the SW gate and HW gate
If the SW gate opens when the HW gate is already open, counting continues starting from
the current counter status.
When the HW gate is opened, one of the following occurs, depending on the parameter
assignment:
Counting continues from the current counter status
or
Counting starts from the load value
If the SW gate is opened in isochronous mode in bus cycle "n" by setting the SW_GATE
control bit, counting starts in cycle "n+1" before or after Ti, if the HW gate is already open at
this time. If the HW gate opens after the SW gate has been opened, then counting does not
start until the HW gate opens.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

95

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

2.9.4

Latch Function

Overview
There are two latch functions:
The Latch and Retrigger function
The Latch function

The Latch and Retrigger Function

In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "Latch and Retrigger on Positive
Edge" Function DI parameter.

&RXQWSXOVHV

6:B*$7(

',GLJLWDOLQSXW

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

/DWFKYDOXH

Figure 2-37

Latch and Retrigger with Load Value = 0

This function stores the current internal counter status of the 1Count24V and retriggers
counting when there is a positive edge on the digital input. This means that the current
internal counter status at the time of the positive edge is stored (latch value), and the
1Count24V is then loaded again with the load value, from which counting resumes.
The counting mode must be enabled with the SW gate before the function can be executed.
It is started with the first positive edge on the digital input.
The stored counter status rather than the current counter status is indicated in the feedback
interface. The STS_DI bit indicates the status of the latch and retrigger signal.
The latch value is preassigned with its RESET state (see corresponding table). It is not
changed when the SW gate is opened.
Direct loading of the counter does not cause the indicated stored counter status to be
changed.

96

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback
If you close the SW gate, it only interrupts counting; this means that when you open the SW
gate again, counting is continued. The digital input DI remains active even when the SW
gate is closed.
Counting is also latched and triggered in isochronous mode with each edge on the digital
input. The counter status that was valid at the time of the last edge before Ti is displayed in
the feedback interface.

The Latch Function

In order to use this function, the Function DI parameter "Latch on Positive Edge" must be
selected for the digital input.

&RXQWSXOVHV

6:B*$7(

',GLJLWDOLQSXW

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

/DWFKYDOXH

Figure 2-38

Latch with a Load Value of 0

Counter status and latch value are preset with their RESET states (see corresponding table).
The counting function is started when the SW gate is opened. The 1Count24V begins at the
load value.
The latch value is always the exact counter status at the time of the positive edge on the
digital input DI.
The stored counter status rather than the current counter status is indicated in the feedback
interface. The STS_DI bit indicates the level of the latch signal.
Direct loading of the counter does not cause the indicated stored counter status to be
changed.
In isochronous mode, the counter status that was latched at the time of the last positive edge
before Ti is displayed in the feedback interface.
When you close the SW gate, the effect is either canceling or interrupting, depending on the
parameter assignment. The digital input DI remains active even when the SW gate is closed.
Further possible causes of parameter assignment errors with the latch function:
Incorrect parameter assignment of the digital output function (Function DI)
Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

97

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

Modified User Data Interface

If the 1Count24V is inserted behind an IM 151 that supports the reading and writing of
broader user data interfaces, the current count value can be read from bytes 8 to 11 of the
feedback interface.

98

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

2.9.5

Synchronization

Synchronization
In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "Synchronize on Positive Edge"
Function DI parameter.
,QWHUQDOFRXQWSXOVHV
XSRUGRZQ

'LJLWDOLQSXW
]HURPDUN

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
RQFHRQO\
(QDEOH
&57/B6<1

&RXQWYDOXH

/RDGYDOXH

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
SHULRGLF
(QDEOH
&57/B6<1

&RXQWYDOXH
/RDGYDOXH

Figure 2-39

Once-Only and Periodic Synchronization

If you have configured synchronization, the positive edge of a reference signal on the input
sets the 1Count24V to the load value.
You can select between once-only and periodic synchronization ("Synchronization"
parameter).

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

99

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback
The following conditions apply:
The counting mode must have been started with the SW gate.
The "Enable synchronization CTRL_SYN" control bit must be set.
Synchronize once only: If the enable bit is set, the first edge loads the 1Count24V with
the load value.
Synchronization periodically: If the enable bit is set, the first and every further edge loads
the 1Count24V with the load value.
After successful synchronization, the STS_SYN feedback bit is set. It must be reset by
the RES_STS control bit.
The signal of a bounce-free switch or the zero mark of a rotary encoder can serve as the
reference signal.
The STS_DI feedback bit indicates the level of the reference signal.
In isochronous mode, the set feedback bit STS_SYN indicates that the positive edge on the
digital input was between time Ti in the current cycle and Ti in the previous cycle.

100

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

2.9.6

Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interface for Position Feedback

Note
For the 1Count24V, the following data of the control and feedback interface are consistent:
Bytes 0 to 3
Bytes 4 to 7
Bytes 8 to 11 (modified user data interface)
Use the access or addressing mode for data consistency over the entire control and
feedback interface on your master (only for configuration using the GSD file).

Assignment Tables
Table 2- 24
Address

Feedback Interface (Inputs)

Assignment

Count value or stored count value in the case of the latch function on the digital
input
Byte 4
Bit 7:
Short circuit of the encoder supply
Bit 6:
Reserve = 0
Bit 5:
Parameter assignment error
Bit 4:
Reserve = 0
Bit 3:
Reserve = 0
Bit 2:
Resetting of status bits active
Bit 1:
Load function error
Bit 0:
Load function is running
Byte 5
Bit 7:
Down direction status
Bit 6:
Up direction status
Bit 5:
Reserve = 0
Bit 4:
Reserve = 0
Bit 3:
Reserve = 0
Bit 2:
Reserve = 0
Bit 1:
DI status
Bit 0:
Internal gate status
Byte 6
Bit 7:
Zero crossing
Bit 6:
Low counting limit
Bit 5:
High counting limit
Bit 4:
Reserve = 0
Bit 3:
Reserve = 0
Bit 2:
Reserve = 0
Bit 1:
Reserve = 0
Bit 0:
Synchronization status
Byte 7
Reserve = 0
Bytes 8 to 11
Count value 1
1 Modified user data interface

Designation

Bytes 0 to 3

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

ERR_24V
ERR_PARA

RES_STS_A
ERR_LOAD
STS_LOAD
STS_C_DN
STS_C_UP

STS_DI
STS_GATE
STS_ND
STS_UFLW
STS_OFLW

STS_SYN

101

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback
Table 2- 25

Control Interface (Outputs)

Address

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3

Load value direct, preparatory, comparison value 1 or 2

Byte 0

Behavior of DO1, DO2 of the 1Count24V

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Function DO1

Output

Switch on at count comparison value

Switch on at count comparison value

Pulse on reaching the comparison value

Switch at comparison values

blocked

blocked

blocked

Bit 5

Bit 4

Function DO2

Output

Switch on at count comparison value

Switch on at count comparison value

Pulse on reaching the comparison value

Bits 3, 6, and 7: Reserve = 0

Byte 1:

Hysteresis DO1, DO2 (range 0 to 255)

Byte 2:

Pulse duration [2ms] DO1, DO2 (range 0 to 255)

Byte 3:

Reserve = 0

Bit 7:

Error diagnostics acknowledgment

Bit 6:

Reserve = 0

Bit 5:

Reserve = 0

Bit 4:

Reserve = 0

Bit 3:

Reserve = 0

RES_STS

Bit 2:

Start resetting of status bit

CTRL_SYN

Bit 1:

Enable synchronization

SW_GATE

Bit 0:

SW gate control bit

Bit 7:

Reserve = 0

Bit 6:

Reserve = 0

Bit 5:

Reserve = 0

Bit 4:

Reserve = 0

Bit 3:

Reserve = 0

Bytes 1 to 3

Byte 4

EXTF_ACK

Byte 5

Bytes 6 to 7
1

Bit 2:

Reserve = 0

LOAD_PREPARE

Bit 1:

Load counter preparatory

LOAD_VAL

Bit 0:

Load counter direct

Reserve = 0 1

Not used for modified user interface

102

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

Notes on the Control Bits

Table 2- 26

Notes on the Control Bits

Control bits

Notes

CTRL_SYN

You use this bit to enable synchronization.

EXTF_ACK

Error acknowledgment
The error bits must be acknowledged with the EXTF_ACK control bit after the cause is removed.

LOAD_PREPARE

Load counter preparatory

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is applied as the load value.

LOAD_VAL

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is loaded directly as the new count value.

RES_STS

Start resetting of status bit

The status bits are reset through the acknowledgment process between the RES_STS bit and the
RES_STS_A bit.

SW_GATE

The SW gate is opened/closed via the control interface with the SW_GATE bit.

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Table 2- 27

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Feedback bits

Notes

ERR_24V

Short circuit of the encoder supply

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message if assigned.

ERR_LOAD

Load function error

The LOAD_VAL, LOAD_PREPARE, CMP_VAL1, CMP_VAL2, and C_DOPARAM bits cannot be set
simultaneously during transfer. This results in setting the ERR_LOAD status bit, similar to loading an
incorrect value (which is not accepted).

ERR_PARA

Parameter assignment error ERR_PARA

RES_STS_A

Resetting of status bits active

STS_C_DN

Down direction status

STS_C_UP

Up direction status

STS_DI

DI status

STS_GATE

Internal gate status: Counting

STS_LOAD

Load function is running

STS_ND

Zero-crossing in the count range when counting without a main counting direction. The bit must be reset
by the RES_STS control bit.

STS_OFLW

High counting limit violated

STS_UFLW

Low counting limit violated

The status of the DI is indicated in all modes with the STS_DI bit in the feedback interface.

Both bits must be reset.

STS_SYN

Synchronization status:
After successful synchronization, the STS_SYN bit is set. It must be reset by the RES_STS control bit.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

103

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Table 2- 28

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Configuring with STEP 7
using the GSD file 1)
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUS-DP\Additional
FIELD DEVICES\I/O\ET 200S)

Configuring with STEP 7

using HW Config
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUSDP\ET 200S)

Feedback interface

Read with SFC 14 "DPRD_DAT"

Load command (e.g. L PID)

Control interface

Write with SFC 15 "DPWR_DAT"

Transfer command (e.g. T PQD)

Load and transfer commands are also possible with CPU 3xxC, CPU 3xx with MMC, CPU 4xx (V3.0 and later), and
WinLC RTX (PC CPU).

Resetting of the Status Bits

STS_SYN, STS_OFLW, STS_UFLW, STS_ND
(YHQWVWLOOSHQGLQJRQUHVHW

)HHGEDFNVLJQDOV
RQHRIWKHVWDWXVELWV

&RQWUROELW
5(6B676

)HHGEDFNELW
5(6B676B$
W

5HVHWH[HFXWHG
5HTXHVWFDQFHOHG
&RXQW9H[HFXWHVWKHUHVHW
5HTXHVWUHVHW

Figure 2-40

104

Resetting of the Status Bits

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

(UURUELW
(55B/2$'
&RQWUROELW
/2$'B9$/
/2$'B35(3$5(


)HHGEDFNELW
676B/2$'
W
9DOXHDSSOLHG(QGRIWUDQVIHU
5HPRYDORIUHTXHVWDQGYDOXH
FRQWLQXHSURYLGLQJ
&RXQW9KDVXQGHUVWRRGWKHUHTXHVW
5HTXHVWYDOXHWUDQVIHUDQGPDNHYDOXHDYDLODEOH

Figure 2-41

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

Note
Only one of the following control bits can be set at a particular time:
LOAD_VAL or LOAD_PREPARE.
Otherwise, the ERR_LOAD error is reported until all the specified control bits are deleted
again.
The ERR_LOAD error bit is only deleted when a correct value is transferred as follows.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

105

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

In isochronous mode, exactly 4 or 6 bus cycles are always required to reset the status bits
and to accept values during the load function.
VW'3F\FOH

QG'3F\FOH

UG'3F\FOH

WK'3F\FOH

&RQWUROELW
LQXVHU
SURJUDP

6WDWXVELW
RIPRGXOH
7L
7'3

Figure 2-42

7L
7'3

7L

7L

7'3

7'3

7L
7'3

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

Error Detection
The program errors must be acknowledged. They have been detected by the 1Count24V
and are indicated at the feedback interface. Channel-specific diagnostics are performed if
you have enabled group diagnostics in your configuration (see device manual of the
interface module used).
The parameter assignment error bit is acknowledged by means of correct parameter
assignment.
$QHUURUKDVRFFXUUHGWKH&RXQW9VHWVDQHUURUELWD
GLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHPD\DSSHDUHUURUGHWHFWLRQFRQWLQXHV

(UURUHOLPLQDWHGZKHQ(;7)B$&.LVVHWE\WKHXVHU
SURJUDPWKH&RXQW9GHOHWHVWKHHUURUELWDGLDJQRVWLF
PHVVDJHPD\DSSHDU

HJHUURUELW
(55B9

(UURUDFNQRZOHGJPHQW
(;7)B$&.

Figure 2-43

Error Acknowledgment

In the case of constant error acknowledgement (EXTF_ACK = 1) or in CPU/master STOP

mode, the 1Count24V reports the errors as soon as they are detected and clears the errors
as soon as they are eliminated.

106

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.9 Position feedback

2.9.7

Assigning Parameters for Position Feedback

Introduction
You can use either of the following to assign parameters for the 1Count24V:
STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 or later
A GSD file (http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/gsd)

Parameter List for Position Feedback

Table 2- 29

Parameter List for Position Feedback

Parameter

Value Range

Enable
Group diagnostics
Disable/enable
Response to failure of the higher-level controller
Response to CPU/master STOP
Turn off
Continue working mode
Encoder parameters
Signal evaluation A, B
Pulse and direction/
Rotary encoder single/double/quadruple
Encoder and input filter
- At count input (track A)
2.5 s/25 s
- At direction input (track B)
2.5 s/25 s
- At digital input DI
2.5 s/25 s
Sensor A, B, DI
24V P switch, normal mode/
24V M switch
Direction input B
Normal/Inverted
Mode
Position feedback
Position detection
Gate function
Cancel counting/
Interrupt counting
Input signal HW gate
Normal/Inverted
Function DI
Input /
HW gate /
Latch and retrigger at positive edge /
Synchronization at positive edge /
Latch at positive edge
Synchronization 1
Once-only/Periodic
1 Only relevant if Function DI = Synchronization at positive edge

Default
Disable
Turn off

Pulse and direction

2.5 s
2.5 s
2.5 s
24V P switch, normal mode
Normal
Position detection
Cancel counting
Normal
Input

Once-only

Parameter Assignment Error

The "Input signal HW gate" parameter is set to inverted and the "Function DI" parameter
is not set to HW gate.

What to Do in the Event of Errors

Check the set value ranges.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

107

1Count24V
2.10 Evaluation of count and direction signal

2.10

Evaluation of count and direction signal

Signal Evaluation A, B
Signal evaluation by means of A, B allows you to count directionally. Different evaluation
modes are possible depending on the parameter assignment:
Pulse and direction
Rotary encoder
In the case of 24-V pulse generators with a direction indicator, there must be a time span of
at least 5 s/50 s between the direction signal (B*) and the count signal (A*), depending on
the input filter that has been assigned parameters.

6LJQDO$

6LJQDO%DV
GLUHFWLRQLQGLFDWRU
7LPH
wVwVGHSHQGLQJ
RQWKHILOWHUWLPH

Figure 2-44

Time Span between the Direction Signal and the Count Signal

If you connect a 24-V rotary encoder with two tracks that are 90 degrees out of phase at the
count and direction inputs, you can assign parameters to a single evaluation in all the
measurement and count modes.
You can also assign parameters to dual or quad evaluation in all count modes.
In all evaluation modes, you can invert direction detection at input B by parameter
assignment.
The count and direction inputs can be operated with different sensors (P switch and series
mode or M switch).
Note
If you have selected the 24V M switch setting with the 1Count24V for the "Sensor A, B, DI"
parameter, you must use the M-switching sensors.

108

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.10 Evaluation of count and direction signal

Pulse and Direction

The level at direction input B is used as the direction setting.
An unwired input corresponds to the "Up" count direction if you have selected
"Pulse/direction" for the "Signal evaluation" parameter.
6LJQDO$
GRZQ

6LJQDO%DV
GLUHFWLRQLQGLFDWRU

XS

8SFRXQWSXOVHV
'RZQFRXQWSXOVHV

Figure 2-45

Signals of a 24-V Pulse Generator with Direction Indicator

Rotary Encoder
The 1Count24V can count the edges of the signals. Normally, only the edge at A is
evaluated (single evaluation). To obtain a higher resolution, when assigning parameters
("Signal Evaluation" parameter), you can select whether the signals are to be subjected to
single, double, or quadruple evaluation.
Multiple evaluation is only possible with asymmetric incremental encoders with A and B
signals that are 90 degrees out of phase.

Single Evaluation
Single evaluation means that only one edge of A is evaluated; up count pulses are recorded
at a positive edge at A and low level at B, and down count pulses are recorded at a negative
edge at A and low level at B.
The diagram below illustrates the single evaluation of the signals.

6LJQDO$
6LJQDO%
8SFRXQWSXOVHV
'RZQFRXQWSXOVHV
8S

Figure 2-46

'RZQ

Single Evaluation

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

109

1Count24V
2.10 Evaluation of count and direction signal

Double Evaluation
Double evaluation means that the positive and negative edge of the A signal are evaluated.
Whether up or down count pulses are generated depends on the level of the B signal.
The diagram below illustrates the double evaluation of the signals.

6LJQDO$
6LJQDO%
8SFRXQWSXOVHV
'RZQFRXQWSXOVHV
XS

Figure 2-47

GRZQ

Double Evaluation

Quadruple Evaluation
Quadruple evaluation means that the positive and negative edges of the A and B signals are
evaluated. Whether up or down count pulses are generated depends on the levels of the A
and B signals.
The diagram below illustrates the quadruple evaluation of the signals.

6LJQDO$
6LJQDO%
8SFRXQWSXOVHV
'RZQFRXQWSXOVHV
XS

Figure 2-48

GRZQ

Quadruple Evaluation

Note
A counting frequency of 100 kHz refers to the maximum frequency of the A and B signals.
With double evaluation, a maximum frequency of 200 kHz is produced for the counting
pulses; with quadruple evaluation, the maximum frequency is 400 kHz.

110

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.11 Diagnostics

2.11

Diagnostics

2.11.1

Diagnostics using the LED display

LED display on the 1Count24V

6)

83

'1

Group error (red)

Status display for counting direction (green)
Status display for digital input/digital output (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1Count24V

The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1Count24V.
Event (LEDs)
SF

UP

DN

Cause

Remedy

No configuration or incorrect
module plugged in. There is a
diagnostic message.

Check the parameter assignment.

Evaluate the diagnostics data.

On

On

Status of the low-order bits of

the counter, if the counter
counts up.
On

Status of the inverse low-order

bits of the counter, if the
counter counts down.
On

DO (direct control, comparator

output) activated.
On

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

DI (HW gate, synchronization,

latch) activated.

111

1Count24V
2.11 Diagnostics

2.11.2

Error types
For information on the structure of the channel-related diagnostics, refer to the manual on
the interface module used in your ET 200S station.

1Count24V error types

The following table shows the error types on the 1Count24V.
Error type

Meaning

Remedy

1D

00001: Short circuit

Short circuit of the sensor supply or the

actuator.

Check the wiring to the sensor. Correct

the process wiring.

5D

00101: Overtemperature

The digital output is overloaded.

Correct the process wiring.

6D

00110: Cable break

Line to the actuator is interrupted.

Correct the process wiring.

9D

01001: Error

Internal module error occurred.

Replace the module.

Load voltage from the power module is

too low.

Correct the process wiring. Check the

load voltage.

Parameters have not been assigned to

the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

16D

112

10000: Parameter assignment

error

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.12 Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP

2.12

Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP

Setting the response to CPU/master STOP

You can configure the reaction of the 1Count24V to failure of the higher-level controller.
Parameter

Status of the 1Count24V at CPU/master

STOP

What Happens if
New Parameters Have Been Assigned?

Turn off DO1

The current mode is canceled, the gate

closed, and the digital output blocked;
comparison values 1 and 2 and the load
value are reset; the high and low limit
values, function and behavior of the digital
outputs and the integration time are handled
in accordance with the parameter
assignments.

The changed parameters are accepted and

take effect.

Continue working mode1

The current mode continues, and the gate

and digital output retain their status.

The gate is closed, the current mode is

terminated, the digital output is blocked, and
the changed parameters are accepted and
take effect.

DO 1 substitute a value

The current mode is canceled, the gate

closed, and the digital output blocked;
comparison values 1 and 2 and the load
value are reset; the high and low limit
values, function and behavior of the digital
outputs and the integration time are handled
in accordance with the parameter
assignments.

The changed parameters are accepted and

take effect.

When a pulse is output when the

comparison value is reached, the substitute
value is 1 only for the duration of the pulse.
DO 1 keep last value

The current mode is canceled, the gate

closed, and the digital output blocked;
comparison values 1 and 2 and the load
value are reset; the high and low limit
values, function and behavior of the digital
outputs and the integration time are handled
in accordance with the parameter
assignments.

The changed parameters are accepted and

take effect.

If the mode is to continue during a change from CPU-/Master-STOP to RUN (startup), the CPU/Master must not clear the
outputs.
Possible solution: In the part of the user program that is executed during startup, set the SW gate control bit and transfer
the values to the 1Count24V.

Leaving the Assigned State

Under what conditions does the 1Count24V leave the assigned state?
The CPU or master must be in RUN mode, and you have to make a change at the control
interface.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

113

1Count24V
2.12 Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP

Automatic New Parameter Assignment

A new parameter assignment of the ET 200S station is made by your CPU/ DP master:
Upon power on of the CPU/DP master
Upon power on of the IM 151/IM 151 FO
After failure of the DP transmission
Upon loading changed parameters or configuration of the ET 200S station to the CPU/DP
master
When the 1Count24V is plugged
Upon power on or inserting of the appropriate power module

114

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.13 Technical Specifications

2.13

Technical Specifications

Technical specifications
General technical specifications
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)
Weight

15x81x52
Approx. 40 g

Data for Specific Modules

Number of Channels

Counter range

32 bits

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated load voltage L+
Reverse polarity protection

24 VDC
Yes

Galvanic isolation
Between backplane bus and counter function
Between counter function and load voltage

Yes

Encoder supply
Output voltage
Output current

L+ (-0.8 V)

No

Max. 500 mA (Total current at terminals 2 and

6), short circuit proof

Current consumption
From the backplane bus
From load voltage L+ (no load)

max. 10 mA

Power dissipation

Typ. 1 W

Data on the counting signals and the digital input

Galvanic isolation

No, from shield only

Input voltage
Rated value
0 signal
1 signal
Input current
0 signal
1 signal
Minimum pulse width (maximum counting
frequency)
Filter on
Filter off

max. 42 mA

24 VDC
-30 V to 5 V
11 V to 30 V
2 mA (quiescent current)
9 mA (typically)
25 s
2.5 s

Connection of a two-wire BERO type 2

Input characteristic

Possible
In accordance with IEC 1131, Part 2, Type 2

Shielded cable length

Filter 200 kHz
Filter 20 kHz

50 m

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

100 m

115

1Count24V
2.13 Technical Specifications
General technical specifications
Data for the Digital Output
Output voltage
Rated value
0 signal
1 signal
Output current
0 signal (residual current)
1 signal
Permitted range
Rated value

24 VDC
3V
L+ (-1V)
0.5 mA
5 mA to 2.0 A

40C

2A

50C

1A

60C

0.5 A

Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load
Lamp load

100 Hz
2 Hz
10 Hz

Lamp load

5W

Output delay (resistive load)

100 s

Short circuit protection for output

Yes

Response threshold

2.6 A to 4 A

Inductive extinction

Yes; L+ -(50 to 60 V)

Digital input control

Yes

Cable lengths
Unshielded
Shielded

600 m
1000 m

Status, Diagnostics
Digital input DI status display

LED 8 (green)

Digital output DO status display

LED 4 (green)

Up count value change

UP LED (green)

Down count value change

DN LED (green)

Fault indicator

SF LED (red)

Diagnostic information

Yes

Measuring Ranges in the Measuring Modes

Maximum measuring range
Frequency measurement
Rotational speed measurement
Period measurement

0.1 Hz to 100 kHz

1/min ... 25000 /min
10 s ... 120 s

Response times
Update rate of the counting modes
Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

116

1 ms
TDP

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count24V
2.13 Technical Specifications
General technical specifications
Isochronous Times of the Module
in counting modes
TCI

380 s

TCO

320 s

ToiMin

55 s

TDPMin

900 s

in measuring modes
TCI

465 s

TCO

280 s

ToiMin

50 s

TDPMin

995 s

in position feedback
TCI

370 s

TCO

0 s

ToiMin

0 s

TDPMin

815 s

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

117

1Count24V
2.13 Technical Specifications

118

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.1

Product Overview

Order Number:
6ES7 138-4DE02-0AB0

Compatibility
The 1Count5V with the order number 6ES7 138-4DE02-0AB0 replaces the
1Count5V/500kHz with the order number 6ES7 138-4DE01-0AB0 with full compatibility. In
STEP 7 version V5.3 SP2 and later, you can use it in non-isochronous and isochronous
modes.

Features
A 5 V incremental encoder can be connected in order to count 5 V RS422 signals up to a
frequency of 500 kHz.
The 1Count5V is a double-width module and can only be used with a 4-row terminal
module (e. g. TM-E30S44-01).
Isochronous mode
Modified user data interface 1
1 Instead

of 8 bytes of input data and 8 bytes of output data, 12 bytes of input data and 6
bytes of output data are used, provided the IM 151 supports this.
The following IM 151 modules support this function:
IM151-1/Standard order no. 6ES7 151-1AA04-0AB0 and higher
IM151-1/HF order no. 6ES7 151-1BA01-0AB0 and higher

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

119

1Count5V
3.1 Product Overview
Operating modes of the 1Count5V:
Counting modes:
Count continuously
Count once
Count periodically
Measuring modes:
Frequency measurement
Rotational speed measurement
Period measurement
Position feedback:
Position detection
Fast mode
Gate control, synchronization or latch function via digital inputs
2 digital outputs for direct control or output of the comparison results.
Firmware update 1
Identification data 1
1 The following IM 151 modules support this function: IM 151-1 Standard: 6ES7151-1AA040AB0 and later and IM 151-1 High Feature: 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 and later.

Connectable Counting Signals

The 1Count5V can count the signals of the following encoders:
5 V incremental encoder with two tracks that are 90o out of phase at the count inputs.

Adjustment During Operation

Counting modes
You can change the function and behavior of the digital outputs during operation.
Measuring modes
You can change the function of the DO1 digital output during operation
You can change the integration time/update time during operation

Configuration
In order to configure the 1Count5V use
STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 or higher
The HSP (hardware support package, available online) as of STEP 7 Version V5.2 SP1

120

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.1 Product Overview

Firmware update
In order to extend the functionality and eliminate errors, firmware updates can be
downloaded to the operating system memory of the 1Count5V by means of the STEP 7 HW
Config software.
Note
When you launch the firmware update, the old firmware is deleted. If the firmware update is
interrupted or canceled for any reason, the 1Count5V will no longer function correctly as a
result. Restart the firmware update and wait until it has completed successfully.

Identification Data 1
Hardware release status
Firmware release status
Serial number
1See

also ET 200S Distributed I/O operating instructions

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348), "Identification data" section.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

121

1Count5V
3.2 Isochronous mode

3.2

Isochronous mode
Note
For basic information on isochronous mode, refer to the Isochronous mode
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045) function manual.

Hardware Requirements
You will require the following for the 1Count5V in isochronous mode:
A CPU that supports isochronous mode
PROFIBUS master or PROFINET controller that supports the constant bus cycle time
An IM 151 that supports isochronous mode

Features
Depending on the system parameter assignment, the 1Count5V/500kHz works in either nonisochronous or isochronous mode.
In isochronous mode, data communication between the master and 1Count5V is
isochronous to the bus cycle (PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET).
In isochronous mode, all 8 bytes / 12 bytes of the feedback interface are consistent.
If a parameter assignment error occurs, the 1Count5V does not go into isochronous mode.
If isochronous mode fails due to faults or failure/delay of global control (GC), the 1Count5V
returns to isochronous mode during the next cycle without an error response.
If isochronous mode fails, the feedback interface is not updated.
The Ti/To overlap is supported by the module in firmware version V1.0.1 and later.

See also
Synchronization (Page 143)

122

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.3 Brief instructions on commissioning the 1Count5V

3.3

Brief instructions on commissioning the 1Count5V

Task
These instructions guide you to a functioning application that will enable you to count the
pulses of an encoder and become familiar with and check the basic hardware and software
functions of your 1Count5V. The counting mode used in this example is "Count
continuously".

Requirements
The following requirements must be satisfied:
You must have put an ET 200S station on an S7 station with a DP master into operation.
You must have the following:
A terminal module (e. g. TM-E30S44-01)
A 1Count5V,
A 5 V encoder with a 24 V encoder supply and the material required for wiring

Installation, Wiring and Fitting

1. Install and wire the TM-E30S44-01 terminal module (see Figure).
2. Plug the 1Count5V into the terminal module. Detailed instructions are provided in the
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) operating instructions.
&RXQW
9N+]
6)

9LQFUHPHQWDO
HQFRGHU

83

'1


6<1

70(6DQG
&RXQW9




(6'($%

 $ $ 




  '2 '2

 9 0 





  0 0

 % % 





  9'& 9'&

 1 1 





  ',

Figure 3-1

Terminal Assignment for the Example

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

123

1Count5V
3.3 Brief instructions on commissioning the 1Count5V

Configuring with STEP 7 using HW Config

You must first adapt the hardware configuration of your existing ET 200S station.
1. Open the relevant project in SIMATIC Manager.
2. Open the HW Config configuration table in your project.
3. Select 1Count5V in the hardware catalog. The number 6ES7 138-4DE02-0AB0 C
appears in the infotext.
4. Drag the entry to the slot at which you have mounted your 1Count5V.
5. Double-click this number to open the 1Count5V C (R-S Slot Number) tab.
On the Addresses tab, you will find the addresses of the slot to which you have dragged
the 1Count5V. Make a note of these addresses for subsequent programming.
The Parameters tab contains the default settings for the 1Count5V. Leave the default
settings unchanged.
6. Save and compile your configuration, and download the configuration in STOP mode of
the CPU by choosing "PLC > Download to Module".

Integration into the User Program (Not for Modified User Data Interface)
Create block FC 101 and integrate it in your control program (in OB 1, for example). This
block requires the DB1 data block with a length of 16 bytes. The start address of the module
in the following example is 256.
STL

Description

Block: FC101
Network 1: Presettings
L

DB1.DBD0

DB1.DBD4

//Delete control bits

SET
S

DB1.DBX4.0

//Open SW gate

Network 2: Write to the control interface

L

DB1.DBD0

//Write 6 bytes to the 1Count5V

PAD 256

//Configured start address of the outputs

DB1.DBW4

PAW 260

124

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.3 Brief instructions on commissioning the 1Count5V

STL
Network 3: Read from the feedback interface

Description
//Read 8 bytes from the 1Count5V

PED 256

DB1.DBD8

//Configured start address of the inputs

PED 260

DB1.DBD12

Testing
Use "Monitor/Modify Variables" to monitor the count value and the gate.
1. Select the "Block" folder in your project. Choose the "Insert > S7 Block > Variable Table"
menu command to insert the VAT 1 variable table, and then confirm with OK.
2. Open the VAT 1 variable table, and enter the following variables in the "Address" column:
DB1.DBD8 (current count value)
DB1.DBx13.0 (internal gate status)
3. Choose "PLC > Connect To > Configured CPU" to switch to online.
4. Choose "Variable > Monitor" to switch to monitoring.
5. Switch the CPU to RUN mode.
The "internal gate status" bit must be set.
6. Use your encoder to generate pulses.

Result
You can now see that:
The UP LED on the 1Count5V is on. The status of the UP LED changes with each new
pulse.
The count value in the block changes.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

125

1Count5V
3.4 Terminal Assignment Diagram

3.4

Terminal Assignment Diagram

Wiring Rules
The cables (terminals 1 and 8 and terminals 15 and 16) must be shielded. The shield must
be supported at both ends. To do this, use the shield contact (see the ET 200S Distributed
I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) operating
instructions).
Table 3- 1

Terminal assignment of the 1Count5V

View

Terminal Assignment

Remarks
A, /A: Track A

&RXQW
9N+]
6)

70(6DQG
&RXQW9

B, /B: Track B
N, /N: Track N
24 VDC: Sensor supply
M: Chassis ground
DI: Digital input
DO1: Digital output
DO2: Digital output

9LQFUHPHQWDO
HQFRGHU

83

'1


6<1




(6'($%

126

 $ $ 




  '2 '2

 9 0 





  0 0

 % % 





  9'& 9'&

 1 1 





  ',

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.5 Operating modes and application areas of the 1Count5V

3.5

Operating modes and application areas of the 1Count5V

Introduction
To begin with, decide how you want to use the 1Count5V. You can choose from the following
operating modes:
Counting modes

Measuring modes

Position feedback

Fast mode

Count continuously

Frequency measurement

Position detection

Position feedback in short

(isochronous) cycles

Count once

Rotational speed measurement

Count periodically

Period measurement

Parameters are assigned to the various modes. You will find the parameter lists in the descriptions of the modes.
You can integrate the 1Count5V in your project in two different ways. Decide whether you want to work with a GSD file or
with STEP 7.

Integrate 1Count5V using STEP 7

Integrate the 1Count5V with STEP 7
(in isochronous and non-isochronous mode)
Select an entry from the hardware catalog that corresponds to the operating mode you want.
For counting modes,
select the "1Count5V
Counting Mode V2.0" entry

For measuring modes,

select the "1Count5V
Measuring Mode V2.0" entry

For position detection,

select the "1Count5V
Position Detection V2.0"
entry

For fast mode,

select the "1COUNT5V Fast
Mode V2.0" entry

The number 6ES7 1384DE02-0AB0 C appears

in the infotext. Drag the entry
to the slot at which you have
mounted your 1Count5V.

The number 6ES7 1384DE02-0AB0 M appears

in the infotext. Drag the entry
to the slot at which you have
mounted your 1Count5V.

The number 6ES7 1384DE02-0AB0 W appears

in the infotext. Drag the entry
to the slot at which you have
mounted your 1Count5V.

The number 6ES7 1384DE02-0AB0 F appears

in the infotext. Drag the entry
to the slot at which you have
mounted your 1Count5V.

Select the parameters.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

127

1Count5V
3.5 Operating modes and application areas of the 1Count5V

Integrate the 1Count5V with the GSD file

Integrate 1Count5V with the GSD file
(only in non-isochronous mode)
Select an entry in the GSD file that corresponds
to the operating mode you want.
Select the entry C 6ES7 138-4DE020AB0 1CNT5V
for counting modes

Select the entry M 6ES7 138-4DE020AB0 1CNT5V

for measuring modes

Select the entry W 6ES7 138-4DE020AB0 1CNT5V

for position feedback

Select the parameters.

Note
Fast mode is designed for use in especially short isochronous cycles. You need STEP 7 to
configure isochronous operation.

128

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

3.6

Count Modes

3.6.1

Overview

Introduction
The counting modes are used in counting applications (for counting of items, for example).
For the "Counting Mode" parameter, you can select from the following modes:
Count continuously (for position detection with incremental encoders, for example)
Count once (for counting items up to a maximum limit, for example)
Count periodically (in applications with recurring counting operations, for example)
To run one of these modes, you have to assign parameters to the 1Count5V (see section
"Parameter Assignment for the Count Modes (Page 163)").

Maximum Count Range

The high counting limit is +2147483647 (231 - 1).
The low counting limit is -2147483648 (-231).

Load Value
You can specify a count value through a load value for the 1Count5V.
This load value is either applied directly as the new count value (LOAD_VAL) or it is applied
as the count value when one of the following events occurs (LOAD_PREPARE):
In the Count once and Count periodically counting modes
The low or high counting limit is reached when a main count direction is not assigned.
The assigned high counting limit is reached when the main count direction is up.
Zero is reached when the main count direction is down.
In all counting modes
The counting operation is started by a SW gate or HW gate (if the counting operation
is continued, the load value is not applied).
Synchronization
Latch and retrigger

Gate Control
To control the 1Count5V, you have to use the gate functions.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

129

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Main Count Direction

With the main count direction, you assign which RESET states (status following parameter
assignment) the load value and count value can take on. It is thus possible to create
incrementing or decrementing count applications. The assigned main count direction has no
effect on the direction evaluation when the count pulses are detected.

RESET States of the Following Values after Parameter Assignment

Table 3- 2

RESET States

Value

Main count direction

RESET state

Load value

None
Up
Down

0
0
Assigned high counting limit

Count value

None
Up
Down

0
0
Assigned high counting limit

Comparison value 1 and 2

None
Up
Down

0
0
Assigned high counting limit

Latch value

None
Up
Down

0
0
Assigned high counting limit

Isochronous Mode
In isochronous mode, the 1Count5V accepts control bits and control values from the control
interface in each bus cycle and reports back the response in the same cycle.
In each cycle, the 1Count5V transfers the count or latch value that was valid at time Ti and
the status bits valid at time Ti.
A count controlled by hardware input signals can only be transferred in the same cycle if the
input signal occurred before time Ti.
(See Isochronous Mode (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045)
function manual)

130

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

3.6.2

Endless Counting

Definition
In this mode, the 1Count5V counts continuously starting from the load value:
If the 1Count5V reaches the high count limit when counting up, and another count pulse
then comes, it will jump to the low count limit and continue counting from there without
losing a pulse.
If the 1Count5V reaches the low count limit when counting down, and another count
pulse then comes, it will jump to the high count limit and continue counting from there
without losing a pulse.
The high counting limit is set to +2147483647 (231 - 1).
The low counting limit is set to -2147483648 (-231).
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW

/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 3-2

*DWHVWRS

7LPH

Count Continuously with Gate Function

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Count Modes (Page 139)")
Latch function (see section "Latch Function (Page 141)")
Synchronization (see section "Synchronization (Page 143)")

Function of the Digital Outputs

For the "Function DO1" and "Function DO2" parameters, select one of the following
functions for each digital output.
Output, no switching through comparator
Activation at a counter status greater than or equal to the comparison value
Activation at a counter status less than or equal to the comparison value
Pulse on reaching the comparison value
Switch at comparison values (DO1 only)
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 147)")

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

131

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Influencing the Behavior of the Digital Outputs via

Hysteresis
Pulse duration
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 147)")

Values that Can Be Changed During Operation

Load value (LOAD_PREPARE)
Counter status (LOAD_VAL)
Comparison value 1 (CMP_VAL1)
Comparison value 2 (CMP_VAL2)
Function and behavior of the digital outputs (C_DOPARAM)
(see sections "Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 147)" and "Assignment of the
Feedback and Control Interface for the Count Modes (Page 155)")

132

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

3.6.3

Once-Only Counting

Definition
In this mode, the 1Count5V counts once only, depending on the assigned main count
direction ("Main count direction" parameter).
When there is no main count direction:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
The count limits are fixed at the maximum count range.
If the high or low counting limit is violated, the gate is closed automatically, and the
counter jumps to the respective counting limit.
When the main count direction is up:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
When the high count limit is reached, the counter jumps to the load value and the gate
is closed.
The high count limit can be assigned parameters, and the load value has RESET state
of 0 and can be changed.
When the count direction is down:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
When the low counting limit is reached, the 1Count5V jumps to the load value and the
gate is closed.
The low count limit is fixed at 0, and the load value can be assigned parameters
(parameter: high count limit) and can be changed.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

133

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
The internal gate is automatically closed in the event of an overflow/underflow at the count
limits. To restart counting, you have to open the gate again.
&RXQWHUVWDWXV

+LJK
FRXQWLQJOLPLW

676B2)/:

/RDGYDOXH
676B1'



/RZ
FRXQWLQJOLPLW

676B8)/:
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 3-3

$XWRPDWLF
JDWHVWRS

*DWHVWDUW

$XWRPDWLF
JDWHVWRS

7LPH

Count Once Without Main Count Direction; Canceling Gate Function

With an interrupting gate function, the counter status remains at the underflow when the gate
is started.
&RXQWHUVWDWXV

676B2)/:

+LJK
FRXQWLQJOLPLW
/RDGYDOXH


/RZ
FRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW $XWRPDWLF
JDWHVWRS

Figure 3-4

134

*DWHVWDUW

$XWRPDWLF
JDWHVWRS

7LPH

Count Once with Up as the Main Count Direction

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Count Modes (Page 139)")
Latch function (see section "Latch Function (Page 141)")
Synchronization (see section "Synchronization (Page 143)")

Function of the Digital Outputs

For the "Function DO1" and "Function DO2" parameters, select one of the following
functions for each digital output.
Output, no switching through comparator
Activation at a counter status greater than or equal to the comparison value
Activation at a counter status less than or equal to the comparison value
Pulse on reaching the comparison value
Switch at comparison values (DO1 only)
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 147)")

Influencing the Behavior of the Digital Outputs via

Hysteresis
Pulse duration
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 147)")

Values that Can Be Changed During Operation

Load value (LOAD_PREPARE)
Counter status (LOAD_VAL)
Comparison value 1 (CMP_VAL1)
Comparison value 2 (CMP_VAL2)
Function and behavior of the digital outputs (C_DOPARAM)
(see sections "Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 147)" and "Assignment of the
Feedback and Control Interface for the Count Modes (Page 155)")

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

135

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

3.6.4

Periodic Counting

Definition
In this mode, the 1Count5V counts periodically, depending on the assigned main count
direction ("Main count direction" parameter).
When there is no main count direction:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
The count limits are fixed at the maximum count range.
In the event of an overflow or underflow at the respective count limit, the 1Count5V
jumps to the load value and continues counting from there.
When the main count direction is up:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
The high limit can be assigned parameters, and the load value has a RESET status of
0 and can be changed.
When the high count limit is reached, the 1Count5V jumps to the load value and
continues counting from there.
When the count direction is down:
Counts starting from the load value.
Counts up or down.
When the low count limit is reached, the 1Count5V jumps to the load value and
continues counting from there.
The low count limit is fixed at 0, and the load value can be assigned parameters
(parameter: high count limit) and can be changed.
&RXQWHUYDOXH

+LJKFRXQWLQJ
OLPLW

676B2)/:

/RDGYDOXH


676B1'

/RZFRXQWLQJ
OLPLW

676B8)/:
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 3-5

136

*DWHVWRS

7LPH

Periodic Counting without a Main Count Direction

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJ
OLPLW

676B2)/:

/RDGYDOXH


/RZFRXQWLQJ
OLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 3-6

*DWHVWRS

7LPH

Periodic Counting with Up as the Main Count Direction

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Count Modes (Page 139)")
Latch function (see section "Latch Function (Page 141)")
Synchronization (see section "Synchronization (Page 143)")

Function of the Digital Outputs

For the "Function DO1" and "Function DO2" parameters, select one of the following
functions for each digital output.
Output, no switching through comparator
Activation at a counter status greater than or equal to the comparison value
Activation at a counter status less than or equal to the comparison value
Pulse on reaching the comparison value
Switch at comparison values (DO1 only)
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 147)")

Influencing the Behavior of the Digital Outputs via

Hysteresis
Pulse duration
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 147)")

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

137

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Values that Can Be Changed During Operation

Load value (LOAD_PREPARE)
Counter status (LOAD_VAL)
Comparison value 1 (CMP_VAL1)
Comparison value 2 (CMP_VAL2)
Function and behavior of the digital outputs (C_DOPARAM)
(see sections "Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes (Page 147)" and "Assignment of the
Feedback and Control Interface for the Count Modes (Page 155)")

3.6.5

Behavior of the Digital Inputs

Digital input of the 1Count5V

The DI digital input can be operated with 24 V sensors (P switch and series mode).
In the case of the input and HW gate functions, the level of the digital input can be inverted
by means of "Function DI = Hardware gate" setting with the parameter "Input signal
hardware gate" .
The STS_DI feedback bit indicates the level of the digital input.

138

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

3.6.6

Gate Functions in Count Modes

Software Gate and Hardware Gate

The 1Count5V has two gates:
A software gate (SW gate), which is controlled by the SW_GATE control bit.
The software gate can only be opened by a positive edge of the SW_GATE control bit. It
is closed when this bit is reset. Note the transfer times and run times of your control
program.
A hardware gate (HW gate), which is controlled by means of the digital input on the
1Count5V. You assign the hardware gate as the function of the digital input (Function DI
"HW Gate"). It is opened on a positive edge at the digital input and closed on a negative
edge.
Internal gate
The internal gate is the logical AND operation of the HW gate and SW gate. Counting is only
active when the HW gate and the SW gate are open. The STS_GATE feedback bit (internal
gate status) indicates this. If a HW gate has not been assigned, the setting of the SW gate is
decisive. Counting is activated, interrupted, continued, and canceled by means of the
internal gate. In the Count once counting mode, the internal gate is closed automatically
when there is an overflow/underflow at the counting limits.

Canceling- and Interrupting-Type Gate Function

When assigning the gate function ("Gate Function" parameter), you can specify whether the
internal gate is to cancel or interrupt counting. When counting is canceled, after the gate is
closed and restarted, counting starts again from the beginning. When counting is interrupted,
after the gate is closed and restarted, counting continues from the previous value.
The diagrams below indicate how the interrupting and canceling gate functions work:
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW
/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 3-7

*DWHVWRS

*DWHVWDUW

7LPH

Count Continuously, Up, Interrupting Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

139

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW
/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 3-8

*DWHVWRS

*DWHVWDUW

7LPH

Count Continuously, Down, Canceling Gate Function

Gate control by means of the SW gate only

When the gate is opened, one of the following occurs, depending on the parameter
assignment:
Counting continues from the current counter status, or
Counting starts from the load value
If the SW gate is opened in isochronous mode in bus cycle "n" by setting the SW_GATE
control bit, counting starts at time To in cycle "n+1". In the same cycle "n+1", the 1Count5V
delivers the current count value from time Ti. (See Isochronous Mode
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045) function manual)
Gate control by means of the SW gate and HW gate
If the SW gate opens when the HW gate is already open, counting continues starting from
the current counter status.
When the HW gate is opened, one of the following occurs, depending on the parameter
assignment:
Counting continues from the current counter status, or
Counting starts from the load value
If the SW gate is opened in isochronous mode in bus cycle "n" by setting the SW_GATE
control bit, counting starts at time To in cycle "n+1" if the HW gate is already open at this
time. If the HW gate opens between To and Ti in cycle "n+1", counting only starts once the
HW gate is open. In both cases, the 1Count5V delivers the current count value in cycle "n+1"
starting from time Ti.

140

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

3.6.7

Latch Function

Introduction
There are two latch functions:
The Latch and Retrigger function
The Latch function

The Latch and Retrigger Function

In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "Latch and Retrigger on Positive
Edge" Function DI parameter.

&RXQWSXOVHV

6:B*$7(

',GLJLWDOLQSXW

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

/DWFKYDOXH

Figure 3-9

Latch and Retrigger with Load Value = 0

This function stores the current internal counter status of the 1Count5V and retriggers
counting when there is a positive edge on the digital input.
This means that the current internal counter status at the time of the positive edge is stored
(latch value), and the 1Count5V is then loaded again with the load value, from which
counting resumes.
The counting mode must be enabled with the SW gate before the function can be executed.
It is started with the (first) positive edge on the digital input.
The stored counter status rather than the current counter status is indicated in the feedback
interface. The STS_DI bit indicates the level of the latch and retrigger signal.
The latch value is preassigned with its RESET state (see RESET states table). It is not
changed when the SW gate is opened.
Direct loading of the counter does not cause the indicated stored counter status to be
changed.
If you close the SW gate, counting is only interrupted; this means that when you open the
SW gate again, counting is continued. The DI digital input remains active even when the SW
gate is closed.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

141

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
Counting is also latched and triggered in isochronous mode with each edge on the digital
input. The counter status that was valid at the time of the last edge before Ti is displayed in
the feedback interface.

The Latch Function

In order to use this function, the Function DI parameter must be set to "Latch on Positive
Edge".

&RXQWSXOVHV

6:B*$7(

',GLJLWDOLQSXW

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

/DWFKYDOXH

Figure 3-10

Latch with a Load Value of 0

Counter status and latch value are preset with their RESET states (see RESET states table).
The counting function is started when the SW gate is opened. The 1Count5V begins at the
load value.
The latch value is always the exact counter status at the time of the positive edge on the
digital input DI.
The stored counter status rather than the current counter status is indicated in the feedback
interface. The STS_DI bit indicates the level of the latch signal.
Direct loading of the counter does not cause the indicated stored counter status to be
changed.
In isochronous mode, the counter status that was latched at the time of the last positive edge
before Ti is displayed in the feedback interface.
When you close the SW gate, the effect is either canceling or interrupting, depending on the
parameter assignment. The digital input DI remains active even when the SW gate is closed.

Expanded Feedback Interface

If the 1Count5V is inserted behind an IM 151 that supports the reading and writing of broader
user data interfaces, the current count value can be read from bytes 8 to 11 of the feedback
interface.

142

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

3.6.8

Synchronization

Introduction
You can synchronize the 1Count5V by two methods:
Synchronization with DI
Synchronization with DI and zero mark

Synchronization with DI
In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "Synchronize on Positive Edge"
Function DI parameter.
,QWHUQDOFRXQWSXOVHV
XSRUGRZQ

'LJLWDOLQSXW
]HURPDUN

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
RQFHRQO\
(QDEOH
&57/B6<1

&RXQWYDOXH

/RDGYDOXH

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
SHULRGLF
(QDEOH
&57/B6<1

&RXQWYDOXH
/RDGYDOXH

Figure 3-11

Once-Only and Periodic Synchronization

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

143

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
If you have configured synchronization, the positive edge of a reference signal on the input
sets the 1Count5V to the load value.
You can select between once-only and periodic synchronization ("Synchronization"
parameter).
The following conditions apply:
The counting mode must have been started with the SW gate.
The "Enable synchronization CTRL_SYN" control bit must be set.
Synchronize once only: If the enable bit is set, the first edge loads the 1Count5V with the
load value.
Synchronization periodically: If the enable bit is set, the first and every further edge loads
the 1Count5V with the load value.
After successful synchronization, the STS_SYN feedback bit is set and the SYN LED
comes on. The RES_STS control bit resets the feedback bit and switches the LED off.
The signal of a bounce-free switch can serve as the reference signal.
The STS_DI feedback bit indicates the level of the reference signal.
In isochronous mode, the set feedback bit STS_SYN indicates that the positive edge on the
digital input was between time Ti in the current cycle and Ti in the previous cycle.

144

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Synchronization with DI and Zero Mark

In order to be able to use this function, you must have selected it from the digital input
function parameters.
,QWHUQDOFRXQWSXOVHV
XSRUGRZQ

'LJLWDOLQSXW',

=HURPDUN

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
RQFHRQO\
(QDEOH
&57/B6<1

&RXQWYDOXH

/RDGYDOXH

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
SHULRGLFDOO\
(QDEOH
&57/B6<1

&RXQWYDOXH
/RDGYDOXH

Figure 3-12

Once-Only and Periodic Synchronization

If you have configured synchronization with DI and zero mark, the DI serves as the HW
enable. When the HW enable is active, the 1Count5V is loaded with the load value by the
zero mark of the encoder.
You can select between once-only and periodic synchronization.
The following conditions apply:
The counting mode must have been started with the SW gate.
The "Enable synchronization CTRL_SYN" control bit must be set.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

145

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
Synchronize once only: If the enable bit is set and the HW enable is present, the first zero
mark loads the 1Count5V with the load value.
Synchronization periodically: If the enable bit is set and the HW enable is present, the
first and every further zero mark loads the 1Count5V with the load value.
After successful synchronization, the STS_SYN feedback bit is set and the SYN LED
comes on. The RES_STS control bit resets the feedback bit and switches the LED off.
The signal of a bounce-free switch can serve as the reference signal.
The STS_DI feedback bit indicates the level of the reference signal.
In isochronous mode, the set feedback bit STS_SYN indicates that the positive edge on the
digital input was between time Ti in the current cycle and Ti in the previous cycle.

146

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

3.6.9

Behavior of the Outputs in Count Modes

Introduction
The 1Count5V allows you to store two comparison values, which are assigned to the digital
outputs. The outputs can be activated, depending on the counter status and comparison
values. The various ways of setting the behavior of the outputs are described in this section.

Behavior Types of the Digital Outputs

The 1Count5V has two digital outputs.
Parameters can be assigned for both outputs ("Function DO1" and "Function DO2"
parameters).
You can change the function and the behavior of the digital outputs during operation.
You can choose from the following functions:
Output
Counter status comparison value
Counter status comparison value
Pulse on reaching the comparison value
Switch at comparison values (DO1 only)

Output
You can switch the outputs on and off with the control bits SET_DO1 and SET_DO2.
The control bits CTRL_DO1 or CTRL_DO2 must be set for this.
You can query the status of the outputs with the status bits STS_DO1 and STS_DO2 in the
feedback interface.
The status bits STS_CMP1 and STS_CMP2 indicate that the relevant output is or was
switched on. These status bits retain their status until they are acknowledged. If the output is
still switched, the corresponding bit is set again immediately. These status bits are also set
when the control bit SET_DO1 or SET_DO2 is operated without DO1 or DO2 being enabled.
Isochronous mode: In isochronous mode, the outputs DO1 and DO2 are switched at time To.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

147

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Counter Status Comparison Value and Counter Status Comparison Value

If the comparison conditions are fulfilled, the respective comparator switches on the output.
The status of the output is indicated by STS_DO1 and STS_DO2.
The control bits CTRL_DO1 or CTRL_DO2 must be set for this.
The comparison result is indicated by the status bits STS_CMP1 or STS_CMP2. You cannot
acknowledge and thus reset these bits until the comparison conditions are no longer fulfilled.
Isochronous mode: In isochronous mode as well, the DO1 and DO2 outputs are switched as
soon as the comparison condition is fulfilled and are therefore independent of the bus cycle.

Comparison Value Reached, Output Pulse

If the counter status reaches the comparison value, the comparator switches on the
respective digital output for the assigned pulse duration.
The control bit CTRL_DO1 or CTRL_DO2 must be set for this.
The status bits STS_DO1 and STS_DO2 always have the status of the corresponding digital
output.
The comparison result is indicated by the status bit STS_CMP1 or STS_CMP2 and cannot
be reset by acknowledgment until the pulse duration has elapsed.
If a main count direction is assigned, the comparator switches only when the comparison
value in the main count direction is reached.
If a main count direction is not assigned, the comparator switches when the comparison
value is reached from either direction.
If the digital output is set by control bit SET_DO1 or SET_DO2, it is reset when the pulse
duration has elapsed.
Isochronous mode: In isochronous mode as well, the DO1 and DO2 outputs are switched as
soon as the comparison condition is fulfilled and are therefore independent of the bus cycle.

Pulse Duration when the Comparison Value is Reached

The pulse duration begins when the respective digital output is set. The inaccuracy of the
pulse duration is less than 2 ms.
The pulse duration can be set to suit the actuators used. The pulse duration specifies how
long the output is to be set for. The pulse duration can be preselected between 0 ms and
510 ms in increments of 2 ms.
If the pulse duration = 0, the output is set until the comparison condition is no longer fulfilled.
Note that the count pulse times must be greater than the minimum switching times of the
digital output.
Isochronous mode: In isochronous mode as well, the DO1 and DO2 outputs are switched as
soon as the comparison condition is fulfilled and are therefore independent of the bus cycle.

148

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Switch at comparison values

The comparator switches the output when the following conditions are met:
The two comparison values must be loaded using the load functions CMP_VAL1 and
CMP_VAL2, and
After the comparison values are loaded, the DO1 output must be enabled with
CRTL_DO1.
The following table shows you when the DO1 is switched on or off:
DO1 is switched on when

DO1 Is switched off when

V2 < V1 (see Figure below)

V2 counter status V1

V2 > counter status

or
counter status > V1

V2 = V1

V2 = counter status = V1

V2 counter status V1

V2 > V1 (see Figure below)

V1 > counter status

or
counter status > V2

V1 counter status V2

The comparison result is indicated by the status bit STS_CMP1. You can only acknowledge
and thus reset this bit when the comparison condition is no longer fulfilled.
There is no hysteresis in the case of this output behavior.
It is not possible to control the DO1 output with the SET_DO1 control bit in the case of this
output behavior.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

149

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
Isochronous mode: In isochronous mode, as well, the DO1 output is switched as soon as the
comparison condition is fulfilled and is therefore independent of the bus cycle.
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
9
9



W

'2

Figure 3-13

W

V2 < V1 at the Start of Counting

&RXQWHUVWDWXV
9
9



W

'2

Figure 3-14

W

V2 > V1 at the Start of Counting

Setting or Modifying the Function and Behavior of the Digital Output DO1
When setting or modifying the behavior of DO1, you must take all assignable
interdependencies into account. Failure to do so will generate a parameter assignment error
or a loading error.
Boundary conditions:
If you assign "Switch at Comparison Values" for DO1, you must:
Set hysteresis = 0, and
Assign "Output" for the DO2 output

Hysteresis
An encoder can remain at a particular position and then fluctuate around this position. This
state causes the counter status to fluctuate around a particular value. If there is a
comparison value in this fluctuation range, for example, the associated output is switched on
and off in accordance with the rhythm of the fluctuations. The 1Count5V is equipped with
programmable hysteresis to prevent this switching in response to small fluctuations. You can
assign a range between 0 and 255 (0 means: hysteresis switched off).
Hysteresis also works with overflow and underflow.

150

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Method of Operation with Counter Status Comparison Value and Counter Status Comparison
Value
The diagram below provides an example of how hysteresis works. The figure shows the
various responses of an output with a hysteresis of 0 (= switched off) as opposed to
hysteresis of 3. In the example, the comparison value is 5.
The following settings are assigned for the counter: "Main count direction" = "Up" and
"Switch on at counter status comparison value".
When the comparison condition is met, hysteresis becomes active. While the hysteresis is
active, the comparison result remains unchanged.
If the count value goes outside the hysteresis range, hysteresis is no longer active. The
comparator switches again according to its comparison conditions.
&RXQWYDOXH











+\V

+\V

Figure 3-15

Example of How Hysteresis Works

Note
If the count direction changes on the comparison value when hysteresis is active, the output
is reset.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

151

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Method of Operation when the Comparison Value Is Reached and the Pulse Duration = 0
The diagram below provides an example of how hysteresis works. The figure shows the
differences in the behavior of an output when hysteresis of 0 (= switched off) is assigned as
opposed to hysteresis of 3. In the example, the comparison value is 5.
The following settings are assigned for the counter: "Pulse on reaching the comparison
value", "No main count direction" and "Pulse duration = 0".
When the comparison conditions are met, hysteresis becomes active. While the hysteresis is
active, the comparison result remains unchanged. If the count value goes outside the
hysteresis range, hysteresis is no longer active. The comparator deletes the result of the
comparison.
&RXQWYDOXH











+\V

+\V

Figure 3-16

152

Example of How Hysteresis Works

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Method of Operation when the Comparison Value Is Reached, Output Pulse Duration
The diagram below provides an example of how hysteresis works. The figure shows the
various responses of an output with a hysteresis of 0 (= switched off) as opposed to
hysteresis of 3. In the example, the comparison value is 5.
The following settings are assigned for the counter: "Pulse on reaching the comparison
value", "No main count direction" and "pulse duration > 0".
When the comparison conditions have been met, hysteresis becomes active and a pulse of
the assigned duration is output.
If the count value goes outside the hysteresis range, hysteresis is no longer active.
When hysteresis is enabled, the 1Count5V stores the count direction. If the hysteresis range
is exited in a different direction to the one stored, a pulse is output.
&RXQWYDOXH











+\V

+\V

Figure 3-17

Example of How Hysteresis Works

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

153

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Controlling the Outputs Simultaneously with the Comparators

If you have selected a comparison function for the outputs, you can continue to control the
outputs with SET_DO1 or SET_DO2. This allows you to simulate the effect of the
comparison functions on your control program:
The output is set with the positive edge of SET_DO1 or SET_DO2. However, if the "Pulse
on Reaching the Comparison Value" function is selected, only one pulse with the
specified duration is output. When pulse duration = 0, the output can be set with
SET_DO1 or SET_DO2, as long as the count value is located on the comparison value or
hysteresis is active. The SET_DO1 control bit is not permitted with the "Switch at
Comparison Values" output behavior.
A negative edge of SET_DO1 or SET_DO2 resets the output.
Note that the comparators are still active and can set or reset the output if the comparison
result changes.
Note
An output set with SET_DO1 or SET_DO2 is not reset at the comparison value (by the
comparator).

Loading Comparison Values

You transfer the comparison values to the 1Count5V. The counting is not affected by this.
Table 3- 3

Valid Range for the Two Comparison Values

Main count direction:

None

Main count direction:

Up

Main count direction:

Down

Low counting limit

to
high counting limit

-2147483648
to
high counting limit -1

1
to
2147483647

Modifying the Function and Behavior of Digital Outputs

You can modify the functions and behavior of the outputs during operation using the control
interface. The 1Count5V deletes the outputs and accepts the values as follows:
Function of digital outputs DO1 and DO2: If you change this function so that the
comparison condition is satisfied, the output is not set until after the next count pulse.
However, if hysteresis is enabled, the 1Count5V does not make any changes at the
output.
Hysteresis: An active hysteresis (see How Hysteresis Works) continues to be active
following the change. The new hysteresis range is applied the next time the comparison
value is reached.
Pulse duration: The new pulse duration takes effect with the next pulse.

154

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

3.6.10

Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interface for the Count Modes
Note
For the 1Count5V, the following data of the control and feedback interface are consistent:
Bytes 0 to 3
Bytes 4 to 7
Bytes 8 to 11 (modified user data interface)
Use the access or addressing mode for data consistency over the entire control and
feedback interface on your DP master (only for configuration using the GSD file).

Assignment Tables
The tables show the assignment of the feedback and control interface for the counting
modes.
Table 3- 4

Feedback Interface (Inputs)

Address

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3

Count value or stored count value in the case of the latch function on the digital input

Byte 4

Bit 7: Short circuit of the encoder supply

ERR_24V

Bit 6: Short circuit / wire break / overtemperature

ERR_DO1

Bit 5: Parameter assignment error

ERR_PARA

Bit 4: Short circuit / wire break / overtemperature

ERR_DO2

Bit 3: Short circuit / wire break / encoder signal

ERR_ENCODER

Bit 2: Resetting of status bits active

RES_STS_A

Bit 1: Load function error

ERR_LOAD

Byte 5

Designation

Bit 0: Load function is running

STS_LOAD

Bit 7: Down direction status

STS_C_DN

Bit 6: Up direction status

STS_C_UP

Bit 5: Reserve = 0
Bit 4: DO2 status

STS_DO2

Bit 3: DO1 status

STS_DO1

Bit 2: Reserve = 0
Bit 1: DI status

STS_DI

Bit 0: Internal gate status

STS_GATE

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

155

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
Address
Byte 6

Assignment

Designation

Bit 7: Zero-crossing in the count range when counting without a main count direction

STS_ND

Bit 6: Low count limit

STS_UFLW

Bit 5: High count limit

STS_OFLW

Bit 4: Comparator 2 status

STS_CMP2

Bit 3: Comparator 1 status

STS_CMP1

Bit 2: Reserve = 0
Bit 1: Reserve = 0
STS_SYN

Bit 0: Synchronization status

Byte 7

Reserve = 0

Bytes 8 to 11

Count value 1

Modified user data interface

Table 3- 5

Control Interface (Outputs)

Address

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3

Load value direct, preparatory, comparison value 1 or 2

Byte 0

Behavior of DO1, DO2 of the 1Count5V

Bit 2

Bit 1

Bit 0

Function DO1

Output

Switch on at counter status comparison value

Switch on at counter status comparison value

Pulse on reaching the comparison value

Switch at comparison values

blocked

blocked

blocked

Bit 5

Bit 4

Function DO2

Output

Switch on at counter status comparison value

Switch on at counter status comparison value

Pulse on reaching the comparison value

Bits 3, 6, and 7: Reserve = 0

Bytes 1 to 3

Byte 1: Hysteresis DO1, DO2 (range 0 to 255)

Byte 2: Pulse duration [2ms] DO1, DO2 (range 0 to 255)
Byte 3: Reserve = 0

156

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
Address

Assignment

Byte 4

EXTF_ACK

Bit 7: Error diagnostics acknowledgment

CTRL_DO2

Bit 6: Enable DO2

SET_DO2

Bit 5: Control bit DO2

CTRL_DO1

Bit 4: Enable DO1

SET_DO1

Bit 3: Control bit DO1

RES_STS

Bit 2: Start resetting of status bit

CTRL_SYN

Bit 1: Enable synchronization

SW_GATE

Bit 0: SW gate control bit

Bit 7: Reserve = 0

Byte 5

Bit 6: Reserve = 0
Bit 5: Reserve = 0
C_DOPARAM

Bit 4: Change function and behavior of DO1, DO2

CMP_VAL2

Bit 3: Load comparison value 2

CMP_VAL1

Bit 2: Load comparison value 1

LOAD_PREPARE

Bit 1: Load counter preparatory

LOAD_VAL

Bit 0: Load counter direct

Bytes 6 to 7
1 Not

Reserve = 0 1

used for modified user interface

Notes on the Control Bits

Table 3- 6

Notes on the Control Bits

Control bits

Notes

C_DOPARAM

Change function and behavior of DO1, DO2

The values from bytes 0 to 2 are applied as new function, hysteresis, and pulse duration of DO1,
DO2. This may result in the following error: The conditions for the "Switch at comparison values"
behavior are not fulfilled.

CMP_VAL1

Load comparison value 1

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is transferred to comparison value 1 with the control bit "Load
comparison value CMP_VAL1".

CMP_VAL2

Load comparison value 2

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is transferred to comparison value 2 with the control bit "Load
comparison value CMP_VAL2".

CTRL_DO1

Enable DO1
You use this bit to enable the DO1 output.

CTRL_DO2

Enable DO2
You use this bit to enable the DO2 output.

CTRL_SYN

You use this bit to enable synchronization.

EXTF_ACK

Error acknowledgment
The error bits must be acknowledged with the EXTF_ACK control bit after the cause is removed.

LOAD_PREPARE

Load counter preparatory

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is applied as the load value.

LOAD_VAL

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is loaded directly as the new count value.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

157

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
Control bits

Notes

RES_STS

Start resetting of status bit

The status bits are reset by means of the acknowledgment process between the RES_STS bit and
the RES_STS_A bit.

SET_DO1

Control bit DO1

SET_DO2

Control bit DO2

Switches the DO1 digital output on and off when CTRL_DO1 is set.
Switches the DO2 digital output on and off when CTRL_DO2 is set.
SW_GATE

SW gate control bit

The SW gate is opened/closed via the control interface with the SW_GATE bit.

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Table 3- 7

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Feedback bits

Notes

ERR_24V

Short circuit of the encoder supply

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message, if assigned.

ERR_DO1

Short circuit/wire break/overtemperature due to overload at output DO1

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message, if assigned.

ERR_DO2

Short circuit/wire break/overtemperature at output DO2

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message, if assigned.

ERR_ENCODER

Short circuit / wire break of 5 V encoder signal

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message, if assigned.

ERR_LOAD

Load function error

The LOAD_VAL, LOAD_PREPARE, CMP_VAL1, CMP_VAL2, and C_DOPARAM bits cannot be set
simultaneously during transfer. This results in setting the ERR_LOAD status bit, similar to loading an
incorrect value (which is not accepted).

ERR_PARA

Parameter assignment error ERR_PARA

RES_STS_A

Resetting of status bits active

STS_C_DN

Down direction status

STS_C_UP

Up direction status

STS_CMP1

Comparator 1 status
The STS_CMP1 status bit indicates that the output is or was switched on. It must be acknowledged
with the RES_STS control bit. If the status bit is acknowledged when the output is still switched on,
the bit is set again immediately. This bit is also set if the SET_DO1 control bit is used when DO1 is
not enabled.

STS_CMP2

Comparator 2 status
The STS_CMP2 status bit indicates that the output is or was switched on. It must be acknowledged
with the RES_STS control bit. If the status bit is acknowledged when the output is still switched on,
the bit is set again immediately. This bit is also set if the SET_DO2 control bit is used when DO2 is
not enabled.

158

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
Feedback bits

Notes

STS_DI

DI status
The status of the DI is indicated in all modes with the STS_DI bit in the feedback interface.

STS_DO1

DO1 status
The STS_DO1 status bit indicates the status of the DO1 digital output.

STS_DO2

DO2 status
The STS_DO2 status bit indicates the status of the DO2 digital output.

STS_GATE

Internal gate status: Counting

STS_LOAD

Load function is running

STS_ND

Zero-crossing in the count range when counting without a main counting direction. The bit must be
reset by the RES_STS control bit.

STS_OFLW

High counting limit violated

STS_UFLW

Low counting limit violated

Both bits must be reset.

STS_SYN

Synchronization status
After successful synchronization, the STS_SYN bit is set. It must be reset by the RES_STS control
bit.

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Table 3- 8

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Configuring with STEP 7
using the GSD file 1)
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUS-DP\Additional
FIELD DEVICES\I/O\ET 200S)

Configuring with STEP 7

using HW Config
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUSDP\ET 200S)

Feedback interface

Read with SFC 14 "DPRD_DAT"

Load command (e.g. L PID)

Control interface

Write with SFC 15 "DPWR_DAT"

Transfer command (e.g. T PQD)

Load and transfer commands are also possible with CPU 3xxC, CPU 3xx with MMC, and CPU 4xx (V3.0 and later).

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

159

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Resetting of the Status Bits

STS_SYN, STS_CMP1, STS_CMP2, STS_OFLW, STS_UFLW, STS_ND
(YHQWVWLOOSHQGLQJRQUHVHW

)HHGEDFNVLJQDOV
2QHRIWKHVWDWXV
ELWV
&RQWUROELW
5(6B676

)HHGEDFNELW
5(6B676B$
W

5HVHWH[HFXWHG
5HTXHVWFDQFHOHG
&RXQW9H[HFXWHVWKHUHVHW
5HTXHVWUHVHW

Figure 3-18

Resetting of the Status Bits

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

(UURUELW
(55B/2$'
&RQWUROELW
/2$'B9$/
/2$'B35(3$5(
&03B9$/
&03B9$/
&B'23$5$0

)HHGEDFNELW
676B/2$'
W
9DOXHDSSOLHG(QGRIWUDQVIHU
5HPRYDORIUHTXHVWDQGYDOXH
FRQWLQXHSURYLGLQJ
7KH&RXQW9KDVXQGHUVWRRGWKHUHTXHVW
5HTXHVWYDOXHWUDQVIHUDQGPDNHYDOXHDYDLODEOH

Figure 3-19

160

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Note
Only one of the following control bits can be set at a particular time:
CMP_VAL1 or CMP_VAL2 or LOAD_VAL or LOAD_PREPARE or C_DOPARAM.
Otherwise, the ERR_LOAD error is reported until all the specified control bits are deleted
again.
The ERR_LOAD error bit is only deleted when the following is carried out correctly.

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

In isochronous mode, exactly 4 bus cycles are always required to reset the status bits and to
accept values during the load function.
VW'3F\FOH

QG'3F\FOH

UG'3F\FOH

WK'3F\FOH

&RQWUROELW
LQXVHU
SURJUDP

6WDWXVELW
RIPRGXOH
7L
7'3

Figure 3-20

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

161

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

Error Detection
The program errors must be acknowledged. They have been detected by the 1Count5V and
are indicated at the feedback interface.
Channel-specific diagnostics are performed if you have enabled group diagnostics in your
configuration (see device manual of the interface module used).
The parameter assignment error bit is acknowledged by means of correct parameter
assignment.
$QHUURUKDVRFFXUUHGWKH&RXQW9VHWVDQHUURUELWD
GLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHPD\DSSHDUHUURUGHWHFWLRQFRQWLQXHV

(UURUHOLPLQDWHGZKHQ(;7)B$&.LVVHWE\WKHXVHU
SURJUDPWKH&RXQW9GHOHWHVWKHHUURUELWDGLDJQRVWLF
PHVVDJHPD\DSSHDU

HJHUURUELW
(55B9

(UURUDFNQRZOHGJPHQW
(;7)B$&.

Figure 3-21

Error Acknowledgment

In the case of continuous error acknowledgment (EXTF_ACK=1) or at CPU/Master Stop, the

1Count5V signals errors as soon as they are detected and resets them as soon as they have
been eliminated.

162

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes

3.6.11

Parameter Assignment for the Count Modes

Introduction
You can use either of the following to assign parameters for the 1Count5V:
STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 or later
A GSD file (http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/gsd)

Parameter List for Counting Modes

Table 3- 9

Parameter List for Counting Modes

Parameter

Value Range

Default

Disable/enable

Disable

Enable
Group diagnostics

Response to failure of the higher-level controller

Response to CPU/master STOP

Turn off DO/

Continue working mode/
DO substitute a value/
DO keep last value

Turn off DO

Signal evaluation A, B

Rotary encoder single/double/quadruple

Rotary encoder single

Diagnostics A and B

Off/on

Off

Encoder parameters

Diagnostics N

Off/on

Off

Direction input B

Normal/inverted

normal

Function DO1

Output/
Switch on at counter status comparison value/
Switch on at counter status comparison value/
Pulse on reaching the comparison value/
Switch at comparison values

Output

Function DO2

Output/
Switch on at counter status comparison value/
Switch on at counter status comparison value/
Pulse on reaching the comparison value

Output

Substitute value DO1

0/1

Substitute value DO2

0/1

Off/on

Off

Output parameters

Diagnostics

DO11

Diagnostics

DO21

Off/on

Off

Hysteresis DO1, DO2

0...255

Pulse duration [2 ms] DO1, DO2

0...255

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

163

1Count5V
3.6 Count Modes
Parameter
Mode

Value Range

Default

Counting mode

Continuous counting/
Once-only counting/
Periodic counting

Count continuously

Gate function

Cancel counting/
Interrupt counting

Cancel counting

Input signal HW gate

Normal/inverted

Normal

Function DI

Input/
HW gate/
Latch and retrigger at positive edge/
Synchronization at positive edge/
Latch at positive edge/
HW enable for synchronization

Input

Synchronization2

Once only/Periodic

Once-only

Main count direction

None/Up/Down

None

High counting limit

2 7FFF FFFF

7FFF FFFF

DO1/DO2 diagnostics (wire break) is possible only with pulse lengths of > 90 ms on digital output DO1/DO2.

Only relevant if Function DI = Synchronization at positive edge or HW enable for synchronization

Parameter Assignment Error

Incorrect mode
Incorrect main count direction
The "Input signal HW gate" parameter is set to inverted and the "Function DI" parameter
is not set to HW gate.
High counting limit incorrect
The value for the behavior of DO2 is not set to output although "Switch at comparison
values" has been assigned for DO1.
The value for hysteresis does not equal 0 although "Switch at comparison values" has
been assigned for DO1.
Function DI incorrect
"On" is set for diagnostics N although "Off" was set for diagnostics A and B.

What to Do in the Event of Errors

Check the set value ranges.

164

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7

Measurement Modes

3.7.1

Overview

Introduction
For the "Measuring Mode" parameter, you can select from the following modes:
Frequency Measurement
Period Measurement
Rotational Speed Measurement
For the "Measuring Method" parameter, you can select from the measurement methods:
With integration time
Continuous
To run one of these modes, you have to assign parameters to the 1Count5V (see section
"Parameter Assignment for Measurement Modes (Page 195)").

Sequence of Measurements with Integration Time

The measurement is carried out during the assigned integration time. When the integration
time elapses, the measured value is updated.
The end of a measurement is indicated by the STS_CMP1 status bit. This bit is reset by the
RES_STS control bit in the control interface.
If there were not at least two positive edges in the integration time which has been assigned
parameters, 0 is returned as the measured value.
A value of -1 is returned up until the end of the first integration time.
You can change the integration time for the next measurement during operation.

Direction Reversal
If the direction of rotation is reversed during an integration time, the measured value for this
measurement period is uncertain. If you evaluate the STS_C_UP and STS_C_DN feedback
bits (direction evaluation), you can respond to any process irregularities.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

165

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.2

Sequence of continuous-action measurement

Measuring Principle
The 1Count5V counts each positive edge of a pulse and assigns it a time value in s.
The update time indicates the time interval at which the measured value is updated by the
module in the feedback interface.
Rule for pulse sequences with one or several pulses per update time:
Dynamic measuring time = Time of last pulse in the current update time interval
minus
Time of last pulse in the previous update time interval
When the update time has elapsed, a new measured value is calculated and output with the
dynamic measuring time.
If the current update time does not contain a pulse, the following dynamic measuring time
results:
Dynamic measuring time = Time of current, elapsed update time
minus
Time of last pulse
When the update time has elapsed, an estimated measured value is calculated with the
dynamic measuring time under the assumption that a pulse occurred at the end of the
update time.

166

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes
If the "1 Pulse per dynamic measuring time" estimated measured value is less than the last
measured value during the frequency and speed measurement, this estimated measured
value is output as the new measured value. With the period measurement, the dynamic
measuring time is output as the estimated period if the dynamic measuring time is greater
than the last measured period.
8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH

'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH
'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH
'\QDPLF
PHDVXULQJWLPH

Figure 3-22

Measuring Principle

The 1Count5V measures continuously. When assigning parameters, you specify an update
time.
During the time until the end of the first elapsed update time, a value of "-1" is returned.
The continuous measurement begins after the gate is opened with the first pulse of the pulse
train to be measured. The first measured value can be calculated after the second pulse, at
the earliest.
A measured value (frequency, period, or speed) is output in the feedback interface each time
the update time elapses. The end of a measurement is indicated with the STS_CMP1 status
bits. This bit is reset with the RES_STS and RES_STS_A bits according to the complete
acknowledgement principle.
If the direction of rotation is reversed during an update time, the measured value for this
measurement period is undefined. By evaluating the STS_C_DN and STS_C_UP feedback
bits (direction evaluation), you can respond to any process irregularities.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

167

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes
The following figure illustrates the principle of continuous measurement using frequency
measurement as an example.
*DWH

3XOVHWUDLQ
0HDVXUHG
YDOXH








8SGDWHWLPH



Figure 3-23

Principle of Continuous Measurement (Frequency Measurement Example)

Gate Control
To control the 1Count5V, you have to use the gate functions.

Isochronous Mode
In isochronous mode, the 1Count5V accepts control bits and control values from the control
interface in each bus cycle and reports back the response in the same cycle.
In each cycle, the 1Count5V transfers a measured value and the status bits that were valid
at time Ti.
The measurement starts and ends at time Ti.

168

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Integration Time/Update Time in Isochronous Mode

If the integration time/update time lasts several TDP cycles, you can recognize the new
measured value in the user program at the bit STS_CMP1 status bit (measurement
completed) of the feedback interface. This enables monitoring of the measuring operation or
a synchronization with the measuring operation. It takes 4 TDP cycles, however, for this
message to be acknowledged. The minimum integration time/update time in this case is (4 x
TDP).
If the application can tolerate a jitter in the integration time of a TDP and a measured value
that remains constant for several cycles, you don't have to continually evaluate status bit
STS_CMP1. Integration times/update times of (1 TDP) to (3 TDP) are then possible.
Because isochronous operation was lost in the last TDP cycle of the integration time, the
integration time is increased by one TDP cycle. This does not corrupt the measured value.
Note
The value range limits for the integration time/update time must not be exceeded (see tables
for the individual measuring modes).
A violation of the value range limits will result in a parameter assignment error, and the
1Count5V will not go into isochronous mode.

Note
When you change the configuration from non-isochronous to isochronous mode and vice
versa, you must always adjust the integration time/update time parameter if you want to keep
the length of the integration time/update time.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

169

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.3

Frequency measurement with integration time

Definition
In frequency measurement mode, the 1Count5V counts the pulses that arrive within a set
integration time.

Integration time
You preset the integration time with the integration time parameter (see table).
Table 3- 10

Calculation of the Integration Time

Boundary conditions

Integration time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

nmax
1

(10 ms/TDP [ms]) +1

1

1000
1

1000
10000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

1 Any

digits after the decimal point that come about after dividing by TDP are omitted.
It is not permitted to violate these limits. If these limits are violated, the 1Count5V generates a parameter assignment error
and will not go into isochronous mode.

Frequency measurement
The value of the calculated frequency is made available in the unit 10-3 Hz. The measured
frequency value can be read in the feedback interface (byte 0 to 3).
,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDOJDWH
%HJLQQLQJRIIUHTXHQF\
PHDVXUHPHQW

Figure 3-24

170

(QGRI
)UHTXHQF\PHDVXUHPHQW

Frequency Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
Low limit fu
0 to 499,999,999

High limit fo
10-3

Hz

fu+1 to 500,000,000 10-3 Hz

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

Integration time

fmin absolute error

fmax absolute error

10 s

0.1 Hz 0.001 Hz

500 000 Hz 90 Hz

1s

1 Hz 0.001 Hz

500 000 Hz 55 Hz

0.1 s

10 Hz 0.002 Hz

500 000 Hz 52 Hz

0.01 s

100 Hz 0.013 Hz

500 000 Hz 63 Hz

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

171

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.4

Continuous Frequency Measurement

Definition
In frequency measurement mode, the 1Count5V counts the pulses that arrive within a
dynamic measuring period.

Update Time
The 1Count5V updates the measured values cyclically. You preset the update time with the
Update Time parameter (see table). You can change the update time during operation.
Table 3- 11

Calculation of the Update Time

Boundary conditions

Update time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

nmax
1

(10 ms/TDP [ms]) +1

1

1000
1

1000
10000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

Any digits after the decimal point resulting from division by TDP are omitted.
These limits may not be violated. If these limits are violated, the 1Count5V generates a parameter assignment error and
will not go into isochronous mode.

Frequency measurement
The value of the calculated frequency is made available in the unit 10-3 Hz. The measured
frequency value can be read in the feedback interface (byte 0 to 3).
8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDOJDWH
6WDUWRIIUHTXHQF\
PHDVXUHPHQW

Figure 3-25

172

(QGRI
IUHTXHQF\PHDVXUHPHQW

Frequency Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
Encoder type

Low limit fu

5-V encoders

High limit fo

0 to 499,999,999

10-3

Hz

fu+1 to 500,000,000 10-3 Hz

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

Frequency f

Absolute error
0.1 Hz

0.001 Hz

1 Hz

0.001 Hz

10 Hz

0.003 Hz

100 Hz

0.02 Hz

1 000 Hz

0.18 Hz

10 000 Hz

1.8 Hz

100 000 Hz

18 Hz

500 000 Hz

90 Hz

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Measurement Modes (Page 185)")

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

173

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Function of the Digital Output DO1

For the "Function DO1" parameter, select one of the following functions for the DO1 digital
output:
Output (no switching by the limit-value monitoring)
Measured value outside the limits
Measured value under the low limit
Measured value over the high limit
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes (Page 186)")

Function of the Digital Output DO2

Output
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes (Page 186)")

Changing Values during Operation

The following values can be changed during operation:
Low limit (LOAD_PREPARE)
High limit (LOAD_VAL)
Function of the Digital Output DO1 (C_DOPARAM)
Integration time/update time (C_INTTIME)
(see sections "Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes (Page 186)" and
"Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interfaces for the Measurement Modes
(Page 188)")

174

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.5

Rotational speed measurement with integration time

Definition
In rotational speed measurement mode, the 1Count5V counts the pulses that arrive from a
tachometer generator within a set integration time and calculates the speed of the connected
motor.

Integration time
You preset the integration time with the Integration Time parameter.
Table 3- 12

Calculation of the Integration Time

Boundary conditions

Integration time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

nmax
1

(10 ms/TDP [ms]) +1

1

1000
1

1000
10000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

Any digits after the decimal point resulting from division by TDP are omitted.
These limits may not be violated. If these limits are violated, the 1Count5V generates a parameter assignment error and
will not go into isochronous mode.
1

Rotational Speed Measurement

For rotational speed measurement mode, you also have to assign the pulses per encoder or
motor revolution.
The rotational speed is returned in the unit 1x10-3 /min.
,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDO*DWH
%HJLQQLQJRIURWDWLRQDO
VSHHGPHDVXUHPHQW

Figure 3-26

(QGRIURWDWLRQDO
VSHHGPHDVXUHPHQW

Rotational Speed Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

175

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
Low limit nu

High limit no

0 to 24 999 999

10-3

/min

nu+1 to 25 000 000 10-3 /min

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

Table 3- 13

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication (Number of Pulses per Encoder
Revolution = 60)

Integration time

176

nmin absolute error

nmax absolute error

10 s

1 /min 0.03 /min

25 000 /min 4.5 /min

1s

1 /min 0.03 /min

25 000 /min 2.8 /min

0.1 s

10 /min 0.03 /min

25 000 /min 2.6 /min

0.01 s

100 /min 0.04 /min

25 000 /min 3.2 /min

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.6

Continuous Rotational Speed Measurement

Definition
In rotational speed measurement mode, the 1Count5V counts the pulses that are received
from a tachometer generator within a dynamic measuring time, and calculates the speed
from this value with the number of pulses per encoder revolution.

Update time
The 1Count5V updates the measured values cyclically. You preset the update time with the
Update Time parameter (see table). You can change the update time during operation.
Table 3- 14

Calculation of the Integration Time

Boundary conditions

Update time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

nmax

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

1000

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

(10 ms/TDP [ms]) +1 1

1000

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

10000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

1 Any

digits after the decimal point that come about after dividing by TDP are omitted.
These limits may not be violated. If these limits are violated, the 1Count5V generates a parameter assignment error and
will not go into isochronous mode.

Rotational Speed Measurement

For rotational speed measurement mode, you also have to assign the pulses per encoder or
motor revolution.
The rotational speed is returned in the unit 1x10-3 /min.
8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDOJDWH
6WDUWRIURWDWLRQDOVSHHG
PHDVXUHPHQW

Figure 3-27

(QGRI
URWDWLRQDOVSHHGPHDVXUHPHQW

Rotational Speed Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

177

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
Low limit nu

High limit no

0 to 24 999 999

10-3

/min

nu+1 to 25 000 000 10-3 /min

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication (Number of Pulses per Encoder Revolution = 60)
Rotational speed n

Absolute error

1 /min

0.04 /min

10 /min

0.04 /min

100 /min

0.05 /min

1 000 /min

0.21 /min

10 000 /min

1.82 /min

25 000 /min

4.5 /min

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Measurement Modes (Page 185)")

Function of the Digital Output DO1

For the "Function DO1" parameter, select one of the following functions for the DO1 digital
output:
Output (no switching by the limit-value monitoring)
Measured value outside the limits
Measured value under the low limit
Measured value over the high limit
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes (Page 186)")

Function of the Digital Output DO2

Output
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes (Page 186)")

178

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Changing Values during Operation

The following values can be changed during operation:
Low limit (LOAD_PREPARE)
High limit (LOAD_VAL)
Function of the digital output DO1 (C_DOPARAM)
Integration time/update time (C_INTTIME)
(see sections "Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes (Page 186)" and
"Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interfaces for the Measurement Modes
(Page 188)")

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

179

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.7

Period measurement with integration time

Definition
In period measurement mode, the 1Count5V measures the time between two positive edges
of the counting signal by counting the pulses of an internal quartz-accurate reference
frequency (16 MHz) within a preset integration time.

Integration Time
You preset the integration time with the Integration Time parameter (see the table below).
Boundary conditions

Integration time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

nmax
1

10 ms/TDP [ms] +1
1

12000
1

12000
120 000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

1 Any digits after the decimal point that come about after dividing by TDP are omitted.
These limits must not be violated. If these limits are violated, the 1Count5V generates a parameter assignment error and
will not go into isochronous mode.

Period Measurement
The value of the calculated period is given in the unit 1 s or 1/16 s. The measured period
can be read in the feedback interface (byte 0 to 3).
,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

,QWHJUDWLRQWLPH

3HULRG

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDOJDWH
6WDUWRISHULRG
PHDVXUHPHQW

Figure 3-28

180

(QGRISHULRG
PHDVXUHPHQW

Period Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
1 s resolution
Low limit Tu

High limit To

0 to 119 999 999 s

Tu+1 to 120 000 000 s

1/16 s resolution
Low limit Tu

High limit To

0 to 1 919 999 999 s

Tu+1 to 1 920 000 000 s

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

1 s resolution
Integration time

Tmin absolute error

T absolute error

100 s

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (100 000 000 10 000)

10 s

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (10 000 000 1 000)

1s

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (1 000 000 100)

0.1 s

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (100 000 10)

0.01 s

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (10 000 1)

1/16 s resolution
Integration time
100 s

Tmin absolute error

T absolute error

1/16 s* (160 0)

1/16 s* (1 600 000 000 160 000)

10 s

1/16 s* (160 0)

1/16 s* (160 000 000 16 000)

1s

1/16 s* (160 0)

1/16 s* (16 000 000 1 600)

0.1 s

1/16 s* (160 0)

1/16 s* (1 600 000 160)

0.01 s

1/16 s* (160 0)

1/16 s* (160 000 16)

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

181

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.8

Continuous Period Measurement

Definition
In period measurement mode, the 1Count5V indicates the dynamic measuring time as a
period. If the period is less than the update time, then an average is calculated for the period.

Update Time
The 1Count5V updates the measured values cyclically. You preset the update time with the
Update Time parameter (see table). You can change the update time during operation.
Boundary conditions

Update time

Range of n
nmin

Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

Any TDP

n x 10 ms

TDP < 10 ms

n x TDP

TDP 10 ms

n x TDP

nmax
1

(10 ms/TDP [ms]) +1

1

12000
1

12000
120 000 ms/TDP [ms] 1

1 Any digits after the decimal point that come about after dividing by TDP are omitted.
These limits may not be violated. If these limits are violated, the 1Count5V generates a parameter assignment error and
will not go into isochronous mode.

Period measurement
The value of the calculated period is given in the unit 1 s or 1/16 s. The measured period
can be read in the feedback interface (byte 0 to 3).
8SGDWHWLPH

8SGDWHWLPH

3HULRG

&RXQWSXOVHV

,QWHUQDOJDWH
6WDUWRISHULRGPHDVXUH
PHQW

Figure 3-29

182

(QGRISHULRGPHDVXUH
PHQW

Period Measurement with Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring
The following value ranges are permitted for limit-value monitoring:
1 s resolution
Low limit Tu

High limit To

0 to 119 999 999 s

Tu+1 to 120 000 000 s

1/16 s resolution
Low limit Tu

High limit To

0 to 1 919 999 999 s

Tu+1 to 1 920 000 000 s

Possible Measuring Ranges with Error Indication

1 s resolution
Period
Tmin absolute error

Period
Tmin absolute error

1 s* (10 0)

1 s* (100 000 10)

1 s* (100 0)

1 s* (1 000 000 100)

1 s* (1 000 0)

1 s* (10 000 000 1 002)

1 s* (10 000 1)

1 s* (100 000 000 10 020)

1/16 s resolution
Period
Tmin absolute error

Period
Tmin absolute error

1/16 s* (160 1)

1/16 s* (1 600 000 160)

1/16 s* (1 600 1)

1/16 s* (16 000 000 1 600)

1/16 s* (16 000 3)

1/16 s* (160 000 000 16 000)

1/16 s* (160 000 20)

1/16 s* (1 600 000 000 160 000)

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

183

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions in Measurement Modes (Page 185)")

Function of the Digital Output DO1

For the "Function DO1" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital output:
Output (no switching by the limit-value monitoring)
Measured value outside the limits
Measured value under the low limit
Measured value over the high limit
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes (Page 186)")

Function of the Digital Output DO2

Output
(see section "Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes (Page 186)")

Changing Values during Operation

The following values can be changed during operation:
Low limit (LOAD_PREPARE)
High limit (LOAD_VAL)
Function of the digital output DO1 (C_DOPARAM)
Integration time/update time (C_INTTIME)
(see sections "Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes (Page 186)" and
"Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interfaces for the Measurement Modes
(Page 188)")

184

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.9

Gate Functions in Measurement Modes

Software Gate and Hardware Gate

The 1Count5V has two gates
A software gate (SW gate), which is controlled by the SW_GATE control bit.
The software gate can only be opened by a positive edge of the SW_GATE control bit. It
is closed when this bit is reset. Note the transfer times and run times of your control
program.
A hardware gate (HW gate), which is controlled by means of the digital input on the
1Count5V. You assign the hardware gate as the function of the digital input (Function DI
"HW gate"). It is opened on a positive edge at the digital input and closed on a negative
edge.
Internal gate
The internal gate is the logical AND operation of the HW gate and SW gate. Counting is only
active when the HW gate and the SW gate are open. The STS_GATE feedback bit (internal
gate status) indicates this. If a HW gate has not been assigned, the setting of the SW gate is
decisive.

Gate Control
Gate control by means of the SW gate only
The opening/closing of the SW gate starts/stops measurement.
If the SW gate is opened in isochronous mode in bus cycle "n" by setting the SW_GATE
control bit, measurement starts at time Ti in cycle "n+1".
Gate control by means of the SW gate and HW gate
The opening and closing of the SW gate with the HW gate open starts/stops measurement.
The opening and closing of the HW gate with the SW gate open starts/stops measurement.
The SW gate is opened/closed by means of the control interface with the SW_GATE bit.
The HW gate is opened/closed by means of a 24-V signal on the digital input.
In isochronous mode, when the SW gate is open, measurement starts at time Ti,
immediately after the HW gate has opened. The measurement ends at time Ti, which occurs
immediately after the HW gate has closed.
When the HW gate is open, the measurement starts at time Ti in the cycle, immediately after
the SW has opened, and ends at time Ti in the cycle, which occurs immediately after the SW
gate has closed.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

185

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.10

Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes

Introduction
The various ways of setting the behavior of the outputs are described in this section.

Behavior of the Outputs in Measurement Modes

You can assign parameters for the digital outputs of the 1Count5V.
You can store a high and a low limit for frequency measurement, rotational speed
measurement or period measurement. If the limits are violated, digital output DO1 is
activated. These limit values can be assigned and changed with the load function.
You can change the function and the behavior of the digital outputs during operation. The
new function takes effect immediately. In isochronous mode it always takes effect at time Ti.
You can choose from the following functions:
Output
Measured value outside the limits (limit-value monitoring)
Measured value under the low limit (limit-value monitoring)
Measured value over the high limit (limit-value monitoring)

Output
If you want to switch the outputs on or off, you must enable them with the CTRL_DO1 and
CTRL_DO2 control bits.
You can switch the outputs on and off with the control bits SET_DO1 and SET_DO2.
You can query the status of the outputs with the status bits STS_DO1 and STS_DO2 in the
feedback interface.
In isochronous mode, the outputs are switched at time To.

186

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Limit-Value Monitoring

2)/:

8)/:

*DWHVWDUW

0HDVXUHGYDOXH
/RZ
OLPLW

Figure 3-30

+LJK
OLPLW

Limit-Value Monitoring

After the integration time elapses, the measured value obtained (frequency, rotational speed,
or period) is compared with the assigned limit values.
If the current measured value is under the assigned low limit (measured value < low limit), bit
STS_UFLW = 1 is set in the feedback interface.
If the current measured value is over the assigned high limit (measured value > high limit),
bit STS_OFLW = 1 is set in the feedback interface.
You must acknowledge these bits with the RES_STS control bit.
If the measured value is still outside or again outside the limits after acknowledgment, the
corresponding status bit is set again.
If you set the low limit at 0, you switch off dynamic monitoring of violation of the low limit
value.
Depending on the parameter assignment, the enabled digital output DO1 can be set by the
limit-value monitoring:
"Function DO1" parameter

DO1 is set ...

Measured value outside the limits

Measured value < low limit

OR
measured value > high limit

Measured value under the low limit

Measured value < low limit

Measured value over the high limit

Measured value > high limit

In isochronous mode, the output is switched at time Ti.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

187

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.11

Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interfaces for the Measurement

Modes
Note
For the 1Count5V, the following data of the control and feedback interface are consistent:
Bytes 0 to 3
Bytes 4 to 7
Bytes 8 to 11 (modified user data interface)
Use the access or addressing mode for data consistency over the entire control and
feedback interface on your master (only for configuration using the GSD file).

Assignment Tables
Table 3- 15
Address
Bytes 0 to 3
Byte 4

Feedback Interface (Inputs)

Assignment

Measured value
Bit 7: Short circuit of the encoder supply
Bit 6: Short circuit / wire break / overtemperature
Bit 5: Parameter assignment error
Bit 4: Short circuit / wire break / overtemperature
Bit 3: Short circuit / wire break / encoder signal
Bit 2: Resetting of status bits active
Bit 1: Load function error
Bit 0: Load function is running
Byte 5
Bit 7: Down direction status
Bit 6: Up direction status
Bit 5: Reserve = 0
Bit 4: DO2 status
Bit 3: DO1 status
Bit 2: Reserve = 0
Bit 1: DI status
Bit 0: Internal gate status
Byte 6
Bit 7: Reserve = 0
Bit 6: Low limit of measuring range
Bit 5: High limit of measuring range
Bit 4: Reserve = 0
Bit 3: Measurement completed
Bit 2: Reserve = 0
Bit 1: Reserve = 0
Bit 0: Reserve = 0
Byte 7
Reserve = 0
Bytes 8 to 11
Count value 1
1 Modified user data interface

188

Designation
ERR_24V
ERR_DO1
ERR_PARA
ERR_DO2
ERR_ENCODER
RES_STS_A
ERR_LOAD
STS_LOAD
STS_C_DN
STS_C_UP
STS_DO2
STS_DO1
STS_DI
STS_GATE
STS_UFLW
STS_OFLW
STS_CMP1

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes
Table 3- 16

Control Interface (Outputs)

Address

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3

Low limit or high limit

Function of DO1
Byte 0:

Bytes 1 to 3:

Bit 1

Bit 0

Function DO1

Output

Measured value outside the limits

Measured value under the low limit

Measured value over the high limit

Reserve = 0

Integration time/update time

Byte 0, 1:

Integration time [n*10ms]

(Range 1 to 1000/12000)

Byte 4

Byte 5

Bytes 6 to 7
1

Byte 2, 3:

Reserve = 0

Bit 7:

Error diagnostics acknowledgement EXTF_ACK

Bit 6:

Enable DO2 CTRL_DO2

Bit 5:

Control bit DO2 SET_DO2

Bit 4:

Enable DO1 CTRL_DO1

Bit 3:

Control bit DO1 SET_DO1

Bit 2:

Start resetting of status bit RES_STS

Bit 1:

Reserve = 0

Bit 0:

SW gate control bit SW_GATE

Bit 7:

Reserve = 0

Bit 6:

Reserve = 0

Bit 5:

Reserve = 0

Bit 4:

Change function of DO1, C_DOPARAM

Bit 3:

Reserve = 0

Bit 2:

Change integration time, C_INTTIME

Bit 1:

Load high limit LOAD_PREPARE

Bit 0:

Load low limit LOAD_VAL

Reserve = 01

Not used for modified user interface

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

189

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Notes on the Control Bits

Table 3- 17

Notes on the Control Bits

Control bits

Notes

C_DOPARAM

Change function of DO1

C_INTTIME

Change integration time

CTRL_DO1

Enable DO1

CTRL_DO2

Enable DO2

The value from byte 0 is adopted as the new function of DO1.

The value from bytes 0 and 1 is adopted as the new integration time for the next measurement.
You use this bit to enable the DO1 output.
You use this bit to enable the DO2 output.
EXTF_ACK

Error acknowledgment
The error bits must be acknowledged with the EXTF_ACK control bit after the cause is removed.

LOAD_PREPARE

Load high limit

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is adopted as the new high limit.

LOAD_VAL

Load low limit

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is adopted as the new low limit.

RES_STS

Start resetting of status bit

The status bits are reset by means of the acknowledgment process between the RES_STS bit and
the RES_STS_A bit.

SET_DO1

Control bit DO1

Switches the DO1 digital output on and off when CTRL_DO1 is set.

SET_DO2

Control bit DO2

Switches the DO2 digital output on and off when CTRL_DO2 is set.

SW_GATE

SW gate control bit

The SW gate is opened/closed via the control interface with the SW_GATE bit.

190

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Table 3- 18

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Feedback bits

Notes

ERR_24V

Short circuit of the encoder supply

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message if assigned.

ERR_DO1

Short circuit/wire break/overtemperature at output DO1

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message if assigned.

ERR_DO2

Short circuit/wire break/overtemperature at output DO2

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message if assigned.

ERR_ENCODER

Short circuit / wire break / encoder signal

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit
Diagnostic message if assigned.

ERR_LOAD

Load function error

The LOAD_VAL, LOAD_PREPARE, C_DOPARAM, and C_INTTIME bits cannot be set
simultaneously during transfer. This results in setting the ERR_LOAD status bit, similar to loading an
incorrect value (which is not accepted).

ERR_PARA

Parameter Assignment Error ERR_PARA

RES_STS_A

Resetting of status bits active

STS_C_DN

Down direction status

STS_C_UP

Up direction status

STS_CMP1

Measurement completed
After every elapsed time interval (update time/integration time), the measured value is updated
Measurement with integration time
The end of a measurement (after the interval has elapsed) is indicated with the STS_CMP1 status
bit.
Continuous measurement
At the end of the update time, the end of the measurement is signaled with status bit STS_CMP1 if a
measured value is output. The bit remains 0 if an estimated measured value is output.
This bit is reset by the RES_STS control bit in the control interface.

STS_DI

DI status
The status of the DI is indicated in all modes with the STS_DI bit in the feedback interface.

STS_DO1

DO1 status

STS_DO2

DO2 status

STS_GATE

Internal gate status: Measuring

STS_LOAD

Load function is running

STS_OFLW

High measuring limit violated

STS_UFLW

Low measuring limit violated

Both bits must be reset.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

191

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Table 3- 19

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Configuring with STEP 7
using the GSD file 1)
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUS-DP\Additional
FIELD DEVICES\I/O\ET 200S)

Configuring with STEP 7

using HW Config
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUSDP\ET 200S)

Feedback interface

Read with SFC 14 "DPRD_DAT"

Load command (e.g. L PID)

Control interface

Write with SFC 15 "DPWR_DAT"

Transfer command, e.g. T PQD

Load and transfer commands are also possible with CPU 3xxC, CPU 3xx with MMC, and CPU 4xx (V3.0 and later).

Resetting of the Status Bits

STS_CMP1, STS_OFLW, STS_UFLW
(YHQWVWLOOSHQGLQJRQUHVHW

)HHGEDFNVLJQDOV
2QHRIWKHVWDWXV
ELWV
&RQWUROELW
5(6B676

)HHGEDFNELW
5(6B676B$
W

5HVHWH[HFXWHG
5HTXHVWFDQFHOHG
&RXQW9H[HFXWHVWKHUHVHW
5HTXHVWUHVHW

Figure 3-31

192

Resetting of the Status Bits

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

(UURUELW
(55B/2$'
&RQWUROELW
/2$'B9$/
/2$'B35(3$5(
&B'23$5$0
&B,177,0(

W

W

)HHGEDFNELW
676B/2$'
W
9DOXHDSSOLHG(QGRIWUDQVIHU
5HPRYDORIUHTXHVWDQGYDOXH
FRQWLQXHSURYLGLQJ
7KH&RXQW9KDVXQGHUVWRRGWKHUHTXHVW
5HTXHVWYDOXHWUDQVIHUDQGPDNHYDOXHDYDLODEOH

Figure 3-32

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

Note
Only one of the following control bits can be set at a particular time:
LOAD_VAL or LOAD_PREPARE or C_DOPARAM or C_INTTIME.
Otherwise, the ERR_LOAD error is reported until all the specified control bits are deleted
again.
The ERR_LOAD error bit is only deleted when a correct value is transferred as follows.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

193

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

In isochronous mode, exactly 4 bus cycles are always required to reset the status bits and to
accept values during the load function.
VW'3F\FOH

QG'3F\FOH

UG'3F\FOH

WK'3F\FOH

&RQWUROELW
LQXVHU
SURJUDP

6WDWXVELW
RIPRGXOH
7L
7'3

Figure 3-33

7L
7'3

7L

7L

7'3

7'3

7L
7'3

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

Error Detection
The diagnostic errors must be acknowledged. They have been detected by the 1Count5V
and are indicated at the feedback interface. Channel-specific diagnostics are performed if
you have enabled group diagnostics in your configuration (see device manual of the
interface module used).
The parameter assignment error bit is acknowledged by means of correct parameter
assignment.
$QHUURUKDVRFFXUUHGWKH&RXQW9VHWVDQHUURUELWD
GLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHPD\DSSHDUHUURUGHWHFWLRQFRQWLQXHV

(UURUHOLPLQDWHGZKHQ(;7)B$&.LVVHWE\WKHXVHU
SURJUDPWKH&RXQW9GHOHWHVWKHHUURUELWDGLDJQRVWLF
PHVVDJHPD\DSSHDU

HJHUURUELW
(55B9

(UURUDFNQRZOHGJPHQW
(;7)B$&.

Figure 3-34

Error Acknowledgment

In the case of constant error acknowledgement (EXTF_ACK = 1) or in CPU/master STOP

mode, the 1Count5V reports the errors as soon as they are detected and clears the errors as
soon as they are eliminated.

194

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes

3.7.12

Parameter Assignment for Measurement Modes

Introduction
You can use either of the following to assign parameters for the 1Count5V:
STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 or later
A GSD file (http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/gsd)

Parameter List for Measuring Modes

Table 3- 20

Parameter List for Measuring Modes

Parameter

Value Range

Default

Disable/enable

Disable

Enable
Group diagnostics

Response to failure of the higher-level controller

Response to CPU/master STOP

Turn off DO/

Continue working mode/
DO substitute a value/
DO keep last value

Turn off DO

Diagnostics A and B

Off/on

Off

Direction input B

Normal/Inverted

Normal

Diagnostics DO1 1

Off/on

Off

Diagnostics DO2 1

Off/on

Off

Function DO1

Output/
Outside the limits/
Under the low limit/
Over the high limit

Output

Substitute value DO1

0/1

Substitute value DO2

0/1

Frequency measurement/
Rotational speed measurement/
Period measurement

Frequency measurement

Measuring method

With integration time/continuous

With integration time/

Resolution of period

1 s

1 s

Output parameters

Mode
Measuring mode

1/16 s
Function DI

Input/HW gate

Input

Input signal HW gate

Normal/Inverted

Normal

Low limit

Frequency measurement:
0 to fmax-1

Rotational speed measurement:

0 to nmax-1

Period measurement:
0 to Tmax-1

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

195

1Count5V
3.7 Measurement Modes
Parameter

Value Range

Default

High limit

Frequency measurement:
Low limit+1 to fmax

fmax

Rotational speed measurement:

Low limit+1 to nmax

nmax

Period measurement:
Low limit+1 to Tmax

Tmax

Frequency measurement:
1...1000

10

Rotational speed measurement:

1...1000

10

Integration time [n*10ms]

Encoder pulses per revolution 2

Period measurement:
1... 12000

10

1...65535

DO1/DO2 diagnostics (wire break, short circuit) are possible only with pulse lengths of >90 ms on digital output
DO1/DO2.

Only relevant in rotational speed measurement mode

Parameter Assignment Error

The following parameter assignment errors may occur:
Incorrect mode
Low limit incorrect
High limit incorrect
Integration time incorrect
Encoder pulses incorrect

What to Do in the Event of Errors

Check the set value ranges.

196

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.8 Fast mode

3.8

Fast mode

3.8.1

Overview

Introduction
This mode is suitable for position detection is especially short isochronous cycles.
This mode encompasses a subset of the functionality of the continuous counting mode.
It is intended for isochronous mode and differs from continuous counting by having a lower
TDP Modulemin and a TWA equal to zero. The module is operated in this mode as a pure
input module, i.e., there is no control interface in this operating mode.
This mode is available starting with FW Version V2.0 of the module. The module must be
configured as "1Count5V Fast Mode V2.0" in HW Config.
You can find the parameter assignment for "Fast Mode" in the chapter "Assigning
parameters for fast mode (Page 203)".

Maximum Count Range

A total of 25 bits are available for the count value.

Load value
You can specify a load value for the 1Count5V.
This load value is applied directly as the start value.

Gate Control
To control the 1Count5V, you can use the the HW gate.

State according to Parameter Assignment

Count value corresponds to the load value set in HW Config.

Isochrone Mode
In each cycle, the 1Count5V transfers the count and the status bits that were valid at time Ti.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

197

1Count5V
3.8 Fast mode

3.8.2

Fast mode

Definition
In this mode, the 1Count5V counts continuously starting from the start value:
When counting up, if the 1Count5V reaches the maximum value that can be represented
with 25 bits (all bits of the counter are set) and another count pulse arrives, the count value
jumps to "0" and resumes counting from there without losing a pulse.
When counting down, if the 1Count5V reaches the value "0" and another count pulse arrives,
the count value jumps to the maximum value that can be represented with 25 bits (all bits of
the counter are set) and resumes counting without losing a pulse.

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select between the following functions:
Digital input off.
Input
HW gate (see chapter "Gate function in the case of fast mode (Page 198)")
Synchronization on positive edge (see chapter "Synchronization (Page 199)")
HW enable for synchronization (see chapter "Synchronization (Page 199)")

3.8.3

Gate function in the case of fast mode

Hardware Gate
The 1Count5V has a HW gate, which can be controlled via the digital input on the 1Count5V.
You assign the hardware gate as the function of the digital input (Function DI "HW Gate"). It
is opened on a positive edge at the digital input and closed on a negative edge.
If no HW gate is assigned, counting becomes active immediately.
The STS_GATE checkback signal indicates whether counting is active.
When the HW gate is opened, this causes counting to continue starting from the current
count.

198

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.8 Fast mode

3.8.4

Synchronization

Introduction
In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "Synchronize on Positive Edge"
Function DI parameter.
,QWHUQDOFRXQWSXOVHV
XSRUGRZQ

'LJLWDO,QSXW
]HURPDUN

&RXQWYDOXH
6WDUWYDOXH

If you have assigned synchronization, the positive edge of a reference signal on the input
sets the 1Count5V to the start value.
The following conditions apply:
Fast mode must be active (HW gate).
When synchronization is activated, the first edge and each additional edge loads the
1Count5V with the start value.
The signal of a bounce-free switch or the zero mark of a rotary encoder can serve as the
reference signal.
The STS_DI feedback bit indicates the level of the reference signal.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

199

1Count5V
3.8 Fast mode

Synchronization with DI and Zero Mark

In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "HW enable for synchronization"
Function DI parameter.
,QWHUQDOFRXQWSXOVHV
XSRUGRZQ

'LJLWDOLQSXW',

=HURPDUN

&RXQWYDOXH
6WDUWYDOXH

If you have assigned synchronization with DI and zero mark, the DI serves as the HW
enable. When the HW enable is active, the 1Count5V is loaded with the load value by the
zero mark of the encoder.

200

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.8 Fast mode

3.8.5

Assignment of feedback interface for fast mode

Note
For the 1Count5V, the following data of the feedback interface are consistent:
Bytes 0 to 3
Use the access or addressing mode for data consistency over the entire control and
feedback interface on your master (only for configuration using the GSD file).

Assignment Tables
Address

Assignment

Name

Bytes 0 to 3

Bit 31

Sign of life

LZ

Bit 30

Isochronous mode applied

STS_TIC

Bit 29

Parameter Assignment Error

ERR_PARA

Bit 28

Group error
Encoder supply short circuit
Short circuit / wire break / encoder signal

EXTF

Bit 27

DI status

STS_DI

Bit 26

Status of direction up/down

STS_DIR

Bit 25

Status of (internal) gate

STS_GATE

Bits 0 to 24

Count value

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Feedback bit

Notes

LZ

The sign of life is toggled on each update of the feedback interface, i.e. the last sent value is inverted.

STS_TIC

Isochronous mode (if assigned) was applied.

ERR_PARA

The assigned module parameters are faulty.

EXTF

Group error
Possible causes:
Encoder supply short circuit
Short circuit or encoder signal wire break
EXTF is reset when the causes of the errors are eliminated.

STS_DI
STS_DIR

The bit displays the status of the digital input DI.

Status of direction;
for encoder value change from larger to smaller encoder positions (including zero crossover) "1 "
for encoder value change from larger to smaller encoder positions (including zero crossover) "0 "

STS_GATE

Status of (internal) gate: Counting

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

201

1Count5V
3.8 Fast mode

Access to the Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Configuring with STEP 7 using HW Config
Feedback interface

Load command, e.g. L PID

Error Detection in Fast Mode

The encoder supply short circuit and short circuit/encoder signal wire break faults are
detected by the 1Count5V and indicated in the feedback interface (EXTF).
The error display in the feedback interface is cleared as soon as this error is no longer
detected by the 1Count5V.
The parameter error bit (ERR_PARA) is acknowledged by means of a correct parameter
assignment.

202

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.8 Fast mode

3.8.6

Assigning parameters for fast mode

Introduction
You use the following to assign parameters for the 1Count5V:
STEP 7 Version 5.4 or higher; if necessary, the HSP (hardware support package) must
be downloaded from the Internet

Parameter List for Fast Mode

Parameter

Value Range

Default

Response to failure of the higher-level controller

Response to CPU/Master STOP

Stop operating mode

Stop operating mode

Continue operating mode

Basic parameters
Diagnostics A and B

Off/on

Off

Diagnostics N

Off/on

Off

Signal evaluation A, B

Rotary encoder
single/double/quadruple

Rotary encoder single

Direction input B

Normal/inverted

Normal

Fast mode

Fast mode

Fast mode

Gate function

Cancel counting/

Cancel counting

Mode

Interrupt counting
Input signal HW gate
Function DI

Normal/inverted

Normal

Input /

Input

HW gate/
Synchronization at positive edge/
HW enable for synchronization
Load value

-16777216 ... +16777215

Parameter assignment error

The "Input signal HW gate" parameter is set to inverted and the "Function DI" parameter
is not set to HW gate.

What to Do in the Event of Errors

Check the set value ranges.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

203

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

3.9

Position feedback

3.9.1

Overview

Description
This mode encompasses a subset of the functionality of the continuous counting mode. It is
intended for isochronous mode and differs from continuous counting by a smaller TDP
Modulemin and a TWA equal to zero. This TWA equal to zero makes it possible to operate the
module as an input module only. In this case, however, the possible controls are no longer
synchronized with To but rather are executed in the TDP cycle before or after Ti.
To run this mode, you have to assign parameters to the 1Count5V (see section "Assigning
Parameters for Position Feedback (Page 221)").

Maximum Count Range

The high counting limit is +2147483647 (231 1).
The low counting limit is 2147483648 (231).

Load value
You can specify a load value for the 1Count5V.
This load value is either applied directly as the new count value (LOAD_VAL) or it is applied
as the new count value when the following events occur (LOAD_PREPARE):
The counting operation is started by a SW gate or HW gate (if the counting operation is
continued, the load value is not applied).
Synchronization
Latch and retrigger

Gate Control
To control the 1Count5V, you have to use the gate functions.

RESET States of the Following Values after Parameter Assignment

Table 3- 21

204

RESET States
Value

RESET state

Load value

Count value

Latch value

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

Isochronous mode
In isochronous mode, the 1Count5V accepts control bits and control values from the control
interface in each bus cycle and reports back the response in this mode in the same cycle or
in the next cycle.
In each cycle, the 1Count5V transfers the count or latch value that was valid at time Ti and
the status bits valid at time Ti.
A count controlled by hardware input signals can only be transferred in the same cycle if the
input signal occurred before time Ti.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

205

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

3.9.2

Position detection

Definition
In this mode, the 1Count5V counts continuously starting from the load value:
If the 1Count5V reaches the high count limit when counting up, and another count pulse
then comes, it will jump to the low count limit and continue counting from there without
losing a pulse.
If the 1Count5V reaches the low count limit when counting down, and another count
pulse then comes, it will jump to the high count limit and continue counting from there
without losing a pulse.
The high counting limit is set at +2147483647 (231 1).
The low counting limit is set to 2147483648 (231).
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW

/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 3-35

*DWHVWRS

7LPH

Count Continuously with Gate Function

Function of the Digital Input

For the "Function DI" parameter, select one of the following functions for the digital input:
Input
HW gate (see section "Gate Functions for Position Detection (Page 207)")
Latch function (see section "Latch Function (Page 210)")
Synchronization (see section "Synchronization (Page 213)")
HW enable for synchronization (see section "Synchronization (Page 213)")

206

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

3.9.3

Gate Functions for Position Detection

Software Gate and Hardware Gate

The 1Count5V has two gates
A software gate (SW gate), which is controlled by the SW_GATE control bit.
The software gate can only be opened by a positive edge of the SW_GATE control bit. It
is closed when this bit is reset. Note the transfer times and run times of your control
program.
A hardware gate (HW gate), which is controlled by means of the digital input on the
1Count5V.
You assign the hardware gate as the function of the digital input (Function DI "HW Gate").
It is opened on a positive edge at the digital input and closed on a negative edge.

Internal Gate
The internal gate is the logical AND operation of the HW gate and SW gate. Counting is only
active when the HW gate and the SW gate are open. The STS_GATE feedback bit (internal
gate status) indicates this. If a HW gate has not been assigned, the setting of the SW gate is
decisive. Counting is activated, interrupted, continued, and canceled by means of the
internal gate.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

207

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

Canceling- and Interrupting-Type Gate Function

When assigning the gate function, you can specify whether the internal gate is to cancel or
interrupt counting. When counting is canceled, after the gate is closed and restarted,
counting starts again from the beginning. When counting is interrupted, after the gate is
closed and restarted, counting continues from the previous value.
The diagrams below indicate how the interrupting and canceling gate functions work:
&RXQWHUVWDWXV
+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW
/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 3-36

*DWHVWRS

*DWHVWDUW

7LPH

Position Detection, Up, Interrupting Gate Function

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

+LJKFRXQWLQJOLPLW
/RDGYDOXH
/RZFRXQWLQJOLPLW
*DWHVWDUW

Figure 3-37

208

*DWHVWRS

*DWHVWDUW

7LPH

Position Detection, Down, Interrupting Gate Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

Gate Control
Gate control by means of the SW gate only
When the gate is opened, one of the following occurs, depending on the parameter
assignment:
Counting continues from the current count, or
Counting starts from the load value
If the SW gate is opened in isochronous mode in bus cycle "n" by setting the SW_GATE
control bit, counting starts before or after Ti, depending on the position of Ti.
Gate control by means of the SW gate and HW gate
If the SW gate opens when the HW gate is already open, counting continues starting from
the current count.
When the HW gate is opened, one of the following occurs, depending on the parameter
assignment:
Counting continues from the current count
or
Counting starts from the load value
If the SW gate is opened in isochronous mode in bus cycle "n" by setting the SW_GATE
control bit, counting starts in cycle "n+1" before or after Ti, if the HW gate is already open at
this time. If the HW gate opens after the SW gate has been opened, then counting does not
start until the HW gate opens.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

209

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

3.9.4

Latch Function

Overview
There are two latch functions:
The Latch and Retrigger function
The Latch function

The Latch and Retrigger Function

In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "Latch and Retrigger on Positive
Edge" Function DI parameter.

&RXQWSXOVHV

6:B*$7(

',GLJLWDOLQSXW

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

/DWFKYDOXH

Figure 3-38

Latch and Retrigger with Load Value = 0

This function stores the current internal counter status of the 1Count5V and retriggers
counting when there is a positive edge on the digital input. This means that the current
internal counter status at the time of the positive edge is stored (latch value), and the
1Count5V is then loaded again with the load value, from which counting resumes.
The counting mode must be enabled with the SW gate before the function can be executed.
It is started with the first positive edge on the digital input.
The stored counter status rather than the current counter status is indicated in the feedback
interface. The STS_DI bit indicates the status of the latch and retrigger signal.
The latch value is preassigned with its RESET state (see corresponding table). It is not
changed when the SW gate is opened.
Direct loading of the counter does not cause the indicated stored counter status to be
changed.

210

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback
If you close the SW gate, it only interrupts counting; this means that when you open the SW
gate again, counting is continued. The digital input DI remains active even when the SW
gate is closed.
Counting is also latched and triggered in isochronous mode with each edge on the digital
input. The counter status that was valid at the time of the last edge before Ti is displayed in
the feedback interface.

The Latch function

In order to use this function, the Function DI parameter "Latch on Positive Edge" must be
selected for the digital input.

&RXQWSXOVHV

6:B*$7(

',GLJLWDOLQSXW

&RXQWHUVWDWXV

/DWFKYDOXH

Figure 3-39

Latch with a Load Value of 0

Counter status and latch value are preset with their RESET states (see corresponding table).
The counting function is started when the SW gate is opened. The 1Count5V begins at the
load value.
The latch value is always the exact counter status at the time of the positive edge on the
digital input DI.
The stored counter status rather than the current counter status is indicated in the feedback
interface. The STS_DI bit indicates the level of the latch signal.
Direct loading of the counter does not cause the indicated stored counter status to be
changed.
In isochronous mode, the counter status that was latched at the time of the last positive edge
before Ti is displayed in the feedback interface.
When you close the SW gate, the effect is either canceling or interrupting, depending on the
parameter assignment. The digital input DI remains active even when the SW gate is closed.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

211

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

Expanded Feedback Interface

If the 1Count5V is inserted behind an IM 151 that supports the reading and writing of broader
user data interfaces, the current count value can be read from bytes 8 to 11 of the feedback
interface.

212

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

3.9.5

Synchronization

Synchronization
In order to use this function, you must first select it with the "Synchronize on Positive Edge"
Function DI parameter.
,QWHUQDOFRXQWSXOVHV
XSRUGRZQ

'LJLWDOLQSXW
]HURPDUN

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
RQFHRQO\
(QDEOH
&57/B6<1

&RXQWYDOXH

/RDGYDOXH

6\QFKURQL]DWLRQ
SHULRGLF
(QDEOH
&57/B6<1

&RXQWYDOXH
/RDGYDOXH

Figure 3-40

Once-Only and Periodic Synchronization

If you have configured synchronization, the positive edge of a reference signal on the input
sets the 1Count5V to the load value.
You can select between once-only and periodic synchronization ("Synchronization"
parameter).

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

213

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback
The following conditions apply:
The counting mode must have been started with the SW gate.
The "Enable synchronization CTRL_SYN" control bit must be set.
Synchronize once only: If the enable bit is set, the first edge loads the 1Count5V with the
load value.
Synchronization periodically: If the enable bit is set, the first and every further edge loads
the 1Count5V with the load value.
After successful synchronization, the STS_SYN feedback bit is set. It must be reset by
the RES_STS control bit.
The signal of a bounce-free switch or the zero mark of a rotary encoder can serve as the
reference signal.
The STS_DI feedback bit indicates the level of the reference signal.
In isochronous mode, the set feedback bit STS_SYN indicates that the positive edge on the
digital input was between time Ti in the current cycle and Ti in the previous cycle.

214

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

3.9.6

Assignment of the Feedback and Control Interface for Position Feedback

Note
For the 1Count5V, the following data of the control and feedback interface are consistent:
Bytes 0 to 3
Bytes 4 to 7
Bytes 8 to 11 (modified user data interface)
Use the access or addressing mode for data consistency over the entire control and
feedback interface on your master (only for configuration using the GSD file).

Assignment Tables
Table 3- 22
Address

Feedback Interface (Inputs)

Assignment

Count value or stored count value in the case of the latch function on the digital
input
Byte 4
Bit 7:
Short circuit of the encoder supply
Bit 6:
Reserve = 0
Bit 5:
Parameter assignment error
Bit 4:
Reserve = 0
Bit 3:
Reserve = 0
Bit 2:
Resetting of status bits active
Bit 1:
Load function error
Bit 0:
Load function is running
Byte 5
Bit 7:
Down direction status
Bit 6:
Up direction status
Bit 5:
Reserve = 0
Bit 4:
Reserve = 0
Bit 3:
Reserve = 0
Bit 2:
Reserve = 0
Bit 1:
DI status
Bit 0:
Internal gate status
Byte 6
Bit 7:
Zero crossing
Bit 6:
Low counting limit
Bit 5:
High counting limit
Bit 4:
Reserve = 0
Bit 3:
Reserve = 0
Bit 2:
Reserve = 0
Bit 1:
Reserve = 0
Bit 0:
Synchronization status
Byte 7
Reserve = 0
Bytes 8 to 11
Count value 1
1 Modified user data interface

Designation

Bytes 0 to 3

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

ERR_24V
ERR_PARA

RES_STS_A
ERR_LOAD
STS_LOAD
STS_C_DN
STS_C_UP

STS_DI
STS_GATE
STS_ND
STS_UFLW
STS_OFLW

STS_SYN

215

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback
Table 3- 23
Address

Control Interface (Outputs)

Designation

Bytes 0 to 3
Byte 4

Load value direct, preparatory, comparison value 1 or 2

Bit 7:

Error diagnostics acknowledgment

Bit 6:

Reserve = 0

Bit 5:

Reserve = 0

Bit 4:

Reserve = 0

Bit 3:

Reserve = 0

RES_STS

Bit 2:

Start resetting of status bit

CTRL_SYN

Bit 1:

Enable synchronization

SW_GATE

Bit 0:

SW gate control bit

Bit 7:

Reserve = 0

Bit 6:

Reserve = 0

Bit 5:

Reserve = 0

Bit 4:

Reserve = 0

Bit 3:

Reserve = 0

EXTF_ACK

Byte 5

Bit 2:

Reserve = 0

LOAD_PREPARE

Bit 1:

Load counter preparatory

LOAD_VAL

Bit 0:

Load counter direct

Bytes 6 to 7
1

Assignment

Reserve = 0 1

Not used for modified user interface

Notes on the Control Bits

Table 3- 24

Notes on the Control Bits

Control bits

Notes

CTRL_SYN

You use this bit to enable synchronization.

EXTF_ACK

Error acknowledgment
The error bits must be acknowledged with the EXTF_ACK control bit after the cause is removed.

LOAD_PREPARE

Load counter preparatory

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is applied as the load value.

LOAD_VAL

The value from bytes 0 to 3 is loaded directly as the new count value.

RES_STS

Start resetting of status bit

The status bits are reset by means of the acknowledgment process between the RES_STS bit and
the RES_STS_A bit.

SW_GATE

SW gate control bit

The SW gate is opened/closed by means of the control interface with the SW_GATE bit.

216

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Table 3- 25

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Feedback Bits

Notes

ERR_24V

Short circuit of the encoder supply

The error bit must be acknowledged by the EXTF_ACK control bit.
Diagnostic message if assigned.

ERR_LOAD

Load function error

The LOAD_VAL, LOAD_PREPARE, CMP_VAL1, CMP_VAL2, and C_DOPARAM bits cannot be set
simultaneously during transfer. This results in setting the ERR_LOAD status bit, similar to loading an
incorrect value (which is not accepted).

ERR_PARA

Parameter assignment error ERR_PARA

RES_STS_A

Resetting of status bits active

STS_C_DN

Down direction status

STS_C_UP

Up direction status

STS_DI

DI status

STS_GATE

Internal gate status: Counting

STS_LOAD

Load function is running

STS_ND

Zero-crossing in the count range when counting without a main counting direction. The bit must be
reset by the RES_STS control bit.

STS_OFLW

High counting limit violated

STS_UFLW

Low counting limit violated

STS_SYN

Synchronization status

The status of the DI is indicated in all modes with the STS_DI bit in the feedback interface.

Both bits must be reset.

After successful synchronization, the STS_SYN bit is set. It must be reset by the RES_STS control
bit.

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Table 3- 26

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Configuring with STEP 7
using the GSD file 1)
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUS-DP\Additional
FIELD DEVICES\I/O\ET 200S)

Configuring with STEP 7

using HW Config
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUSDP\ET 200S)

Feedback interface

Read with SFC 14 "DPRD_DAT"

Load command (e.g. L PID)

Control interface

Write with SFC 15 "DPWR_DAT"

Transfer command (e.g. T PQD)

Load and transfer commands are also possible with CPU 3xxC, CPU 3xx with MMC, CPU 4xx (V3.0 and later), and
WinLC RTX (PC CPU).

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

217

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

Resetting of the Status Bits

STS_SYN, STS_OFLW, STS_UFLW, STS_ND
(YHQWVWLOOSHQGLQJRQUHVHW

)HHGEDFNVLJQDOV
2QHRIWKHVWDWXV
ELWV
&RQWUROELW
5(6B676

)HHGEDFNELW
5(6B676B$
W

5HVHWH[HFXWHG
5HTXHVWFDQFHOHG
&RXQW9H[HFXWHVWKHUHVHW
5HTXHVWUHVHW

Figure 3-41

Resetting of the Status Bits

Acceptance of Values with the Load Function

(UURUELW
(55B/2$'
&RQWUROELW
/2$'B9$/
/2$'B35(3$5(
&B'23$5$0
&B,177,0(

W

W

)HHGEDFNELW
676B/2$'
W
9DOXHDSSOLHG(QGRIWUDQVIHU
5HPRYDORIUHTXHVWDQGYDOXH
FRQWLQXHSURYLGLQJ
7KH&RXQW9KDVXQGHUVWRRGWKHUHTXHVW
5HTXHVWYDOXHWUDQVIHUDQGPDNHYDOXHDYDLODEOH

Figure 3-42

218

Accepting Values with the Load Function (LOAD_VAL; LOAD_PREPARE;

C_DOPARAM; C_INTTIME)

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

Note
Only one of the following control bits can be set at a particular time:
LOAD_VAL or LOAD_PREPARE.
Otherwise, the ERR_LOAD error is reported until all the specified control bits are deleted
again.
The ERR_LOAD error bit is only deleted when the following is carried out correctly.

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

In isochronous mode, 4 or 6 bus cycles are required to reset the status bits and to accept
values during the load function in this mode.
VW'3F\FOH

QG'3F\FOH

UG'3F\FOH

WK'3F\FOH

&RQWUROELW
LQXVHU
SURJUDP

6WDWXVELW
RIPRGXOH
7L
7'3

Figure 3-43

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

7L
7'3

Acknowledgment Principle in Isochronous Mode

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

219

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

Error Detection
The program errors must be acknowledged. They have been detected by the 1Count5V and
are indicated at the feedback interface. Channel-specific diagnostics are performed if you
have enabled group diagnostics in your configuration (see device manual of the interface
module used).
The parameter assignment error bit is acknowledged by means of correct parameter
assignment.
$QHUURUKDVRFFXUUHGWKH&RXQW9VHWVDQHUURUELWD
GLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHPD\DSSHDUHUURUGHWHFWLRQFRQWLQXHV

(UURUHOLPLQDWHGZKHQ(;7)B$&.LVVHWE\WKHXVHU
SURJUDPWKH&RXQW9GHOHWHVWKHHUURUELWDGLDJQRVWLF
PHVVDJHPD\DSSHDU

HJHUURUELW
(55B9

(UURUDFNQRZOHGJPHQW
(;7)B$&.

Figure 3-44

Error Acknowledgment

In the case of constant error acknowledgement (EXTF_ACK = 1) or in CPU/master STOP

mode, the 1Count5V reports the errors as soon as they are detected and clears the errors as
soon as they are eliminated.

220

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.9 Position feedback

3.9.7

Assigning Parameters for Position Feedback

Introduction
You can use either of the following to assign parameters for the 1Count5V:
STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 or later
A GSD file (http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/gsd)

Parameter list for Position Feedback

Table 3- 27

Parameter list for Position Feedback

Parameter

Value Range

Default

Disable/enable

Disable

Enable
Group diagnostics

Response to failure of the higher-level controller

Response to CPU/Master STOP

Turn off
Continue working mode

Turn off

Encoder parameters
Diagnostics A and B

Off/on

Off

Diagnostics N

Off/on

Off

Signal evaluation A, B

Rotary encoder single/double/quadruple

Rotary encoder single

Direction input B

Normal/inverted

Normal

Position feedback

Position detection

Position detection

Gate function

Cancel counting/
Interrupt counting

Cancel counting

Input signal HW gate

Normal/inverted

Normal

Function DI

Input /
HW gate /
Latch and retrigger at positive edge /
Synchronization at positive edge /
HW enable for synchronization /
Latch at positive edge

Input

Synchronization 1

Once only/Periodic

Once-only

Mode

Only relevant if Function DI = Synchronization at positive edge

Parameter assignment error

The "Input signal HW gate" parameter is set to inverted and the "Function DI" parameter
is not set to HW gate.

What to Do in the Event of Errors

Check the set value ranges.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

221

1Count5V
3.10 Evaluation of count and direction signal

3.10

Evaluation of count and direction signal

Signal Evaluation A, B
Signal evaluation by means of A, B allows you to count directionally. Different evaluation
modes are possible depending on the parameter assignment:

Rotary Encoder
The 1Count5V can count the edges of the signals. Normally, only the edges at A are
evaluated (single evaluation). To obtain a higher resolution, when assigning parameters
("Signal Evaluation" parameter), you can select whether the signals are to be subjected to
single, double, or quadruple evaluation.
Multiple evaluation is only possible with asymmetric incremental encoders with A and B
signals that are 90 degrees out of phase.

Single Evaluation
Single evaluation means that only one edge of A is evaluated; up count pulses are recorded
at a positive edge at A and low level at B, and down count pulses are recorded at a negative
edge at A and low level at B.
The diagram below illustrates the single evaluation of the signals.

6LJQDO$
6LJQDO%
8SFRXQWSXOVHV
'RZQFRXQWSXOVHV
8S

Figure 3-45

222

'RZQ

Single Evaluation

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.10 Evaluation of count and direction signal

Double Evaluation
Double evaluation means that the positive and negative edge of the A signal are evaluated.
Whether up or down count pulses are generated depends on the level of the B signal.
The diagram below illustrates the double evaluation of the signals.

6LJQDO$
6LJQDO%
8SFRXQWSXOVHV
'RZQFRXQWSXOVHV
XS

Figure 3-46

GRZQ

Double Evaluation

Quadruple Evaluation
Quadruple evaluation means that the positive and negative edges of the A and B signals are
evaluated. Whether up or down count pulses are generated depends on the levels of the A
and B signals.
The diagram below illustrates the quadruple evaluation of the signals.

6LJQDO$
6LJQDO%
8SFRXQWSXOVHV
'RZQFRXQWSXOVHV
XS

Figure 3-47

GRZQ

Quadruple Evaluation

Note
A counting frequency of 500 KHz refers to the maximum frequency of the A and B signals.
With double evaluation, a maximum frequency of 1 MHz is produced for the counting pulses;
with quadruple evaluation, the maximum frequency is 2 MHz.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

223

1Count5V
3.11 Diagnostics

3.11

Diagnostics

3.11.1

Diagnostics using the LED display

LED display on the 1Count5V

6)

83

6<1

'1





Group error (red)

Status display for the digital output (green)
Status display for digital input (green)
Status display for synchronization (green)
Status display for counting direction (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1Count5V

The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1Count5V.
Event (LEDs)
SF

UP

DN

SYN

Cause
13

16

On

No parameter assignment. There is a

diagnostic message.
On

Check the parameter

assignment. Evaluate the
diagnostics data.

Status of the low-order bits of the counter,

if the counter counts up.
On

Status of the inverse low-order bits of the

counter, if the counter counts down.
On

Synchronization is performed (only in

counting modes; image of STS_SYN
acknowledgement bit).
On

DO 1 is activated.
On

DO 2 is activated.
On

224

Remedy

DI is activated.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.11 Diagnostics

3.11.2

Error types
For information on the structure of the channel-related diagnostics, refer to the manual on
the interface module used in your ET 200S station.

1Count5V error types

The following table shows the error types on the 1Count5V.
Error class

Meaning

Remedy

1D

00001: Short circuit

Short circuit of the sensor supply or the

actuator.

Check the wiring to the sensor. Correct

the process wiring.

5D

00101: Overtemperature

The digital output is overloaded.

Correct the process wiring.

6D

00110: Wire break

Line to the actuator is interrupted.

Correct the process wiring.

9D

01001: Error

Internal module error occurred.

Replace the module.

16D

10000: Parameter assignment

error

Parameters have not been assigned to

the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

26D

11010: External error

Wire break/short circuit of the 5 V

sensor signals:
A, /A, B, /B, N, /N,

Correct the parameter assignment.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

225

1Count5V
3.12 Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP

3.12

Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP

Setting the response to CPU/master STOP

You can configure the reaction of the 1Count5V to failure of the higher-level controller.
Parameters

Status of the 1Count5V at CPU/master

STOP

What Happens if
New Parameters Have Been Assigned?

Turn off DO

The current mode is terminated, the gate

closed, and the digital output blocked;
comparison values 1 and 2 and the load
value are reset; the high and low limit
values, function and behavior of the digital
outputs and the integration time are handled
in accordance with the parameter
assignments.

The changed parameters are accepted and

take effect.

Continue working mode1

The current mode continues, and the gate

and digital output retain their status.

The gate is closed, the current mode is

terminated, the digital output is blocked, and
the changed parameters are accepted and
take effect.

DO substitute a value

The current mode is canceled, the gate

closed, and the digital output blocked;
comparison values 1 and 2 and the load
value are reset; the high and low limit
values, function and behavior of the digital
outputs and the integration time are handled
in accordance with the parameter
assignments.

The changed parameters are accepted and

take effect.

When a pulse is output when the

comparison value is reached, the substitute
value is 1 only for the duration of the pulse.
DO keep last value

The current mode is canceled, the gate

closed, and the digital output blocked;
comparison values 1 and 2 and the load
value are reset; the high and low limit
values, function and behavior of the digital
outputs and the integration time are handled
in accordance with the parameter
assignments.

The changed parameters are accepted and

take effect.

If the mode is to continue during a change from CPU-/Master-STOP to RUN (startup), the CPU/Master must not clear the
outputs.
Possible solution: In the part of the user program that is executed during startup, set the SW gate control bit and transfer
the values to the 1Count5V.

Leaving the Assigned State

Under what conditions does the 1Count5V leave the assigned state?
The CPU or master must be in RUN mode, and you have to make a change at the control
interface.

226

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.12 Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP

Automatic New Parameter Assignment

A new parameter assignment of the ET 200S station is made by your CPU/ DP master:
Upon power on of the CPU/DP master
Upon power on of the IM 151/IM 151 FO
After failure of the DP transmission
After loading a modified parameter assignment or configuration of the ET 200S station to
the CPU/DP master
When the 1Count5V is plugged
Upon power on or inserting of the appropriate power module

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

227

1Count5V
3.13 Technical Specifications

3.13

Technical Specifications

Technical specifications
General technical specifications of the 1Count5V
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

308152

Weight

Approx. 65 g

Data for Specific Modules

Number of Channels

Counter range

32 bits

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated load voltage L+
Reverse polarity protection

24 VDC
Yes

Galvanic isolation
Between backplane bus and counter function
Between counter function and load voltage

Yes

Encoder supply
Output voltage
Output current

L+ (-0.8 V)

Current consumption
From the backplane bus
From load voltage L+ (no load)

max. 10 mA

Power dissipation

Typ. 2 W

No

Max. 500 mA (Total current at terminals 2, 11

and 15), short circuit proof

45 mA, typical

Data for the Digital Input

Galvanic isolation
Input voltage
Rated value
0 signal
1 signal

228

No, only from shield and backplane bus

24 VDC
-30 V to 5 V
11 V to 30 V

Input current
0 signal
1 signal

2 mA (quiescent current)

Minimum pulse width

2.5 s

Connection of a two-wire BERO type 2

Possible

Input characteristic

In accordance with IEC 1131, Part 2, Type 2

Shielded cable length

50 m, maximum

9 mA (typically)

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1Count5V
3.13 Technical Specifications
General technical specifications of the 1Count5V
Encoder Signals
Level

In accordance with RS 422

Terminating resistance

330

Differential input voltage

1 V, minimum

Maximum counting frequency

500 kHz

Galvanic isolation from ET200S bus

Yes

Shielded cable length

50 m, maximum

Data for the Digital Outputs

Output voltage
Rated value
0 signal
1 signal
Output current
0 signal (residual current)
1 signal
Permitted range
Rated value
Switching frequency
Resistive load
Inductive load
Lamp load

24 VDC
3V
L+ (-1V)
0.5 mA
5 mA to 2.4 A
2A
100 Hz
2 Hz
10 Hz

Lamp load

10 W

Output delay (resistive load)

100 s

Short circuit protection for output

Yes

Response threshold

2.6 A to 4 A

Inductive extinction

Yes; L+ -(50 to 60 V)

Digital input control

Yes

Cable lengths
Unshielded
Shielded

600 m
1000 m

Status, Diagnostics
Digital input DI status display

LED 16 (green)

Digital output DO1 status display

LED 9 (green)

Digital output DO2 status display

LED 13 (green)

Up count value change

UP LED (green)

Down count value change

DN LED (green)

Synchronization

SYN LED (green)

Fault indicator

SF LED (red)

Diagnostic information

Yes

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

229

1Count5V
3.13 Technical Specifications
General technical specifications of the 1Count5V
Measuring Ranges in the Measuring Modes
Maximum measuring range
Frequency measurement
Rotational Speed Measurement
Period measurement

0.1 Hz to 500 kHz

1/min ... 25000 /min
10 s ... 120 s

Response Times
Update rate of the counting modes
Non-isochronous mode
Isochronous mode

1 ms
TDP

Isochronous Times of the Module

in counting modes
TCI

380 s

TCO

320 s

ToiMin

55 s

TDPMin

900 s

in measuring modes
TCI

465 s

TCO

280 s

ToiMin

50 s

TDPMin

995 s

in position feedback

230

TCI

370 s

TCO

0 s

ToiMin

0 s

TDPMin

815 s

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.1
Order Number

Compatibility

Features

Product Overview
6ES7 138-4DB03-0AB0

The 1SSI with order number 6ES7 138-DB03-0AB0 replaces the 1SSI with the following
order numbers:
6ES7 138-4DB02-0AB0
6ES7 138-4DB01-0AB0
6ES7 138-4DB00-0AB0
and is fully compatible.

The 1SSI is an interface between an absolute encoder (SSI) and the higher-level
controller. You edit the cyclically recorded encoder value in your controller program.
Can be operated using terminal modules TM-E15S24-01 and TM-E15S26-A1
Isochronous mode
Normalization of the encoder value (that is, discounting of adjusted, irrelevant bits in the
encoder value).
Reversal of the direction of rotation to adjust the direction of movement of the absolute
encoder to the axis.
Latch function for freezing the current encoder value (only possible in standard mode).
Comparison function between the current encoder value and loadable comparison values
(only possible in standard mode).
Type of encoder value recording can be selected:
Free-wheeling
Synchronous to the update rate
Isochronously
Fast mode can be selected; with rapid encoder value detection and compressed
functionality (cannot be used with the IM 151 with the order number 6ES7 151-1AA000AB0).
Maximum encoder sampling rate (e.g., for ultrasonic encoders) is taken into account in
isochronous mode
Sign of life in isochronous mode
Parity check of encoder value can be performed
Gray/dual converter

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

231

1SSI
4.1 Product Overview

Supported Encoder Types

The following encoder types are supported:
Absolute encoder (SSI) with 13 bits
To
Absolute encoder (SSI) with 25 bits
Note
The predecessor modules only support absolute encoders (SSI) that have widths of
13 bits, 21 bits and 25 bits.

Firmware update 1
To add functions and for troubleshooting, you can load firmware updates to the operating
system memory of the 1SSI using STEP 7 HW Config.
Note
When you start the firmware update, the old firmware is deleted. If the firmware update is
interrupted or canceled for any reason, the 1SSI will no longer function correctly as a result.
Restart the firmware update and wait until it has completed successfully.

Identification Data 1
Hardware release status
Serial number
See also ET 200S Distributed I/O operating instructions
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348), "Identification data" section.
The function is only available if the used interface module supports the required system
services.

Configuration
You can use either of the following to configure the 1SSI:
STEP 7 V5.4 SP2 and later, or with the HSP (hardware support package, available
online) STEP 7 V5.3 SP2 and later.
A GSD file (http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/gsd)

232

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.2 Isochronous Mode

4.2

Isochronous Mode
Note
For basic information on isochronous mode, refer to the Isochronous mode
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045) function manual.

Hardware Requirements
You will require the following for the 1SS in isochronous mode:
A CPU that supports isochronous mode
PROFIBUS master or PROFINET controller that supports the constant bus cycle time
An IM 151 that supports isochronous mode

Features
Depending on the system parameter assignment, the 1SSI works in either non-isochronous
or isochronous mode.
In isochronous mode, the data communication between the master and 1SSI is isochronous
to the bus cycle.
In isochronous mode, all bytes of the feedback interface are consistent.
If isochronous mode fails, the feedback interface is not updated. In the user program, this
can be detected with the sign of life in the feedback interface.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

233

1SSI
4.3 Example: Starting 1SSI

4.3

Example: Starting 1SSI

Introduction
These instructions provide an example to guide you to a functioning application that will
enable you to become familiar and check the basic hardware and software functions of the
1SSI. For this example, you will operate the 1SSI in standard mode, rather than isochronous
mode.

Requirements
The following requirements must be satisfied:
You must have put an ET 200S station on an S7 station with a DP master into operation.
You must have the following:
A TM-E15S24-01 terminal module
An 1SSI
An SSI encoder and the necessary wiring material

Installation, Wiring and Fitting

1. Install and wire the TM-E15S24-01 terminal module (see Figure).
2. Plug the 1SSI into the terminal module. Detailed instructions are provided in the ET 200S
Distributed I/O Device (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348)
operating instructions.
66,

70(6DQG(066,

6)

83

'1


&03
(6
'%$%

'



9'& 

 9'&

0



 ',

&



 &

Figure 4-1

234

 '

'

7ZLVWHGSDLUFDEOHV

'

9'&
66,

0

&

&

7ZLVWHGSDLUFDEOHV

Terminal Assignment for the Example

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.3 Example: Starting 1SSI

Configuring with STEP 7 using HW Config

You must first adapt the hardware configuration of your existing ET 200S station.
1. Open the relevant project in SIMATIC Manager.
2. Open the HW Config configuration table in your project.
3. From the hardware catalog, select the 1SSI entry with the number 6ES7 138-4DB030AB0 in the infotext. Drag the entry to the slot at which you have installed your 1SSI.
4. Double-click this number to open the "Properties - DP Slave" dialog box.
On the "Addresses" tab, you will find the addresses of the slot to which you have dragged
the 1SSI. Make a note of these addresses for subsequent programming.
On the "Parameters" tab, you will find the default settings for the 1SSI. Select the encoder
type in accordance with the connected SSI encoder and enter all the required data. You
will find the encoder data on the type label and in the technical specifications of the
encoder.
5. Save and compile your configuration, and download the configuration in STOP mode of
the CPU by choosing "PLC > Download to Module".

Creating a Block and Integrating It into the Controller Program

Create block FC 101 and integrate it in your control program (in OB 1, for example). This
block requires the DB1 data block with a length of 16 bytes. The start address of the module
in the following example is 256.
STL

Description

Block: FC101
Network 1: Presettings
L

DB1.DBD0

DB1.DBD4

//Delete control bits

Network 2: Write to the control interface

L

DB1.DBD0

//Write 8 bytes to the 1SSI

PAD 256

//Configured start address of the outputs

DB1.DBD4

PAD 260

Network 3: Read from the feedback interface

//Read 8 bytes from the 1SSI
L

PED 256

DB1.DBD8

PED 260

DB1.DBD12

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

//Configured start address of the inputs

235

1SSI
4.3 Example: Starting 1SSI

Testing
Use Monitor/Modify Variables to monitor the encoder value and the direction indicator.
1. Select the "Block" folder in your project. Choose the "Insert > S7 Block > Variable Table"
menu command to insert the VAT 1 variable table, and then confirm with OK.
2. Open the VAT 1 variable table, and enter the following variables in the "Address" column:
DB1.DBD8 (encoder value)
DB1.DBX12.0 (UP status)
DB1.DBX12.1 (DN status)
3. Choose "PLC > Connect To > Configured CPU" to switch to online.
4. Choose "Variable > Monitor" to switch to monitoring.
5. Switch the CPU to RUN mode.
6. Change the position of the SSI encoder.

Result
You can now see that:
The UP LED or the DN LED on the 1SSI is on, depending on the direction in which you
change the position of the SSI encoder.
The encoder value in the block changes.

236

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.4 Terminal Assignment Diagram

4.4

Terminal Assignment Diagram

Wiring Rules
The cables (terminals 1 and 5 and terminals 4 and 8) must be shielded, twisted-pair cables.
The shield must be supported at both ends. To do this, use the shield contact (see the ET
200S Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348)
operating instructions).

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

237

1SSI
4.4 Terminal Assignment Diagram

Terminal Assignment
You will find the terminal assignment for the 1SSI in the table below.
Table 4- 1

Terminal Assignment of the 1SSI

View

Terminal Assignment

Remarks
Terminals 1 to 8:
1/5: Data from the SSI encoder 1

83

'1

&03

70(6DQG(066,

3: Chassis ground

(6
'%$%

'

 9'&

0 

 ',

&

 &

83

'1

&03

2QHSDLUWZLVWHG
SDLUFDEOHV

'

'

 '

9'& 

9'& 
0

&

2QHSDLUWZLVWHG
SDLUFDEOHV

&

70(6$DQG(066,

'

 9'&
 ',


$
$8; 

 &
$
 $8;

$
$8; 

$
 $8;

&

4/8: SSI clock (clock wire) 1

66,

2QHSDLUWZLVWHG
SDLUFDEOHV

'


7: Digital input latch function

9'&

(6
'%$%

'

2/6: Power supply for absolute encoder

and switch 2

'
9'&
66,

&

&

2QHSDLUWZLVWHG
SDLUFDEOHV

1 It is essential that you maintain the correct polarity when wiring the encoder. If you do not, an absolute encoder error is
reported. Signals according to RS422
2

Short circuit-proof, maximum 0.5 A.

238

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.5 Configuring standard mode and fast mode

4.5

Configuring standard mode and fast mode

Introduction
In order to take full advantage of the functionality of the 1SSI for the application in question,
choose between fast mode and standard mode, depending on your automation task.
Areas of Application

Mode
Fast

Closed-loop control applications such as position controls with path position as

actual value
Fast encoder value detection

Monitoring or detecting of position points

Length measurement, edge detection, synchronization with workpieces

Standard

Configuring Standard Mode and Fast Mode

Standard Mode

Fast Mode

Parameters are assigned to the various modes. You will find the parameter lists in the descriptions of
the modes.
You can integrate the 1SSI in your project in two different ways. Decide whether you want to work
with the GSD file or with STEP 7 using HW Config .

Configuring 1SSI with STEP 7 using HW Config

(in isochronous and non-isochronous mode)
Select an entry from the hardware catalog that corresponds
to the functionality you want.
For standard mode, select the 1SSI entry with the For fast mode, select the 1SSI fast mode entry
number
with the number
6ES7 138-4DB03-0AB0 in the infotext.
6ES7 138-4DB03-0AB0 Fast in the infotext.
Drag the entry to the slot at which you have installed your 1SSI.
Select the parameters.

Configuring 1SSI with the GSD file

(only in non-isochronous mode)
Select an entry in the GSD file that corresponds to the functionality
you want.
Select 6ES7 138-4DB03-0AB0 1SSI for standard
mode.

Select 6ES7 138-4DB03-0AB0 1SSI Fast

for fast mode.

Select the parameters.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

239

1SSI
4.6 Functions of the 1SSI

4.6

Functions of the 1SSI

4.6.1

Overview of 1SSI functions

Operating Principle
The 1SSI records the signals of the connected position encoder cyclically and forwards
them, depending on the parameter assignment, to the feedback interface by means of the
following functions:
Encoder value detection
Gray/binary converter
Normalization
Direction reversal
Comparator (only in standard mode)
Latch function (only in standard mode)
Error detection
Sign of life
The 1SSI uses the "ready for operation" feedback bit to indicate that the functions are
executable and the displayed encoder value is valid.

240

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.6 Functions of the 1SSI

4.6.2

Encoder Value Detection

Description

The absolute encoder transfers its encoder values in message frames to the 1SSI. The
transmission of message frames is initiated by the 1SSI. The following alternatives are
available for encoder value detection:
Free-wheeling encoder value detection
Synchronous encoder value detection
Isochronous encoder value detection
You can set free-wheeling or synchronous encoder value detection in HW Config with the
"Detection" parameter. This parameter only works in non-isochronous mode.
The detection of the encoder value will be isochronous when the 1SSI is in isochronous
mode. In this case, the "Detection" parameter is not evaluated.
The following table shows these connections:

Table 4- 2

Encoder Value Detection

Mode

"Detection" Parameter

Encoder value detection

Non-isochronous mode

Free-wheeling

Free-wheeling encoder value detection

Synchronous

Synchronous encoder value detection

- (irrelevant)

Isochronous encoder value detection

Isochronous mode

Free-Wheeling Encoder Value Detection

With free-wheeling encoder value detection, you obtain maximum accuracy with the latch
function.
The 1SSI initiates the transmission of a message frame each time the assigned monoflop
time elapses.
The 1SSI processes the detected encoder value asynchronously to these free-wheeling
message frames in the cycle of the update rate.
This results in encoder values of various ages with the free-wheeling detection of encoder
values. The difference between maximum and minimum age is the jitter.

Synchronous Encoder Value Detection

With synchronous encoder value detection, you obtain maximum accuracy with encoder
value detection.
The 1SSI initiates the transmission of a message frame in the cycle of its update rate.
The 1SSI processes the transmitted encoder value synchronously to its update rate.

Isochronous Encoder Value Detection

Isochronous encoder value detection is carried out automatically when the equidistant bus
cycle is activated in the DP master system and the DP slave is synchronized to the bus
cycle.
The 1SSI initiates the transmission of a message frame in every bus cycle at time Ti, as long
as the configured maximum encoder sampling rate does not result in a reduction.
The 1SSI processes the transmitted encoder value isochronously to the bus cycle.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

241

1SSI
4.6 Functions of the 1SSI

4.6.3

Gray/Binary Converter

Description
When Gray is set, the encoder value supplied by the absolute encoder in gray code is
converted to binary code. When Binary is set, the supplied encoder value is not converted.
NOTICE
If you selected the Gray setting, the 1SSI always converts the total encoder value (13 to 25
bits). Preceding special bits thus influence the encoder value and trailing bits can under
some circumstances be corrupted.

4.6.4

Transmitted Encoder Value and Standardization

Description
The transmitted encoder value contains the encoder position of the absolute value encoder.
Depending on the encoder that is used, other bits that are located before and after the
encoder position are transmitted in addition to the encoder position.
So that the 1SSI can determine the encoder position, specify the following:
Encoder type
Number of trailing bits
Total steps of the absolute encoder
With normalization, you specify the representation of the encoder value in the feedback
interface.
With "Normalization On", you specify that trailing, irrelevant bits in the encoder value are
to be discounted (see the following example).
With "Normalization Off", you specify that trailing bits are retained and are available for
evaluation.

242

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.6 Functions of the 1SSI

Normalization Example
Presettings:
You use a single-turn encoder with 29 (corresponds to 9 bits) = 512 steps/revolution
(resolution/360) with the following parameter assignment:
Encoder type: SSI-13 bit
Number of trailing bits: 4 places
Total steps of the absolute encoder: 512
:LWKRXWQRUPDOL]DWLRQ&\FOLFDOO\UHFRUGHGHQFRGHUSRVLWLRQ


'DWDGRXEOHZRUG







                            ; ; ; ;
5HOHYDQWELWV
7UDQVIHUUHGELWV
2IWKHELWVWUDQVIHUUHGELWVWRDUHUHTXLUHGIRUHYDOXDWLRQ

$IWHUQRUPDOL]DWLRQHQFRGHUSRVLWLRQ




'DWDGRXEOHZRUG

                               
5HOHYDQWELWV
%LWVWRLQGLFDWHGDERYHE\[DUHGLVFRXQWHG

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

243

1SSI
4.6 Functions of the 1SSI

4.6.5

Detection of Direction and Reversal of the Direction of Rotation

Direction Detection
The 1SSI needs the following information to detect the direction of movement of the encoder
correctly:
Encoder type
Total steps of the absolute encoder
Number of trailing bits
The information is used as explained in the normalization example.
The direction of movement that is determined is displayed in the feedback interface and at
the LEDs.
UP LED: encoder position change from lower to higher value
DN LED: encoder position change from higher to lower value

Direction Reversal
The direction reversal adjusts the direction of movement of the encoder to that of the axis.
Two settings are possible:
Off
The direction of the transmitted encoder position is maintained.
On
The direction of the transmitted encoder position is reversed. This means that although
the encoder sends ascending values, descending values are displayed.
This reversal applies to the total steps of the absolute encoder, as indicated in the
parameter assignment.

Example of Direction Reversal

Presettings:
You use a single-turn encoder with 210 (corresponds to 10 bits) = 1024 steps/revolution
(resolution/360) with the following parameter assignment:
Encoder type: SSI-13 bit
Number of trailing bits: 3 places
Direction reversal: On
Total steps of the absolute encoder: 1024
Encoder value before direction reversal: cyclically recorded encoder position 1023
Encoder value after direction reversal: displayed encoder position 0

244

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.6 Functions of the 1SSI

4.6.6

Comparator (Only in Standard Mode)

Description
The encoder position that is detected can be compared with up to two loadable values
(without hysteresis). Both comparison results are stored in the feedback interface. The
appropriate comparator becomes active only after the comparison value is loaded.
You set the two comparators in the Comparator 1 and Comparator 2 parameters:
Setting

Effect on the Result of Comparison (CMPx)

Not active

The encoder value is not compared.

The feedback bit CMPx = 0.

In the up direction

The encoder value is compared in the up direction (UP).

If the encoder value the comparison value, the feedback bit CMPx = 1.
If the encoder value < the comparison value, the feedback bit CMPx = 0.
If the direction is down, the feedback bit CMPx remains unchanged.
If no change is detected in the encoder value, the feedback bit CMPx remains
unchanged.

In the down direction

The encoder value is compared in the down direction (DN).

If the encoder value the comparison value, the feedback bit CMPx = 1.
If the encoder value > the comparison value, the feedback bit CMPx = 0.
If the direction is up, the feedback bit CMPx remains unchanged.
If no change is detected in the encoder value, the feedback bit CMPx remains
unchanged.

In both directions

The encoder value is compared in both directions.

If the direction is up, the following conditions apply:
If the encoder value the comparison value, the feedback bit CMPx = 1.
If the encoder value < the comparison value, the feedback bit CMPx = 0.
If the direction is down, the following conditions apply:
If the encoder value the comparison value, the feedback bit CMPx = 1.
If the encoder value > the comparison value, the feedback bit CMPx = 0.
If no change is detected in the encoder value, the feedback bit CMPx remains
unchanged.

As soon as you load a comparison value, the comparison result is deleted and is then
entered in accordance with the directional setting.
Note
Only one control bit can be set at a particular time:
CMP_VAL1 or CMP_VAL2.
Otherwise, the ERR_LOAD error is reported until both control bits are deleted.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

245

1SSI
4.6 Functions of the 1SSI

Loading the Comparison Value

&RQWUROELW
&03B9$/
&03B9$/

)HHGEDFNELW
676B/2$'

66,9DOXHDFFHSWHGHQGRIWUDQVIHU
SRVVLEO\ZLWKDQHUURU

8VHU5HPRYHUHTXHVWDQGNHHSYDOXHDYDLODEOH

66,5HTXHVWXQGHUVWRRG

8VHU5HTXHVWYDOXHWUDQVIHUDQGPDNHYDOXHDYDLODEOH

Figure 4-2

Value Transfer

Comparator in Isochronous Mode

In isochronous mode, the comparison values are loaded at time To and are effective as of
time Ti in the same bus cycle.

246

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.6 Functions of the 1SSI

4.6.7

Latch Function (Only in Standard Mode)

Description
You use the latch function to freeze the current encoder value of the 1SSI at an edge at the
digital input (DI).
The encoder value can thus be evaluated on an event-dependent basis.
A frozen encoder value is identified by the set bit 31 and is preserved until the termination of
the latch function.
The frozen encoder value is entered at the feedback interface at the position of the cyclically
recorded value and assigned the identifier "Bit 31 set."
Note
Direction determination, comparison, and error monitoring also take place when the encoder
value is frozen.

Prerequisites for Using the Latch Function

You must have specified which edge (rising and/or falling) at the digital input freezes the
encoder value.
You specify that the latch function that is coupled to the digital input is switched on.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

247

1SSI
4.6 Functions of the 1SSI

Terminating the Latch Function

The latch function must be acknowledged. When the controller program acknowledges the
acceptance of the encoder value, bit 31 is deleted and the encoder value is updated again.
Freezing is then possible again.
66,ODWFKIXQFWLRQLVDFWLYHHQFRGHUYDOXH
LVIUR]HQELW ZDLWIRU
/$7&+B$&.
8VHU/$7&+PXVWEH
DFNQRZOHGJHGZLWK/$7&+B$&. 

66,/DWFKIXQFWLRQLVWHUPLQDWHG
HQFRGHUYDOXHLVFXUUHQW

8VHU/$7&+B$&.PXVWEHFOHDUHG
IUHH]LQJLVSRVVLEOHDJDLQDVVRRQDV
66,GHWHFWV/$7&+B$&. 

%LWVHW
LQHQFRGHUYDOXH

/$7&+B$&.

',

Figure 4-3

248

Latch Function

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.6 Functions of the 1SSI

4.6.8

Error Detection in Standard Mode

Description
The absolute value encoder and sensor supply short circuit errors must be acknowledged.
They have been detected by the 1SSl and are indicated at the feedback interface. Channelspecific diagnostics are performed if you have enabled group diagnostics in your
configuration (see device manual of the interface module used).
The parameter assignment error bit is acknowledged by means of correct parameter
assignment.
$QHUURURFFXUVWKH66,VHWVDQHUURUELWD
GLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHPD\DSSHDUHUURUGHWHFWLRQ
FRQWLQXHVWREHDFWLYH
(UURUHOLPLQDWHGLI(;7)B$&.LVVHWE\WKHXVHUSURJUDP
WKH66,FOHDUVWKHHUURUELWDGLDJQRVWLFPHVVDJHPD\
DSSHDU

)RUH[DPSOH
HUURUELW
(55B66,

(UURUDFNQRZOHGJPHQW
(;7)B$&.

Figure 4-4

Error Acknowledgment

In the case of constant error acknowledgement (EXTF_ACK = 1) or in CPU/master STOP

mode, the 1SSI reports the errors as soon as they are detected and clears the errors as
soon as they are eliminated.

4.6.9

Error Detection in Fast Mode

Description
The absolute value encoder and sensor supply short circuit errors have been detected by the
1SSl and are indicated at the feedback interface. Channel-specific diagnostics are performed
if you have enabled group diagnostics in your configuration (see device manual of the
interface module used).
The parameter assignment error bit is acknowledged by means of correct parameter
assignment.
As soon as the absolute value encoder and sensor supply short circuit errors are no longer
detected by the 1SSl, the error display at the feedback interface is cleared, and in certain
cases the channel-specific diagnosis reports an error-free condition.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

249

1SSI
4.7 Behavior at CPU/master STOP

4.7

Behavior at CPU/master STOP

Description
The 1SSI detects the CPU/master STOP. The reaction to this is to stop the active operation.

Exiting the CPU/master STOP status

Without reassigning the parameters of the ET 200
station

The feedback interface of the 1SSI remains current.

With reassignment of the parameters of the ET 200

station

You must reload the comparison values.

The latch function has to be triggered with a new edge on
the digital input DI.

Reassigning Parameters of the ET 200S Station

Reconfiguration of the ET 200S station is carried out by your CPU/master at:
POWER ON of the CPU/master
Upon power on of the IM 151
After failure of the bus transmission
Upon loading changed parameters or configuration of the ET 200S station to the
CPU/master

250

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.8 Setting parameters for the 1SSI

4.8

Setting parameters for the 1SSI

Overview
You set the parameters for the 1SSI by means of the GSD file for the ET 200S or using the
STEP 7 parameter assignment software. It is not possible to reassign the parameters by
means of the user program.
Depending on the mode that you selected, either of the following parameter sets from your
parameter assignment appear in the parameter assignment software:
All parameters (standard mode), or
A portion of the parameters (fast mode)
You can enter the following parameters (the default appears in bold):
Parameters

Value Range

Note

Group diagnostics

Disable/enable

Enabling parameter

Detection

Free-wheeling/synchronous

This parameter is irrelevant in isochronous mode and

is not evaluated.

Encoder type 1

No encoder/ SSI 13-bit / ... / SSI 25-bit

No encoder: The encoder input is switched off.

Gray/binary converter

Gray/binary

Code supplied by the encoder

Transmission rate 1 3

125 kHz / 250 kHz /

Note that the transmission rate affects the accuracy

and up-to-dateness of the encoder values.

Monoflop time 1 2 3

16 s / 32 s / 48 s / 64 s

Parity

None, odd, even

500 kHz / 1 MHz / 1.5 MHz / 2 MHz

The specification of the monoflop time is relevant for

free-wheeling encoder value detection.
See the vendor's technical specifications.
An assigned parity bit is included in the "Encoder
Type" parameter. If a 25-bit encoder is assigned parity,
then 26 bits are read from the encoder.
The bit following the LSB (least significant bit) is
evaluated as a parity bit. A parity error is reported by
means of the following feedback interfaces:
EXTF in fast mode
ERR_SSI in standard mode

Normalization

Off/on

Number of trailing bits

0 to 15

The number of trailing bits must be specified.

Direction reversal

Off/on

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

251

1SSI
4.8 Setting parameters for the 1SSI
Parameters

Value Range

Total steps of the

absolute encoder 1

Encoder type 13 bits: 16 to 8192

Encoder type 14 bits: 16 to 16384
Encoder type 15 bits: 16 to 32768
Encoder type 16 bits: 16 to 65536
Encoder type 17 bits: 16 to 131072
Encoder type 18 bits: 16 to 262144
Encoder type 19 bits: 16 to 524288
Encoder type 20 bits: 16 to 1048576
Encoder type 21 bits: 16 to 2097152
Encoder type 22 bits: 16 to 4194304
Encoder type 23 bits: 16 to 8388608
Encoder type 24 bits: 16 to 16777216
Encoder type 25 bits: 16 to 33554432

Note
If you find "Total steps - highword" and "Total steps lowword" in your parameter assignment software
instead of "Total steps", the following definition applies:

Total steps = total steps lowword + total steps

highword x 216

Latch: Encoder value

Not active / With rising edge DI / With

falling edge DI / With both edges DI

This parameter is available in the parameter

assignment software in standard mode only.

Comparator 1

Not active / In the up direction / In the

down direction / In both directions

This parameter is available in the parameter

assignment software in standard mode only.

Not active: The encoder value cannot be frozen.

Not active: The comparator is switched off.

Comparator 2

Not active / In the up direction / In the

down direction / In both directions

This parameter is available in the parameter

assignment software in standard mode only.
Not active: The comparator is switched off.

Sign of life

Off, On

This parameter is only active in isochronous mode.

When sign of life is on, the sign-of-life bit is toggled,
i.e., the last sent value is inverted, each time an
encoder value is read in in isochronous mode. If a
reduction is assigned in the "Encoder Sampling Rate"
parameter, the value is toggled only if an encoder
value was actually read in.
You can find the sign-of-life bit in the feedback
interface in:
Byte 4/bit 7 (standard mode)
Byte 0/bit 7 (fast mode)

252

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.8 Setting parameters for the 1SSI
Parameters

Value Range

Encoder sampling rate No limitation, 0.1 kHz to 6.3 kHz (in 0.1kHz steps)

Note
Any encoder sampling rate to be taken into account is
set here. This parameter is only active in isochronous
mode. It enables the use of slower encoders (such as
ultrasound encoders) even in a fast processing cycle.
An integer reduction n is calculated using the set
frequency. In this case, the encoder is read in again
only every nth clock cycle.
Example: Processing cycle 500 s
Encoder sampling rate: 1.2 kHz (approximately every
833 s)
--> reduction n = 2, i.e., the encoder is read in again
only every 2nd processing cycle, i.e., every ms.

See the technical specifications of the absolute encoder.

The monoflop time is the time between 2 SSI frames. The assigned monoflop time must be greater than the monoflop
time of the absolute encoder (refer to the technical specifications of the manufacturer).

3 The following limitation applies to the monoflop time of the absolute encoder:
(1/transmission rate) < monoflop time of absolute encoder < 64 s

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

253

1SSI
4.9 Diagnostics

4.9

Diagnostics

4.9.1

Diagnostics using the LED display

LED display on the 1SSI

6)


83

'1

&03

Group error (red)

Status display for change in sensor value (green)
Status display for result of comparison
Status display for digital input (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 1SSI

The table below shows the status and error displays on the 1SSI.
Event (LEDs)
SF

UP

DN

CMP

Cause
7

On

No parameter assignment.
There is a diagnostic
message.
On

Check the parameter

assignment. Evaluate the
diagnostics data.

At value change from smaller

to larger sensor values
(including zero-crossing)
On

At value change from larger

to smaller sensor values
(including zero-crossing)
On

Set for comparison result

CMP 1
On

254

Remedy

DI (latch) is activated.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.9 Diagnostics

4.9.2

Error types
For information on the structure of the channel-related diagnostics, refer to the manual on
the interface module used in your ET 200S station.

1SSI error types

The following table shows the error types on the 1SSI.
Error class

Meaning

Remedy

1D

00001: Short circuit

Short circuit of the supply to the

absolute encoder.

Correct the process wiring.

9D

01001: Error

Internal module error occurred.

Replace the module.

Load voltage from the power module is

too low.

Correct the process wiring. Check the

load voltage.

16D

10000: Parameter assignment

error

Parameters have not been assigned to

the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

26D

11010: External error

Start/Stop bit error (error absolute

encoder): Wire break in the sensor
cable, or sensor cable is not
connected. Sensor type, transmission
rate, and monoflop time do not
correspond to the sensor connected;
programmable sensors do not
correspond to the settings on the 1SSI
electronic module. Sensor is defective
or there are faults.

Replace the sensor; correct the

process wiring.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

Correct the parameter assignment.

255

1SSI
4.10 Control and Feedback Interfaces in Standard Mode

4.10

Control and Feedback Interfaces in Standard Mode

Note
For the 1SSI, the following data of the control and feedback interface are consistent:
Byte 0 to 3
Byte 4 to 7
Use the access or addressing mode for data consistency over the entire control and
feedback interface on your master (only for configuration using the GSD file).

Description
The two tables show the assignment of the control interface (outputs) and the feedback
interface (inputs):
Table 4- 3

Assignment of the Feedback Interface (Inputs)

Address

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3

Encoder value double word (bit 31 set, encoder value frozen)

Byte 4

Bit 7: Reserved = 0 or sign of life LZ

Bit 6: Ready for operation RDY
Bit 5: Parameter assignment error ERR_PARA
Bit 4: Absolute encoder error ERR_SSI
Bit 3: Encoder supply short circuit ERR_24V
Bit 2: Status DI STS_DI
Bit 1: Status DN STS_DN
Bit 0: Status UP STS_UP

Byte 5

Bit 7: Reserved = 0
Bit 6: Reserved = 0
Bit 5: Reserved = 0
Bit 4: Reserved = 0
Bit 3: Comparison value 2 reached, CMP2
Bit 2: Comparison value 1 reached, CMP
Bit 1: Load function error, ERR_LOAD
Bit 0: Load function running, STS_LOAD

Bytes 6 to 7

256

Reserved = 0

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.10 Control and Feedback Interfaces in Standard Mode
Table 4- 4

Assignment of the Control Interface (Outputs)

Address

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3

Comparison value 1 or 2 (double word)

Byte 4

Bit 7: Error acknowledgment EXTF_ACK

Bit 6: Acknowledgment of latch function LATCH_ACK
Bit 5: Reserved = 0
Bit 4: Reserved = 0
Bit 3: Reserved = 0
Bit 2: Reserved = 0
Bit 1: Load comparison value 2, CMP_VAL2
Bit 0: Load comparison value 1, CMP_VAL1

Byte 5

Reserved = 0

Bytes 6 to 7

Reserved = 0

Notes on the Control and Feedback Bits

Bits

Notes

CMP

Comparison result of comparator 1

CMP2

Comparison result of comparator 2

CMP_VAL1

Load comparison value 1

CMP_VAL2

Load comparison value 2

ERR_24V

The encoder supply is short circuited. ERR_24V is reset when the short circuit is eliminated and
acknowledged with the EXTF_ACK control bit.

ERR_LOAD

Error while loading the comparison values because both control bits CMP_VAL1 and CMP_VAL2 are set.

ERR_PARA

Incorrect parameter assignment for the ET 200S station.

Cause: Total steps of the absolute encoder are not in the range of values for the type of encoder.
The parameter bit is cleared when a correct parameter assignment is transmitted.

ERR_SSI

The 1SSI detects an absolute encoder error if the message frames at the SSI interface are faulty.
Causes: No encoder connected; wire break in the encoder cable; over voltage of encoder supply; type of
encoder, transmission rate, parity error, monoflop time do not correspond to the connected encoder;
programmable encoders do not correspond to the settings on the 1SSI; encoder is defective or faults exist.
ERR_SSI is reset when the cause of the error is eliminated and acknowledged with the EXTF_ACK control
bit.

EXTF_ACK

Error acknowledgement for the absolute encoder ERR_SSI and encoder supply short circuit ERR_24V
errors

LATCH_ACK

Acknowledgement for latch function

LZ

This parameter is only active in isochronous mode.

When sign of life is on, the sign-of-life bit is toggled, i.e., the last sent value is inverted, each time an
encoder value is read in in isochronous mode. If a reduction is assigned in the "Encoder Sampling Rate"
parameter, the value is toggled only if an encoder value was actually read in.

STS_DI

The bit displays the status of the digital input DI.

STS_DN

Status direction down; for encoder value change from larger to smaller encoder positions (including zero
crossover)

STS_LOAD

Feedback bit for CMP_VAL1 and CMP_VAL2. The 1SSI uses this bit to indicate that a comparison value is
loaded.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

257

1SSI
4.10 Control and Feedback Interfaces in Standard Mode
Bits

Notes

STS_UP

Status direction down; for encoder value change from larger to smaller encoder positions (including zero
crossover)

RDY

The parameter assignment of the 1SSI is correct, and the module is executing its functions. The displayed
feedback is valid. For the absolute value encoder error, ERR_SSI is also set.

Access to the Control and Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Configuring with STEP 7
using the GSD file 1)
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUS-DP\
Additional FIELD DEVICES\ET 200S)

Configuring with STEP 7

using HW Config
(Hardware catalog\PROFIBUS-DP\
ET 200S)

Feedback interface

Read with SFC 14 "DPRD_DAT"

Load command, e.g. L PID

Control interface

Write with SFC 15 "DPWR_DAT"

Transfer command, e.g. T PQD

Load and transfer commands are also possible with CPU 3xxC, CPU 318-2 (as of V3.0), CPU 4xx (as of V3.0) and
WinLC RTX (PC CPU).

258

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.11 Feedback Interface in Fast Mode

4.11

Feedback Interface in Fast Mode

Description
Refer to the table below for the assignment of the feedback interface (inputs):
Table 4- 5

Assignment of the Feedback Interface (Inputs)

Address

Assignment

Bytes 0 to 3

Bit 31: Reserved = 0 or sign of life LZ

Bit 30: Ready for operation (feedback is valid) RDY
Bit 29: Parameter assignment error ERR_PARA;
Bit 28: Group error absolute encoder or encoder supply short circuit EXTF
Bit 27: Status DI STS_DI
Bit 26: Status DN STS_DN
Bit 25: Status UP STS_UP
Bytes 0 to 24: Encoder value

Notes on the Feedback Bits

Bits
ERR_PARA

Notes
Incorrect parameter assignment for the ET 200S station.
Cause: Total steps of the absolute encoder are not in the range of values for the type of encoder.
The parameter bit is cleared when a correct parameter assignment is transmitted.

EXTF

Group error absolute encoder or encoder supply short circuit

Causes:
The encoder supply is short circuited
or
No encoder connected; wire break in the encoder cable; type of encoder, transmission rate, monoflop
time do not correspond to the connected encoder; programmable encoders do not correspond to the
settings on the 1SSI; encoder is defective or faults or parity errors exist.
EXTF is reset when the causes of the errors are eliminated.

LZ

This parameter is only active in isochronous mode.

When sign of life is on, the sign-of-life bit is toggled, i.e., the last sent value is inverted, each time an
encoder value is read in in isochronous mode. If a reduction is assigned in the "Encoder Sampling
Rate" parameter, the value is toggled only if an encoder value was actually read in.

STS_DI

The bit displays the status of the digital input DI.

STS_DN

Status direction down; for encoder value change from larger to smaller encoder positions (including
zero crossover)

STS_UP

Status direction down; for encoder value change from larger to smaller encoder positions (including
zero crossover)

RDY

The parameter assignment of the 1SSI is correct, and the module is executing its functions. The
displayed feedback is valid. For the absolute value encoder error, ERR_SSI is also set.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

259

1SSI
4.11 Feedback Interface in Fast Mode

Access to the Feedback Interface in STEP 7 Programming

Feedback interface

260

Configuring with STEP 7 using the GSD

File

Configuring with STEP 7 using HW Config

Read with SFC 14 "DPRD_DAT"

Load command (e.g. L PID)

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.12 Technical Specifications

4.12

Technical Specifications

Overview
General technical specifications
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 x 81 x 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated load voltage L+
Reverse polarity protection
Galvanic isolation
Between backplane bus and SSI
function
Between SSI function and load
voltage L+

24 VDC
Yes
Yes
No

Encoder supply
Output voltage
Output current

L+ (-0.8 V)

Current consumption
From the backplane bus
From load voltage L+ (no load)

max. 10 mA

Power dissipation of the module

1.0 W

Max. 500 mA (Total current at terminals 2 and 6), shortcircuit proof

max. 40 mA

SSI Module Encoder Input

Position feedback

Absolute

Differential signals for SSI data and SSI

clock

According to RS422

Data transmission rate and wire length

with absolute encoders (twisted pair and
shielded) *)

125 kHz max. 320 m

250 kHz max. 160 m
500 kHz max. 60 m
1 MHz max. 20 m
1.5 MHz max. 10 m
2 MHz max. 8 m

Digital Input
Input voltage

0 signal: -30 ... 5 V

1 signal: 11 ... 30 V

Input current

0 signal: 2 mA (quiescent current)

1 signal: 9 mA (typically)

Input delay

0 > 1: max. 300 s

1 > 0: max. 300 s

Connection of a two-wire BERO type 2

Possible

Shielded cable length

50 m

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

261

1SSI
4.12 Technical Specifications
General technical specifications
Interrupts
Status display for digital input DI

LED 7 (green)

Status display of first comparator CMP

CMP LED (green)

Encoder value change Up

UP LED (green)

Encoder value change Down

DN LED (green)

Group error

SF LED (red)

Encoder Value Inaccuracy in Non-Isochronous Mode

Free-wheeling encoder value detection

Maximum age
Standard mode
Fast mode

(2 frame transfer rate) + monoflop time + 1 s

Jitter
Standard mode
Fast mode

Frame runtime + Monoflop time

(2 frame transfer rate) + monoflop time + 700 s

Frame runtime + Monoflop time

Synchronous encoder value detection

Age
Standard mode
Fast mode

Frame runtime + 1 ms
Frame transfer rate + 700 s

Isochronous encoder value detection

Age in standard mode and fast mode Encoder value at time Ti of the current bus cycle

Latch Value Inaccuracy in Non-Isochronous Mode

Free-wheeling encoder value detection

Jitter in standard mode and fast

mode

Frame runtime + Monoflop time

Synchronous encoder value detection

Jitter
Standard mode
Fast mode

1 ms
700 s

Isochronous encoder value detection

Jitter in standard mode and fast

mode

Frame runtime + Monoflop time

Frame runtime of the encoders (for selected encoder widths without parity bit)
13 bits

14 bits

16 bits

21 bits

24 bits

25 bits

125 kHz

112 s

120 s

136 s

176 s

200 s

208 s

250 kHz

56 s

60 s

68 s

88 s

100 s

104 s

500 kHz

28 s

30 s

34 s

44 s

50 s

52 s

1 MHz

14 s

15 s

17 s

22 s

25 s

26 s

1.5 MHz

9 s

10 s

11 s

15 s

17 s

17 s

2 MHz

7 s

8 s

9 s

11 s

13 s

13 s

Monoflop time 1

262

16 s / 32 s / 48 s / 64 s

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

1SSI
4.12 Technical Specifications
General technical specifications
Response Times in Non-Isochronous Mode
Update rate of the 1SSI

In standard mode
In fast mode

1 ms
700 s

Isochronous Times for the Module

In standard mode

TCI

125 s + Frame runtime (in s)

TCO

125 s

ToiMin

0 s

TDPMin

400 s + Frame runtime if frame runtime >

100 s
500 s if frame runtime 100 s

In fast mode

TCI

70 s + Frame runtime (in s)

TCO

0 s

ToiMin

0 s

TDPMin

210 s + Frame runtime if frame runtime >

40 s
250 s if frame runtime 40 s

The following restriction applies to the monoflop time of the absolute encoder:
(1/transmission rate) < monoflop time of the absolute encoder < 64 s)

*)

As long as the encoder in use does not require a shorter line length.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

263

1SSI
4.12 Technical Specifications

264

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.1

Product Overview

Order number
6ES7 138-4DD01-0AB0

Compatibility
The 2PULSE with the order number 6ES7 138-4DD01-0AB0 replaces the 2PULSE with the
order number 6ES7 138-4DD00-0AB0 compatibly. In STEP 7 as of Version V5.4 SP4 +
HSP 2072, you can use it in non-isochronous and isochronous modes.

Features
2-channel
The two channels of the 2PULSE can be used independently of one another; they permit
pulse output in 5 different modes.
Minimum pulse duration: 100 s,
Accuracy: (period duration x 100 ppm) 100 s
Digital output DO 0 for channel 0 and digital output DO 1 for channel 1 to output the
pulses.
Integrated freewheeling diodes in the digital outputs. No external freewheeling diode
required at inductive loads
Digital input DI 0 for Channel 0 and digital input DI 1 for Channel 1 for enabling (starting
of output).
Can be used with short and long control interface
Short control interface: 8 bytes compatible to predecessor module
Long control interface: 12 bytes improved controlling options

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

265

2PULSE
5.1 Product Overview

Operating Modes
"Pulse output" operating mode
A pulse with variable pulse duration is output at the digital output of the 2PULSE.
"Pulse width modulation" operating mode
A pulse sequence (square wave signal) with defined time period and variable
pulse/pause ratio is output at the digital output of the 2PULSE.
"Pulse train" operating mode
A variable number of pulses with defined time period and pulse duration is output at the
digital output of the 2PULSE.
"On/Off-delay" operating mode
The signal pending at the digital input DI is output with an on/off-delay at the digital output
DO by the 2PULSE.
"Frequency output" operating mode
A square wave signal with variable frequency is output at the digital output of the
2PULSE.

Functions
Measurement of current in the "Pulse width modulation" and "Pulse train" operating
modes
Direct control of the digital output by means of the control program
Error detection/diagnostics (short circuit of the digital output and encoder supply)
Parallel connection of both channels of the 2PULSE to achieve a higher output current
Programmable response to CPU/master STOP

Configuration
In order to configure the 2PULSE use one of the following options
STEP 7 as of Version V5.4 SP4 with the HSP 2072 (Hardware Support Package from the
Internet)
A GSD file (http://www.automation.siemens.com/csi/gsd)

Firmware update
In order to extend the functionality and eliminate errors, firmware updates can be
downloaded to the operating system memory of the 2PULSE by means of the STEP 7 HW
Config software.
Note
When you launch the firmware update, the old firmware is deleted. If the firmware update is
interrupted or canceled for any reason, the 2PULSE will no longer function correctly as a
result. Restart the firmware update and wait until it has completed successfully.

266

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.2 Isochronous mode

5.2

Isochronous mode
Note
For basic information on isochronous mode, refer to the Isochronous mode
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045) function manual.

Hardware requirements
You will require the following for the 2PULSE in isochronous mode:
A CPU that supports isochronous mode
PROFIBUS master or PROFINET controller that supports the constant bus cycle time
IM 151 that supports isochronous mode

Response of the 2PULSE

Depending on the system parameter assignment, the 2PULSE works in either nonisochronous or isochronous mode.
In isochronous mode
The output sequences are started at the moment To when the software is enabled.
Data communication between the bus master and 2PULSE is isochronous to the cycle.
All 8 bytes of the feedback interface are consistent.
In case of a parameter assignment error, the 2PULSE does not go into isochronous mode.
If isochronous mode fails due to faults or failure/delay of global control (GC), the 2PULSE
returns to isochronous mode during the next cycle without an error response.
If isochronous mode fails, the feedback interface is not updated.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

267

2PULSE
5.3 Example: Starting 2PULSE

5.3

Example: Starting 2PULSE

Task
These brief instructions guide you to a functioning application that will enable you to become
familiar and check the basic hardware and software functions of your 2PULSE. The "Pulse
output" mode is used as an example here. Channel 0 of the 2PULSE is used in the example.

Requirements
The following requirements must be satisfied:
You must have put an ET 200S station on an S7 station with a DP master into operation.
You must have the following:
An interface module IM151-1 (as of order number 6ES7 151-1AA04-0AB0) or
IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE (as of order number 6ES7 151-1BA02-0AB0) or
IM151-8 PN/DP CPU (as of order number 6ES7 151-8AB00-0AB0) or
IM151-7 CPU (as of order number 6ES7 151-7AA20-0AB0)
A terminal module TM-E15S24-01 or TM-E15x26-A1
(order number 6ES7 193-4CBx0-0AA0 or 6ES7 193-4CAx0-0AA0)
A "2 PULSE"
(order number 6ES7 138-4DD01-0AB0).

Installation and Fitting

1. Install the TM-E15S24-01 terminal module (see the figure below).
2. Plug the 2PULSE into the terminal module. Detailed instructions are provided in the
ET 200S Distributed I/O Device
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348) operating instructions.
It is not necessary to wire the 2PULSE for this example.
38/6(
6)

70(6DQG38/6(

&KDQQHO







&KDQQHO

(6
''$%





9'&





9'&

0





0

'2





'2

',

Figure 5-1

268

',

Terminal assignment of the 2PULSE for the example

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.3 Example: Starting 2PULSE

Configuring with STEP 7 using HW Config

You must first adapt the hardware configuration of your existing ET 200S station.
1. Open the relevant project in SIMATIC Manager.
2. Open the HW Config configuration table in your project.
3. Select "2 PULSE" with the number 6ES7 138-4DD01-0AB0 in the hardware catalog. Drag
the entry to the slot at which you have mounted your 2PULSE.
Note
Do not use the entry "2 PULSE ext. control interface", otherwise the example program
below will not function.
4. Double-click this slot to open the "Properties - 2PULSE" dialog box.
On the "Addresses" tab, you will find the addresses of the slot to which you have dragged
the 2PULSE. Make a note of these addresses for subsequent programming.
On the "Parameters" tab, you will find the default settings for the 2PULSE. Set the
operating mode to "Pulse output". Leave the other default settings unchanged.
5. Save and compile your configuration, and download the configuration in STOP mode of
the CPU by choosing "PLC > Download to Module".

Integration into the Control Program

Create block FC 101 and integrate it in your control program (in OB 1, for example). This
block works in this example with the MB10, MB20 and M30.0 memory bits.
In block FC 101, the start address of the inputs and outputs of the 2PULSE is 256. If
necessary, take the address from the hardware configuration.
This block sets a pulse duration of 500 ms and starts pulse output as soon as you have
issued the enable using your control program (SW_ENABLE = 1).
STL

Description

Block: FC101
L

PEB256

//Read feedback messages from Channel 0 of the 2PULSE

MB20

5000

PAW256

MB10

M30.0

//Query start of pulse output

M10.0

//Set SW_ENABLE = 1

MB10

PAB258

//Write pulse duration of 500 ms to Channel 0 of the 2PULSE

//Create control signal SW_ENABLE

//Write control signals to Channel 0 of the 2PULSE

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

269

2PULSE
5.3 Example: Starting 2PULSE

Testing
Start a pulse output with SW_ENABLE = 1 and monitor the STS_ENABLE and STS_DO
feedback bits using "Monitor/Modify Variables".
1. Select the "Block" folder in your project. Choose the "Insert > S7 Block > Variable Table"
menu command to insert the VAT 1 variable table, and then confirm with OK.
2. Open the VAT 1 variable table, and enter the following variables in the "Address" column:
M20.0 (STS_ENABLE)
M20.1 (STS_DO)
M30.0 (SW_ENABLE)
3. Choose "PLC > Connect To > Configured CPU" to switch to online.
4. Choose "Variable > Monitor" to switch to monitoring.
5. Switch the CPU to RUN mode.

Result
The following table shows you which activity triggers which result.
Activity

Result

When you switch the CPU to RUN, the following results are
obtained:

All the LEDs are turned off

STS_ENABLE = 0
STS_DO = 0

STS_ENABLE = 1
STS_DO = 1
LED 4 for DO 0 lights up
STS_ENABLE = 0
STS_DO = 0
LED 4 for DO 0 is turned off

Start the pulse output by setting memory bit 30.0 (Variable

Modify )
Directly after the start...

After the 500 ms pulse duration has expired

To start further pulse output, you must delete SW_ENABLE (memory bit M30.0 = 0) and
reset it (memory bit M30.0 = 1).
You can change the pulse duration in the control program.

270

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4

Modes and Functions

5.4.1

Overview

Principle
The 2PULSE has two channels. You can select a separate mode for each channel.
Configuration of the operating mode is carried out using HW Config. The mode that has
been assigned parameters can then no longer be changed with your control program.
You can select from 5 different modes for each channel:
Pulse output
Pulse-width modulation
Pulse train
On/Off-delay
Frequency output
In addition to the set mode, the 2PULSE also has the following functions:
Measurement of current in the "Pulse width modulation" and "Pulse train" operating
modes
Direct control of the DO digital output by means of your control program; controllable
separately for each channel.
Error detection/diagnostics; the 2PULSE recognizes the errors for each channel
separately.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

271

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions
Parallel connection of both channels to achieve a higher output current.
Response to CPU/master STOP; the 2PULSE recognizes the CPU/master STOP for both
channels and responds in accordance with your parameter assignment.
&KDQQHO
3DUDPHWHUV

'2

&RQWUROVLJQDOV

',

3URFHVV

&RQWURO3URJUDP

)HHGEDFNVLJQDOV

0RGHVDQG
IXQFWLRQV

&KDQQHO
3DUDPHWHUV

'2

&RQWUROVLJQDOV

)HHGEDFNVLJQDOV

Figure 5-2

0RGHVDQG
IXQFWLRQV

',

Operating principle of the 2PULSE

Interfaces to the Control Program and Process

To run the modes and execute functions, the 2PULSE has as an interface to the process of
a digital input and a digital output for each channel (DI 0, DO 0 for Channel 0 and DI 1, DO1
for Channel 1).
You can modify and monitor the modes and functions with your control program using
control signals and feedback signals.
Parameters are assigned to the various modes. You can find a complete list of parameters
for all the operating modes in the section "Technical Specifications for Programming,
Reference Lists (Page 353)".
You will find the following in the sections on modes and functions:
The relevant parameters
The control and feedback signals
The description of the modes and functions applies to both channels and the channels are
therefore not referred to separately in the description.

272

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.2

"Pulse output" operating mode

Definition
For the pulse duration you set, the 2PULSE outputs a pulse at the DO digital output (output
sequence) on expiration of the set on-delay.
+:HQDEOH
RSWLRQDO
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(


6

676B(1$%/(

4
'2

5
2QGHOD\

Figure 5-3

5
3XOVH
GXUDWLRQ

Block diagram for the "Pulse output" operating mode

Starting the Output Sequence

You must always issue the enable for the output sequence by means of the software enable
(SW_ENABLE 0 1; MANUAL_DO = 0) in your control program.
The ACK_SW_ENABLE feedback bit indicates the software enable pending at the 2PULSE.
You can also set the DI digital input of the 2PULSE as a hardware enable (HW enable) with
the "DI function" parameter.
If you want to work with the software enable and hardware enable at the same time, when
the software enable has been issued, the output sequence starts at the first positive edge of
the hardware enable. Further positive edges of the hardware enable during the current
output sequence are ignored by the 2PULSE. When the software enable has been issued, a
positive edge of the hardware enable is enough to start the next output sequence.
When the enable is issued (positive edge), the on-delay is started and the STS_ENABLE
set. On expiration of the on-delay, the pulse is output with the set pulse duration. The output
sequence finishes with the end of the pulse; STS_ENABLE is cleared.
If you make a prohibited change to the pulse duration during runtime, the ERR_PULS signal
indicates a pulse output error. You will then have to restart the output sequence.
The next time the output sequence starts, the 2PULSE deletes the ERR_PULS feedback bit.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

273

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Pulse Diagram
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(
$&.B6:B(1$%/(
+:HQDEOH
',GLJLWDOLQSXW
'2GLJLWDORXWSXW

676B(1$%/(
(55B38/6

2QGHOD\

6WDUWRIWKHRXWSXWVHTXHQFH

Figure 5-4

3XOVHGXUDWLRQ

(QGRIWKHRXWSXWVHTXHQFH

Output Sequence for Pulse Output

Canceling the Output Sequence

Deleting the software enable (SW_ENABLE = 0) during the on-delay or the pulse output
cancels the output sequence, and STS_ENABLE and the DO digital output are canceled.
You will then have to restart the output sequence.

Truth Table
Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Hardware enable
(digital input DI)

DO Digital Output

STS_ENABLE

Output
Sequence

01

0, if on-delay > 0
1, if on-delay = 0

01

Start

01

Not used

0, if on-delay > 0
1, if on-delay = 0

01

Start

Any status

Terminate

Any status

Previous status remains

01

274

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Setting times using a time base

By means of the time base that can be assigned parameters, you can select the resolution
and range of the pulse duration and the on-delay.
Time base = 0.1 ms:

You can set times from 0.2 ms to 6.5535 s with a resolution of 0.1 ms.

Time base = 1 ms:

You can set times from 1 ms to 65.535 s with a resolution of 1 ms.

Setting and Changing the Pulse Duration

Set the pulse duration directly in your control program as a numerical value between 0 and
65535.
Pulse duration = Time basis x Specified numerical value
If you change the pulse duration when an output sequence is running, the time already
output will be subtracted from the new pulse duration and the pulse will continue to be
output.

Reducing the Pulse Duration

If you have reduced the pulse duration to a time that is shorter than the time already output,
the output sequence is terminated, STS_ENABLE and the DO digital output are deleted, and
the ERR_PULS status bit is set. At the next output sequence, the ERR_PULS status bit is
cleared.

Set the on-delay and change when using the short control interface
Set the on-delay as a value between 0 and 65535 in the parameters.
Configured on-delay = Time base x specified numerical value
Using the factor for the on-delay, you can adjust the time that has been assigned parameters
in your control program. Set the factor between 0 and 255, with a weighting of 0.1:
On-delay = Factor x 0.1 x configured on-delay
If you change the on-delay factor during the output sequence, the new on-delay is activated
at the next output sequence.

Isochronous mode
Generally applicable information is available in the section "Isochronous mode (Page 267)".
In the "Pulse output" operating mode, isochronous mode does not have any influence on the
functionality.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

275

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Parameters of the "Pulse output" operating mode

Parameter

Meaning

Value Range

Mode

Set the "Pulse output" operating

mode.

Time base

Default

Pulse output
Pulse-width modulation
Pulse train
On/Off-delay
Frequency output

Pulse width
modulation

Using the time base, select the

resolution and range of the pulse
duration and the on-delay.

0.1 ms
1 ms

0.1 ms

Function DI

You can use the DI digital input

as an input or as a hardware
enable.

Input
HW enable

Input

On-delay 1)

The time from the start of the

output sequence to the output of
the pulse. You can change the
on-delay in your control program
using the "On-delay factor".

0 to 65535

1)

Only if the short control interface is used

If the long control interface is used, enter this value directly in the control interface.

Control and feedback signals of the "Pulse output" operating mode

Control and Feedback
Signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel
0
Address

Channel
1
Address

Control signals when the short control interface is used (8 bytes)

Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Starting and termination of the

output sequence.

0 = SW_ENABLE canceled
1 = SW_ENABLE set 01 = start of
output sequence; may be dependent
on the hardware enable

Byte 2:

Byte 6:

Bit 0

Bit 0

Pulse duration

The time that is set for the DO

digital output on expiration of the
on-delay.

With time base 0.1 ms:

2 to 65535

Word 0

Word 4

Byte 3

Byte 7

With time base 1 ms:

1 to 65535
If you violate the low limit of the
range, the 2PULSE will not output a
pulse.

On-delay factor

The on-delay that has been

assigned parameters can be
changed before the start of the
output sequence:
On-delay = Factor x 0.1 x
configured on-delay

276

0 to 255
If the on-delay <0.2 ms or if factor =
0, the effective on-delay is = 0.
If there is an on-delay > 65.535 s, the
on-delay is limited to 65.535 s.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions
Control and Feedback
Signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel
0
Address

Channel
1
Address

Control signals when the long control interface is used (12 bytes)
Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Starting and canceling of the

output sequence.

0 = SW_ENABLE canceled
1 = SW_ENABLE set 01 = start of
output sequence; may be dependent
on the hardware enable

Byte 4:

Byte 10:

Bit 0

Bit 0

Pulse duration

The time that is set for the DO

digital output on expiration of the
on-delay.

With time base 0.1 ms:

2 to 65535

Word 0

Word 6

Word 2

Word 8

With time base 1 ms:

1 to 65535
If you violate the low limit of the
range, the 2PULSE will not output a
pulse.

On-delay

The on-delay can be changed

before the start of the output
sequence.

0 to 65535

Indicates an output sequence is

running.

0 = pulse output blocked

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = pulse output running

Bit 0

Bit 0

Indicates the signal level at the

DO digital output. Note the update
rate.

0 = signal at the DO digital output

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = signal at the DO digital output

Bit 1

Bit 1

Indicates the signal level at the DI

digital input.

0 = signal 0 at the DI digital input

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = signal 1 at the DI digital input

Bit 2

Bit 2

Indicates the status of

SW_ENABLE.

0 = SW_ENABLE cleared.

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = SW_ENABLE set

Bit 3

Bit 3

Indicates a pulse output error.

0 = no pulse output error

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = pulse output error

Bit 4

Bit 4

Is incremented after completion of

an output sequence.

Without HW enable: 0 1

Byte 1:

Byte 5:

With HW enable: 0 15

Bit 0 to 3

Bit 0 to 3

Word 2

Word 6

On-delay = Time basis x Specified

numerical value

Feedback Signals
STS_ENABLE
STS_DO

STS_DI
ACK_SW_ENABLE
ERR_PULS
SEQ_CNT
Reserved

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

277

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Input and output signals of "Pulse output" operating mode

Input and Output Signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel
0
Terminal

Channel 1
Terminal

You can select the HW enable

with the "Function DI" parameter.
The signal of the digital input DI
is then interpreted by the
2PULSE at the start of the output
sequence.

0 = HW enable cleared
1 = HW enable issued
0 1 = Start of the output
sequence; dependent on the
software enable
(SW_ENABLE)

A pulse is output at the DO

digital output for the set pulse
duration.

0 = no pulse

Input Signal
HW enable

Output Signal
Pulse at the DO digital output

278

1 = pulse

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.3

"Pulse width modulation" operating mode

Definition
You specify an output value for the 2PULSE. The 2PULSE generates continuous pulses on
this basis. The output value determines the pulse/interpulse ratio within a period (pulse-width
modulation). The period can be adjusted.
The pulse train is output on expiration of the assigned on-delay on the DO digital output of
the 2PULSE (output sequence).
+:HQDEOH
RSWLRQDO
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(


6

'2

3:0
5
2QGHOD\

Figure 5-5

5
2XWSXWYDOXH

676B(1$%/(

3:0LQ
RSHUDWLRQ

Block diagram for "Pulse width modulation" operating mode

Starting the output sequence

You must always issue the enable for the output sequence by means of the software enable
(SW_ENABLE 0 1; MANUAL_DO = 0) in your control program.
The ACK_SW_ENABLE feedback bit indicates the software enable pending at the 2PULSE.
You can also set the digital input DI of the 2PULSE as a HW enable with the "Function DI"
parameter. In isochronous mode, configuration of a HW enable has no effect.
If you want to work with the software enable and hardware enable at the same time, when
the software enable has been issued, the output sequence starts with the first positive edge
of the hardware enable. Further positive edges of the hardware enable during the current
output sequence are ignored by the 2PULSE.
When the enable is issued (positive edge), the on-delay is started and the STS_ENABLE
set. The pulse train is output on expiration of the on-delay. The output sequence runs
continuously as long as SW_ENABLE is set.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

279

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Pulse Diagram
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(
$&.B6:B(1$%/(
+:HQDEOH
'LJLWDOLQSXW',

7LPHSHULRG

7LPHSHULRG

3XOVH ,QWHU
GXUD
SXOVH
WLRQ
SHULRG
2XWSXWYDOXH

2XWSXWYDOXH

'LJLWDORXWSXW'2
2QGHOD\

676B(1$%/(

6WDUWRXWSXWVHTXHQFH

Figure 5-6

Pulse-Width Modulation Output Sequence

Canceling the output sequence

Deleting the software enable (SW_ENABLE = 0) during the on-delay or the pulse output
cancels the output sequence, and STS_ENABLE and the DO digital output are canceled.
You will then have to restart the output sequence.

Truth table
Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Hardware enable
(digital input DI)

Digital output DO

STS_ENABLE

Output
sequence

01

0, if on-delay > 0
1, if on-delay = 0

01

Start

01

Not used

0, if on-delay > 0
1, if on-delay = 0

01

Start

Any status

Cancel

Any status

Previous status remains

01

280

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Minimum Pulse Duration and Minimum Interpulse Period

The minimum pulse duration and minimum interpulse period are superimposed on the
proportional output characteristic.
You assign the minimum pulse duration and minimum interpulse period using the "Minimum
pulse duration" parameter; they always have the same value.
A pulse duration calculated by the 2PULSE that is shorter than the minimum pulse duration
is suppressed.
A pulse duration calculated by the 2PULSE that is longer than the period minus the minimum
interpulse period is set at 1000.
3XOVHGXUDWLRQ

3HULRGGXUDWLRQ
3HULRGGXUDWLRQPLQLPXP
LQWHUSXOVHSHULRG

0LQLPXPSXOVHGXUDWLRQ



Figure 5-7



2XWSXWYDOXHLQ

Modulation of the Pulse Duration

Setting Times Using a Time Base

You use the assignable time base to select the resolution and range of the period, the
minimum pulse duration and the on-delay.
Time base = 0.1 ms:

You can set times from 0.2 ms to 6.5535 s with a resolution of 0.1 ms.

Time base = 1 ms:

You can set times from 1 ms to 65.535 s with a resolution of 1 ms.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

281

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Setting and Changing the Output Value

You select the range of the output value with the "Output format" parameter.
Output format "Per mill": Value range between 0 and 1000
The 2PULSE uses this specified output value to calculate the pulse duration:
Pulse duration = (output value/1000) x time period.
"S7 analog output" output format: Value range between 0 and 27648
The 2PULSE uses this specified output value to calculate the pulse duration:
Pulse duration = (output value/27648) x time period.
You set the output value directly using your control program. The new output value is applied
at the next rising edge of the output.

Setting the time period

Depending on the configuration, the time period is specified as a parameter value or in the
control interface. The table below shows when a specific value is used.
For isochronous mode, you have to specify the time period when parameters are assigned.
In contrast to non-isochronous mode, you cannot change the time period later during
runtime.
Configuration with ...
Short control interface
Isochronous mode

Long control interface

Time period = "Time period" parameter value

The value from the control interface is ignored.

Non-isochronous mode

282

Time period = "Time period"

parameter value "Time period
factor" from control interface

Time period = "Time period"

setpoint from control interface
The "Time period" parameter value
is ignored.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Isochronous mode
Generally applicable information is available in the section "Isochronous mode (Page 267)".
The following particular aspects apply to isochronous mode in the "Pulse width modulation"
operating mode:
The output always begins without an on-delay, a configured on-delay is ignored.
The output always begins after the software enable has been issued, a configured
hardware enable is ignored.
A change of the time period during runtime is not possible. Corresponding specifications
via the control interface are ignored.
In isochronous mode, the output sequence is synchronized with the moment To. The time
period is coordinated to the DP cycle. It is possible that your defined time period cannot be
implemented exactly.
The configured value of the time period is adjusted by the 2PULSE to the DP cycle based on
a calculation algorithm. The calculation is performed to minimize the difference between the
specified and calculated time period. In the most unfavorable case, the deviation amounts to
half the DP cycle. The table below shows examples.
DP cycle time TDP1)

Specified time period TSetpoint

Calculated time period TActual1)

10 ms

5 ms

5 ms

10 ms

2 ms

2 ms

10 ms

6 ms

5 ms

10 ms

16 ms

20 ms

1)

The calculated time period and the DP cycle time always have an integer ratio.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

283

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions
The correlation between the and the DP cycle is represented graphically below. The pulsepause ratio is shown in the examples with 50% each. For additional information, refer to the
Isochronous Mode (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15218045) function
manual.
The time period is equal to the DP cycle
7LPHSHULRG
'LJLWDORXWSXW
'2
'3F\FOH
72

72

72

72

6WDUWRXWSXWVHTXHQFH

The time period is less than the DP cycle

7LPHSHULRG

'LJLWDORXWSXW
'2
'3F\FOH
72

72

72

72

6WDUWRXWSXWVHTXHQFH

The time period is greater than the DP cycle

7LPHSHULRG
'LJLWDORXWSXW
'2
'3F\FOH
72

72

72

72

6WDUWRXWSXWVHTXHQFH

284

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Time period at configuration with short control interface

You specify the time period in the parameters as a numerical value depending on the time
base:
With time base 1 ms: from 1 to 65535
With time base 0.1 ms: from 2 to 65535
Configured time period = Time base x specified numerical value
Using the factor for the period duration, you can adjust the time that has been assigned
parameters in your control program. Set the factor between 0 and 255, with a weighting of
0.1:
Time period = Factor x 0.1 x configured time period
The new setpoints for the time period are applied with the next rising edge of the output.

Note
If the time period changes in runtime, a brief minor increase in the time period can result
(approx. 10 s).
Note
A change in the time period using the control interface has no effect in isochronous mode.

Setting the Minimum Pulse Duration and Minimum Interpulse Period

You specify the minimum pulse duration and the minimum interpulse period as a numerical
value between 0 and 65535 using the "Minimum pulse duration" parameter:
Configured minimum pulse duration/minimum pause between pulses = Time base x
specified numerical value

Setting the On-Delay

You specify the on-delay as a value between 0 and 65535 in the parameters.
Configured on-delay = Time base x specified numerical value
When the long control interface is used, the factor for the on-delay can be used to adjust the
configured time in your control program. Set the factor between 0 and 255, with a weighting
of 0.1:
On-delay = Factor x 0.1 x configured on-delay

Measurement of current
An important application for current measurement in the "Pulse width modulation" operating
mode is the current regulation of a proportional valve. This allows you to compensate for
thermal effects at the valve, for example.
For more information, refer to the section "Function: Measurement of current (Page 310)".

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

285

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Parameters of the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode

Parameter

Meaning

Value range

Operating mode

Set the "Pulse width modulation"

operating mode.

Time base

Default

Pulse output
Pulse-width modulation
Pulse train
On/Off-delay
Frequency output

Pulse width
modulation

Use the time base to select the

resolution and the value range of the

time period, the minimum pulse duration,

and the on-delay.

0.1 ms
1 ms

0.1 ms

Output format

Choose between the Per mil, and the S7

analog output formats, depending on
which output value resolution you need.

Per mill
S7 analog output

Per mill

Function DI

You can use the digital input DI as an

input or as a HW enable.

Input
HW enable

Input

On-delay

The time from the start of the output

0 to 65535
sequence to the output of the pulse train.

Minimum pulse duration

Minimum pulse duration and minimum

interpulse period:

0 to 65535

With time base 0.1 ms:

2 to 65535

20000 2 s

Enter the response time of the actuator

connected to your DO digital output.
Time period 1)

Setpoint of the time period

When specifying the time period take
into account the set minimum pulse
duration and the response time of your
final controlling element that is
connected to the digital output DO.

With time base 1 ms:

1 to 65535

When the short control interface is used,

you can use the "Time period factor" to
change the time period in your control
program in non-isochronous mode.
1)

Read the information provided above on "Setting the time period" and on "Isochronous mode".

286

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Control and feedback signals of the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode
Control and feedback
signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel 0
address

Channel 1
address

Control signals when the short control interface is used (8 bytes)

Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Starting and canceling of the

output sequence.

0 = SW_ENABLE canceled
1 = SW_ENABLE set 01 = start
of output sequence; may be
dependent on the hardware
enable

Byte 2:

Byte 6:

Bit 0

Bit 0

Output value

The value that is output in pulsewidth modulated format on the

digital output DO.

Depending on the output format:

Per mill: 0 ... 1000
S7 analog output:
0 to 27648

Word 0

Word 4

Byte 3

Byte 7

If you enter an output value >

1000 or 27648, the 2PULSE limits
this to 1000 or 27648.
Period duration factor

You can change the assigned

period:

Factor: 0 to 255

Time period = Factor x 0.1 x

configured time period

2 Minimum pulse duration up to

65.635 s.

Period duration:

If a period duration of < 2 x

minimum pulse duration occurs or
< 2 s or if Factor = 0, the
effective period = 2 x minimum
pulse duration, but at least 200 s.
If there is a period > 65.535 s, it is
limited to 65.535 s.
Control signals when the long control interface is used (12 bytes)
Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Starting and canceling of the

output sequence.

0 = SW_ENABLE canceled
1 = SW_ENABLE set 01 = start
of output sequence; may be
dependent on the hardware
enable

Byte 4:

Byte 10:

Bit 0

Bit 0

Output value

The value that is output in pulsewidth modulated format on the

digital output DO.

Depending on the output format:

Per mill: 0 ... 1000
S7 analog output:
0 to 27648

Word 0

Word 6

Word 2

Word 8

Byte 5

Byte 11

If you enter an output value >

1000 or 27648, the 2PULSE limits
this to 1000 or 27648.
Time period 1)

Setpoint of the time period in nonisochronous mode

With time base 0.1 ms:

2 to 65535
With time base 1 ms:
1 to 65535

On-delay factor

The on-delay that has been

assigned parameters can be
changed before the start of the
output sequence:
On-delay = Factor x 0.1 x
configured on-delay

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

0 to 255
If the on-delay <0.2 ms or if factor
= 0, the effective on-delay is = 0.
If there is an on-delay > 65.535 s,
the on-delay is limited to 65.535 s.

287

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions
Control and feedback
signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel 0
address

Channel 1
address

Indicates an output sequence is

running.

0 = Pulse output blocked

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = Pulse output running

Bit 0

Bit 0

Indicates the signal level at the

digital output DO.

0 = Signal 0 on digital output DO

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = Signal 1 on digital output DO

Bit 1

Bit 1

Indicates the signal level at digital

input DI.

0 = Signal 0 on digital input DI

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = Signal 1 on digital input DI

Bit 2

Bit 2

Indicates the status of

SW_ENABLE.

0 = SW_ENABLE cleared.

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = SW_ENABLE set

Bit 3

Bit 3

No function in this operating

mode.

Current at the DO as a SIMATIC

S7 analog value.

0 to 27648 (overrange up to
32767)

Feedback signals
STS_ENABLE
STS_DO

Note the update rate.

STS_DI
ACK_SW_ENABLE
SEQ_CNT
Measured value of the
current
1)

Byte 1:

Byte 5:

Bit 0 to 3

Bit 0 to 3

Word 2

Word 6

Read the information provided above on "Setting the time period".

Input and output signals of the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode
Input and output signal

Meaning

Value range

Channel 0
terminal

Channel 1
terminal

You can select the HW enable

with the "Function DI"
parameter.
The signal of the digital input
DI is then interpreted by the
2PULSE at the start of the
output sequence.

0 = HW enable cleared
1 = HW enable issued
0 1 = Start of the output
sequence; dependent on the
software enable

The pulse train is output on

the digital output DO.

0 = no pulse

Input signal
HW enable

Output signal
Pulse train on the digital
output DO

288

1 = pulse

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.4

"Pulse train" operating mode

Definition
The 2PULSE outputs the number of pulses you specified as a pulse train at the DO digital
output on expiration of the set on-delay (output sequence). The period duration and pulse
duration of the pulses can be adjusted.
+:HQDEOH
RSWLRQDO
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(


6

5
2QGHOD\

Figure 5-8

5
1XPEHU
RISXOVHV

676B(1$%/(
'2

7KHSXOVH
WUDLQLVLQ
RSHUDWLRQ

Block diagram for "Pulse Train" operating mode

Starting the output sequence

You must always issue the enable for the output sequence by means of the software enable
(SW_ENABLE 0 1; MANUAL_DO = 0) in your control program. The ACK_SW_ENABLE
feedback bit indicates the software enable pending at the 2PULSE.
You can also set the digital input DI of the 2PULSE as a HW enable with the "Function DI"
parameter.
If you want to work with the software enable and hardware enable at the same time, when
the software enable has been issued, the output sequence starts with the first positive edge
of the hardware enable. Further positive edges of the hardware enable during the current
output sequence are ignored by the 2PULSE. When the software enable has been issued, a
positive edge of the hardware enable is enough to start the next output sequence.
When the enable is issued (positive edge), the on-delay is started and the STS_ENABLE
set. On expiration of the on-delay, the pulse train is output with the set number of pulses.
The output sequence finishes as soon as the last pulse has been output; STS_ENABLE is
cleared.
If you make a prohibited change to the number of pulses during runtime, the ERR_PULS
signal indicates a pulse output error.
At the next output sequence, the 2PULSE deletes the ERR_PULS feedback bit.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

289

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Pulse diagram
6:HQDEOH

$&.B6:B(1$%/(
+:HQDEOH
',GLJLWDOLQSXW
'2GLJLWDORXWSXW
2QGHOD\

3XOVH ,QWHU
GXUD SXOVH
WLRQ
SHULRG

3HULRG
GXUDWLRQ
(QGRIWKH
RXWSXW
VHTXHQFH

6WDUWRIWKHRXWSXWVHTXHQFH
1XPEHURISXOVHV 
676B(1$%/(

(55B38/6

Figure 5-9

Output Sequence of the Pulse Train

Canceling the output sequence

Deleting the software enable during the on-delay or the pulse train terminates the output
sequence, and STS_ENABLE and the DO digital output are deleted.
You will then have to restart the output sequence.

Truth table
Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Hardware enable
(digital input DI)

Digital output DO

STS_ENABLE

Output
sequence

01

0, if on-delay > 0
1, if on-delay = 0

01

Start

01

Not used

0, if on-delay > 0
1, if on-delay = 0

01

Start

Any status

Cancel

Any status

Previous status remains

01

Setting times using a time base

Select, by means of the time base that can be assigned parameters, the resolution and
range of the period duration, the pulse duration, and the on-delay.

290

Time base = 0.1 ms:

You can set times from 0.2 ms to 6.5535 s with a resolution of 0.1 ms.

Time base = 1 ms:

You can set times from 1 ms to 65.535 s with a resolution of 1 ms.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Setting and Changing the Number of Pulses

Set the number of pulses directly as a numerical value between 0 and 65535 with your
control program.
If you change the number of pulses on expiration of the on-delay, the new value takes effect
immediately:
If you have increased the number of pulses, the new, higher number of pulses is output.
If you have reduced the number of pulses, and if the lower number of pulses has already
been output, the output sequence is terminated, STS_ENABLE and the DO digital output
are deleted, and ERR_PULS is set. At the next output sequence, ERR_PULS is cleared.

Set the time period and change when using the short control interface
Set the period duration as a value between 2 and 65535 in the parameters:
Configured time period = Time base x specified numerical value
Using the factor for the period, you can adjust the assigned time in your control program. Set
the factor between 0 and 255, with a weighting of 0.1:
Time period = Factor x 0.1 x configured time period
If you change the factor during the output sequence, the new period duration will take effect
at the start of the next output sequence.

Setting the Pulse Duration

Set the pulse duration as a numerical value between 1 and 65535 with the "Pulse duration"
parameter:
Configured pulse duration = Time base x Specified numerical value
When the long control interface is used, you can set the ratio of the pulse duration to the
interpulse period:
Pulse-pause ratio = (Setpoint / 255) time period

Setting the On-Delay

Set the on-delay as a value between 0 and 65535 in the parameters.
Configured on-delay = Time base x specified numerical value

Isochronous mode
Generally applicable information is available in the section "Isochronous mode (Page 267)".
In the "Pulse train" operating mode, isochronous mode does not have any influence on the
functionality.

Measurement of current
For more information, refer to the section "Function: Measurement of current (Page 310)".

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

291

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Parameters of the "Pulse train" operating mode

Parameter

Meaning

Value range

Operating mode

Set the "Pulse train" operating

mode.

Pulse output
Pulse width modulation
Pulse train
On/Off-delay
Frequency output

Pulse width
modulation

Time base

Using the time base, select the

resolution and range of the
period duration, pulse duration,
and on-delay.

0.1 ms
1 ms

0.1 ms

Function DI

You can use the DI digital input

as an input or as a HW enable.

Input
HW enable

Input

On-delay

The time from the start of the

output sequence to the output
of the pulse train.

0 to 65535

Pulse duration 1)

Pulse duration:

With time base 0.1 ms:

2 to 65535

10000 1 s

Enter the response time of the

actuator connected on your DO
digital output.

Default

With time base 1 ms:

1 to 65535
If you violate the low limit of the
range, the 2PULSE sets the
pulse duration to 0.2 ms or 1
ms.

Time period 1)

The period duration should

always be a multiple of the
response time of the actuator
connected to the DO digital
output.

With time base 0.1 ms:

2 to 65535

20000 2 s

With time base 1 ms:

1 to 65535

Define the period duration

according to the required
repetition rate of the pulses.
You can change the time period
in your control program using
the "Time period factor".
1)

Only if the short control interface is used

If the long control interface is used, enter this value directly in the control interface.

292

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Control and feedback signals of the "Pulse train" operating mode

Control and feedback
signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel 0
address

Channel 1
address

0 = SW_ENABLE cleared.

Byte 2:

Byte 6:

1 = SW_ENABLE set

Bit 0

Bit 0

Word 0

Word 4

Byte 3

Byte 7

0 = SW_ENABLE cleared.

Byte 4:

Byte 10:

1 = SW_ENABLE set

Bit 0

Bit 0

Word 0

Word 6

Word 2

Word 8

Byte 5

Byte 11

Control signals when the short control interface is used (8 bytes)

Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Starting and canceling of the

output sequence.

0 1 = Start of the output

sequence; may be dependent on
the HW enable
Number of pulses

Period duration factor

Number of pulses that are output

at the DO digital output on
expiration of the on-delay.

0 to 65535
If the number of pulses is 0, the
2PULSE does not output any
pulses. The output sequence is
terminated with ERR_PULS = 1.

The on-delay that can be assigned Factor: 0 to 255

parameters can be changed
Period duration:
before the start of the output
> Pulse duration up to 65.535 s
sequence:
If there is a period duration
Time period = Factor x 0.1 x
> 65.535 s, it is set to 65.535 s.
configured time period
If a period duration pulse
duration, it is set to a pulse
duration of + 0.2 ms (or pulse
duration + 1 ms).

Control signals when the long control interface is used (12 bytes)
Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Starting and canceling of the

output sequence.

0 1 = Start of the output

sequence; may be dependent on
the HW enable
Number of pulses

Period duration

Number of pulses that are output

at the DO digital output on
expiration of the on-delay.

0 to 65535

Setpoint of the time period

With time base 0.1 ms:

2 to 65535

If the number of pulses is 0, the

2PULSE does not output any
pulses. The output sequence is
terminated with ERR_PULS = 1.

With time base 1 ms:

1 to 65535
Pulse-pause ratio

You can set the ratio of the pulse

duration to the interpulse period

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

0 to 255
E.g the value of 128 corresponds
to a ratio of 50:50.

293

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions
Control and feedback
signals
Feedback signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel 0
address

Channel 1
address

STS_ENABLE

Indicates an output sequence is

running.

0 = pulse output blocked

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = pulse output running

Bit 0

Bit 0

Indicates the signal level at the

digital output DO.

0 = Signal 0 on digital output DO

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = Signal 1 on digital output DO

Bit 1

Bit 1

Indicates the signal level at digital

input DI.

0 = Signal 0 on digital input DI

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = Signal 1 on digital input DI

Bit 2

Bit 2

ACK_SW_ENABLE

Indicates the status of

SW_ENABLE.

0 = SW_ENABLE cleared.

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = SW_ENABLE set

Bit 3

Bit 3

ERR_PULS

Indicates a pulse output error.

0 = no pulse output error

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = pulse output error

Bit 4

Bit 4

SEQ_CNT

Is incremented after completion of

an output sequence.

Without HW enable: 0 1

Byte 1:

Byte 5:

With HW enable: 0 15

Bit 0 to 3

Bit 0 to 3

Measured value of the

current

Current at the DO as a SIMATIC

S7 analog value.

0 to 27648 (overrange up to
32767)

Word 2

Word 6

STS_DO

Note the update rate.

STS_DI

Input and output signals of "Pulse train" operating mode

Input and output signal

Meaning

Value range

Channel 0
terminal

Channel 1
terminal

You can select the HW enable

with the "Function DI"
parameter.
The signal of the digital input
DI is then interpreted by the
2PULSE at the start.

0 = HW enable cleared

The preset number of pulses

is output at the DO digital
output.

0 = no pulse

Input signal
HW enable

1 = HW enable issued
0 1 = Start of the output
sequence; dependent on the
software enable
(SW_ENABLE)

Output Signal
Pulse train at the DO digital
output

294

1 = pulse

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.5

"On/Off-delay" operating mode

Definition
The signal pending at the digital input DI is output with an on/off-delay at the digital output
DO by the 2PULSE.
676B(1$%/(
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(
',

'2

5
2QGHOD\

5
2IIGHOD\

Figure 5-10

Block diagram for "On/Off-delay" mode

Output Sequence Enable

You must always issue the enable for the output sequence by means of the software enable
(SW_ENABLE 0 1; MANUAL_DO = 0) in your control program, STS_ENABLE is then set.
The ACK_SW_ENABLE feedback bit indicates the software enable pending at the 2PULSE.
The positive edge on the DI digital input (0 1) starts the on-delay, and the DO digital output
is set on expiration of the on-delay.
The negative edge on the DI digital input (1 0) starts the off-delay, and the DO digital
output is deleted on expiration of the off-delay.
If the 2PULSE recognizes a pulse duration or interpulse period that is too short, this is
displayed by the ERR_PULS pulse output error.
At the next edge at the DI digital input, the 2PULSE deletes the ERR_PULS feedback bit.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

295

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Pulse Diagram
SW_ENABLE is set, while DI = 0:
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(

$&.B6:B(1$%/(
+:HQDEOH
',GLJLWDOLQSXW

'2GLJLWDORXWSXW

676B(1$%/(

(55B38/6
2QGHOD\

Figure 5-11

2IIGHOD\

Output sequence on/off-delay (at the start DI = 0)

SW_ENABLE is set, while DI = 1:

If SW_ENABLE is set while DI = 1, the first edge at DI (falling edge) is ignored.
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(

$&.B6:B(1$%/(
+:HQDEOH
',GLJLWDOLQSXW

'2GLJLWDORXWSXW

676B(1$%/(

(55B38/6
2QGHOD\

Figure 5-12

2IIGHOD\

Output sequence on/off-delay (at the start DI = 1)

Canceling the Output Sequence

Clearing the software enable (SW_ENABLE = 0) during the output sequence causes the
output sequence to be aborted, along with STS_ENABLE and the digital output.

296

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Truth Table
Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Digital input DI

Digital output DO

STS_ENABLE

Output
sequence

01

0, if on-delay > 0
1, if on-delay = 0

Start

10

1, if off-delay > 0
0, if off-delay = 0

Start

Any status

Cancel

Any status

Previous status remains

01

Minimum Pulse Duration/Minimum Interpulse Period of the Digital Output DO

The minimum pulse duration/minimum interpulse period of the digital output DO amounts to
100 s.
Make sure you take this into consideration when you set the on/off-delay and the pulse
duration/interpulse period of the digital input DI; otherwise, the response at the digital output
DO is not defined.

The Pulse Duration of the Digital Input DI Is Too Short

The 2PULSE detects a pulse that is too short on the negative edge on the digital input DI if:
Pulse duration + Off-delay On-delay.
Response of the 2PULSE to a pulse duration that is too short:
ERR_PULS is set
The current on-delay is deleted.
The Off-delay is not started.
The signal level at the digital output DO remains at 0.
ERR_PULS is deleted at the next positive edge on the digital input DI.
3XOVHGXUDWLRQ
',GLJLWDOLQSXW
2IIGHOD\
2QGHOD\

'2GLJLWDORXWSXW

Figure 5-13




The Pulse Duration Is Too Short

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

297

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

The Interpulse Period of the Digital Input DI Is Too Short

The 2PULSE detects an interpulse period that is too short on the positive edge on the digital
input DI if:
Interpulse period + on-delay Off-delay.
Response of the 2PULSE to a interpulse period that is too short:
ERR_PULS is set
The current Off-delay is deleted.
The on-delay is not started.
The signal level at the digital output DO remains at 1.
ERR_PULS is deleted with the next negative edge on the digital input DI.
',GLJLWDOLQSXW

,QWHUSXOVHSHULRG

2QGHOD\
2IIGHOD\
',GLJLWDOLQSXW



Figure 5-14

The Interpulse Period Is Too Short

Retriggering the current on-delay

The 2PULSE starts a new on-delay on the positive edge on the digital input DI if:
On-delay > pulse duration + interpulse period
This deletes the current Off-delay.
The digital output DO is only set if signal level 1 is present on the digital input DI longer than
the on-delay. This enables you to filter rapid pulse trains.
3XOVH
GXUDWLRQ

,QWHUSXOVH
SHULRG

',GLJLWDOLQSXW
2IIGHOD\
2QGHOD\
5HWULJJHU
'2GLJLWDORXWSXW

Figure 5-15

298

Retriggering the current on-delay

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Retriggering the current Off-delay

The 2PULSE starts a new off-delay on the negative edge on the digital input DI if:
Off-delay > pulse duration + interpulse period.
This deletes the current on-delay.
The digital output DO is only deleted if signal level 0 is present on the digital input DI longer
than the off-delay.
3XOVH
GXUDWLRQ

,QWHUSXOVH
SHULRG

',GLJLWDOLQSXW
2IIGHOD\
5HWULJJHU
2QGHOD\

2QGHOD\

'2GLJLWDORXWSXW

Figure 5-16

Retriggering the current Off-delay

Setting Times Using a Time Base

Use the assigned time base to select the resolution and the value range of the on-delay and
the off-delay.
Time base = 0.1 ms:

You can set times from 0.2 ms to 6.5535 s with a resolution of 0.1 ms.

Time base = 1 ms:

You can set times from 1 ms to 65.535 s with a resolution of 1 ms.

Set the on-delay and change when using the short control interface
You specify the on-delay as a value between 0 and 65535 in the parameters.
Configured on-delay = Time base x specified numerical value
Using the factor for the on-delay, you can adjust the assigned time in your control program.
Set the factor between 0 and 255, with a weighting of 0.1:
On-delay = Factor x 0.1 x configured on-delay
If you change the on-delay factor, the new on-delay is activated with the next positive edge
on the digital input DI.

Setting and changing the off-delay

Set the off-delay directly as a numerical value between 0 and 65535 in your control program.
Off-delay = Time base x Specified numerical value
If you change the off-delay factor, the new Off-delay is activated with the next negative edge
on the digital input DI.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

299

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Isochronous mode
Generally applicable information is available in the section "Isochronous mode (Page 267)".
In the "On/Off-delay" operating mode, isochronous mode does not have any influence on the
functionality.

Parameters for the "On/Off-delay" operating mode

Parameter

Meaning

Mode

Set the "On/Off-delay" operating

mode.

Pulse output
Pulse-width modulation
Pulse train
On/Off-delay
Frequency output

Pulse width
modulation

Time base

Use the time base to select the

resolution and the value range
of the on-delay and Off-delay.

0.1 ms
1 ms

0.1 ms

On-delay 1)

The time between a positive

edge of digital input DI and its
output on the digital output DO.
You can change the on-delay
with your control program with
"On-delay factor".

0 to 65535

1)

Value Range

Default

Only if the short control interface is used

If the long control interface is used, enter this value directly in the control interface.

300

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Control and feedback signals of the "On/Off-delay" operating mode

Control and Feedback
Signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel 0
address

Channel 1
address

0 = SW_ENABLE cleared.

Byte 2:

Byte 6:

1 = SW_ENABLE set

Bit 0

Bit 0

Word 0

Word 4

Byte 3

Byte 7

0 = SW_ENABLE cleared.

Byte 4:

Byte 10:

1 = SW_ENABLE set

Bit 0

Bit 0

Word 0

Word 6

Word 2

Word 8

Control signals when the short control interface is used (8 bytes)

Software enable
SW_ENABLE

You must always issue the

software enable in your control
program. If you cancel the
software enable, the current
output sequence will be canceled.

Off-delay

The time between a negative edge With time base 0.1 ms:
of the digital input DI and its output 2 to 65535
on the digital output DO.
With time base 1 ms: 1 bis 65535
If you violate the lower limit of the
range, the off-delay will not
function.

On-delay factor

You can change the assigned ondelay:

Factor: 0 to 255

On-delay = Factor x 0.1 x

configured on-delay

0.2 ms to 65.535 s

On-delay:
If the on-delay is < 0.2 ms or if the
factor = 0, the effective on-delay =
0.
If the on-delay is > 65.535 s, the
on-delay is limited to 65.535 s.

Control signals when the long control interface is used (12 bytes)
Software enable
SW_ENABLE

You must always issue the

software enable in your control
program. If you cancel the
software enable, the current
output sequence will be canceled.

Off-delay

The time between a negative edge With time base 0.1 ms:
of the digital input DI and its output 2 to 65535
on the digital output DO.
With time base 1 ms: 1 to 65535
If you violate the low limit of the
range, the off-delay will not
function.

On-delay

The time between a positive edge With time base 0.1 ms:
of the digital input DI and its output 2 to 65535
on the digital output DO.
With time base 1 ms: 1 to 65535
If you violate the low limit of the
range, the on-delay will not
function.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

301

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions
Control and Feedback
Signals
Feedback signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel 0
address

Channel 1
address

STS_ENABLE

Indicates the status of the

software enable (SW_ENABLE).

0 = software enable blocked

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = software enable issued

Bit 0

Bit 0

Indicates the signal level at the

digital output DO.

0 = signal 0 on digital output DO

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = signal 1 on digital output DO

Bit 1

Bit 1

Indicates the signal level at digital

input DI.

0 = signal 0 on digital input DI

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = signal 1 on digital input DI

Bit 2

Bit 2

ACK_SW_ENABLE

Indicates the status of

SW_ENABLE.

0 = SW_ENABLE cleared.

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

Bit 3

Bit 3

ERR_PULS

Indicates a pulse output error if the 0 = no pulse output error

pulse duration or interpulse period 1 = pulse output error
is too short.

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

Bit 4

Bit 4

SEQ_CNT

Is incremented at DO with each

edge (positive and negative).

0 15

Byte 1:

Byte 5:

Measured value of the

current

No function in this operating

mode.

STS_DO

Note the update rate.

STS_DI

1 = SW_ENABLE set

Bit 0 to 3

Bit 0 to 3

Word 2

Word 6

Input and output signals of the "On/Off-delay" operating mode

Input and Output Signals

Meaning

Value Range

Channel 0
terminal

Channel 1
terminal

The signal of the digital input

DI is output with an on/offdelay on digital output DO by
the 2PULSE.

0 = no pulse

The signal of the digital input

DI is output with an on/offdelay on digital output DO by
the 2PULSE.

0 = no signal

Input signal
Digital input DI

1 = pulse

Output signal
Pulse on the digital output DO

302

1 = signal

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.6

"Frequency output" operating mode

Definition
A square wave signal with a specified frequency is output at the digital output of the
2PULSE.
The output sequence is started on expiration of the configured on-delay on the DO digital
output of the 2PULSE.
+:HQDEOH
RSWLRQDO
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(


6

4

6

4

'2

Frequency

5
2QGHOD\

Figure 5-17

5

676B(1$%/(

)UHTXHQF\RXWSXWUXQQLQJ

2XWSXWYDOXH

Block diagram for "Frequency output" operating mode

Starting the Output Sequence

You must always issue the enable for the output sequence by means of the software enable
(SW_ENABLE 0 1; MANUAL_DO = 0) in your control program.
The ACK_SW_ENABLE feedback bit indicates the software enable pending at the 2PULSE.
You can also set the digital input DI of the 2PULSE as a HW enable with the "Function DI"
parameter.
If you want to work with the software enable and hardware enable at the same time, when
the software enable has been issued, the output sequence starts with the first positive edge
of the hardware enable. Further positive edges of the hardware enable during the current
output sequence are ignored by the 2PULSE.
When the enable is issued (positive edge), the on-delay is started and the STS_ENABLE
set. The frequency output is started on expiration of the on-delay time. The output sequence
runs continuously as long as SW_ENABLE is set.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

303

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Pulse diagram
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(
$&.B6:B(1$%/(
+:HQDEOH
'LJLWDOLQSXW',

7LPHSHULRG

7LPHSHULRG

'LJLWDORXWSXW'2
2QGHOD\

3XOVH ,QWHU
GXUD
SXOVH
WLRQ
SHULRG
2XWSXWYDOXHN+]

2XWSXWYDOXH+]

676B(1$%/(

6WDUWRXWSXWVHTXHQFH

Figure 5-18

Output sequence frequency output

Canceling the output sequence

Deleting the software enable (SW_ENABLE = 0) during the on-delay or the frequency output
cancels the output sequence, and STS_ENABLE and the DO digital output are canceled.
You will then have to restart the output sequence.

Truth Table
Software enable
SW_ENABLE

Hardware enable
(digital input DI)

Digital output DO

STS_ENABLE

Output
sequence

01

0, if on-delay > 0
1, if on-delay = 0

01

Start

01

Not used

0, if on-delay > 0
1, if on-delay = 0

01

Start

Any status

Cancel

Any status

Previous status remains

01

304

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Setting Times Using a Time Base

Use the configured time base to select the resolution and the value range of the on-delay.
Time base = 0.1 ms:

You can set times from 0.2 ms to 6.5535 s with a resolution of 0.1 ms.

Time base = 1 ms:

You can set times from 1 ms to 65.535 s with a resolution of 1 ms.

Setting and Changing the Output Value

You select the range of the output value with the "Output format" parameter.
If your output value is between 1 Hz and 5000 Hz, select the output format "1 Hz".
If your output value is a SIMATIC S7 analog value (between 0 and 27648), select the "S7
analog output" output format. With "S7 analog output" you attain a higher accuracy at the
setpoint specification.
The 2PULSE calculates the frequency according to the following equation:
Frequency = (Setpoint / 27648) 5 kHz
You set the output value directly using your control program. The new frequency value is
applied at the next rising edge of the output.

Output frequency accuracy

The configured output frequency is output with the following accuracy at the digital output
DO:
0.01 Hz at output frequencies of 0.1 Hz to 800 Hz
0.1 Hz at output frequencies > 800 Hz to 2000 Hz
0.5 Hz at output frequencies > 2000 Hz to 5000 Hz

Set the on-delay when using the short control interface

You specify the on-delay as a value between 0 and 65535 in the parameters.
Configured on-delay = Time base x specified numerical value
When the short control interface is used, the factor for the on-delay can be used to adjust the
configured time in your control program. Set the factor between 0 and 255, with a weighting
of 0.1:
On-delay = Factor x 0.1 x configured on-delay

Isochronous mode
Generally applicable information is available in the section "Isochronous mode (Page 267)".
In the "Frequency output" operating mode, isochronous mode does not have any influence
on the functionality.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

305

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Parameters of the "Frequency output" operating mode

Parameter

Meaning

Value range

Operating mode

Set the "Frequency output"

operating mode.

Pulse output
Pulse-width modulation
Pulse train
On/Off-delay
Frequency output

Pulse width
modulation

Time base

Use the time base to select the

resolution and the value range
of the on-delay.

0.1 ms
1 ms

0.1 ms

Output format

Choose between 1 Hz and the

S7 analog output format,
depending on which output
frequency resolution you need.

1 Hz
S7 analog output

1 Hz

Function DI

You can use the digital input DI

as an input or as a HW enable.

Input
HW enable

Input

On-delay 1)

The time from the start of the

output sequence to the output
of the pulse train. You can
change the on-delay in your
control program using the "Ondelay factor".

0 to 65535

1)

Default

Only if the short control interface is used

If the long control interface is used, enter this value directly in the control interface.

306

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Control and feedback signals of the "Frequency output" operating mode

Control and feedback
signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel 0
address

Channel 1
address

Control signals when the short control interface is used (8 bytes)

Software enable
(SW_ENABLE)

Starting and canceling of the

output sequence.

0 = SW_ENABLE canceled
1 = SW_ENABLE set 01 = start
of output sequence; may be
dependent on the hardware
enable

Byte 2:

Byte 6:

Bit 0

Bit 0

Output value

The value that is output in

frequency format on the digital
output DO.

Depending on the output format:

1 Hz: 0 ... 5000
S7 analog output:
0 to 27648

Word 0

Word 4

Byte 3

Byte 7

If you enter an output value >

5000 or 27648, the 2PULSE limits
this to 5000 or 27648.
On-delay factor

The on-delay that has been

assigned parameters can be
changed before the start of the
output sequence:
On-delay = Factor x 0.1 x
configured on-delay

0 to 255
If the on-delay <0.2 ms or if factor
= 0, the effective on-delay is = 0.
If there is an on-delay > 65.535 s,
the on-delay is limited to 65.535 s.

Control signals when the long control interface is used (12 bytes)
Software enable
(SW_ENABLE)

Starting and canceling of the

output sequence.

0 = SW_ENABLE canceled
1 = SW_ENABLE set 01 = start
of output sequence; may be
dependent on the hardware
enable

Byte 4:

Byte 10:

Bit 0

Bit 0

Output value

The value that is output in

frequency format on the digital
output DO.

Depending on the output format:

1 Hz: 0 ... 5000
S7 analog output:
0 to 27648

Word 0

Word 6

Word 2

Word 8

If you enter an output value >

5000 or 27648, the 2PULSE limits
this to 5000 or 27648.
On-delay

The on-delay can be changed

before the start of the output
sequence.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

0 to 65535
On-delay = Time basis x Specified
numerical value

307

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions
Control and feedback
signals
Feedback signals

Meaning

Value range

Channel 0
address

Channel 1
address

STS_ENABLE

Indicates an output sequence is

running.

0 = pulse output blocked

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = pulse output running

Bit 0

Bit 0

Indicates the signal level at the

digital output DO.

0 = Signal 0 on digital output DO

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = Signal 1 on digital output DO

Bit 1

Bit 1

Indicates the signal level at digital

input DI.

0 = Signal 0 on digital input DI

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = Signal 1 on digital input DI

Bit 2

Bit 2

ACK_SW_ENABLE

Indicates the status of

SW_ENABLE.

0 = SW_ENABLE cleared.

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = SW_ENABLE set

Bit 3

Bit 3

SEQ_CNT

No function in this operating

mode.

Byte 1:

Byte 5:

Measured value of the

current

No function in this operating

mode.

STS_DO

Note the update rate.

STS_DI

Bit 0 to 3

Bit 0 to 3

Word 2

Word 6

Input and output signals of the "Frequency output" operating mode

Input and Output Signals

Meaning

Value Range

Channel 0
terminal

Channel 1
terminal

You can select the HW enable

with the "Function DI"
parameter.
The signal of the digital input
DI is then interpreted by the
2PULSE at the start of the
output sequence.

0 = HW enable cleared
1 = HW enable issued
0 1 = Start of the output
sequence; dependent on the
software enable

Input signal
HW enable

Output signal
Frequency on the digital
output DO

308

The frequency is output on the 0 = no pulse

digital output DO.
1 = pulse

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.7

Sequence counter
The 2PULSE has a sequence counter for each channel with which the completed output
sequences are counted.
You can monitor the completion of an output sequence with the sequence counter SEC_CNT
in the feedback interface.
The counter has a width of 4 bits. After an overflow it jumps back to 0.

Function of the sequence counter

The sequence counter has the following function in the individual operating modes:
Pulse output and pulse train
Without hardware enable the counter is set to 1 after completion of the output
sequence.
With hardware enable, the counter is incremented after every completed output
sequence.
On/Off-delay
The counter is incremented at DO with each edge (positive and negative).
Pulse width modulation and frequency output
The counter does not have any function.
When the software enable (SW_ENABLE = 0) is created, the counter is reset to 0.

Application options
The sequence counter can be used in particular for:
Detecting (counting) very short pulses
Counting output sequences in connection with the hardware enable

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

309

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.8

Function: Measurement of current

The measurement of current can be set in a variety of applications for control and
diagnostics purposes. You can read the measured value of the current from the feedback
interface.

Principle of operation
A measurement of current only takes place during the pulse output in the "Pulse width
modulation" and "Pulse train" operating modes. Without a pulse output (at
STS_ENABLE = 0), 0 is supplied as the measured value. The measured value is valid at
STS_ENABLE = 1.
In the "Pulse output", On/Off-delay" and "Frequency output" operating modes, 0 is always
measured as the measured value of the current.
The returned measured value of the current is a mean value of measured values that is
recorded during the duration of a period. At period durations < 5 ms, the interval between
two individual measuring points amounts to a maximum of 40 s. When longer periods are
involved, 128 measuring points per period are always recorded. This results in
correspondingly longer intervals between the measuring points.
In isochronous mode, a new measured value of the current is always made available in the
feedback interface at the moment Ti. In non-isochronous mode, a new measured value of
the current is made available about every 500 s.
Note
In order for the current measurement to work correctly, no freewheeling diode may be
applied to the load.

Measuring range and measured value

The measuring range is set fixed to a rated current of 2 A.
The measured value of the current is supplied as a SIMATIC S7 analog value in the
feedback interface.
A current of 2 A corresponds to the SIMATIC S7 analog value of 27648.
With a parallel connection, a current of 4 A corresponds to the SIMATIC S7 analog value
of 27648.
Measurements of current are possible up to a SIMATIC S7 analog value of 32767. This
corresponds to a current of 2.4 A. Currents exceeding 2 A may only occur briefly.

Accuracy
The accuracy of the measurement of current amounts to 3% of the measuring range.
Note
This accuracy during current measurement can only be achieved if the time period is not
changed during the measurement.

310

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.9

Function: Direct Control of the DO Digital Output

Definition
You can directly control the digital output DO of the 2PULSE to test the actuator you have
connected. To do this, you have to select the function from your control program with the
MANUAL_DO control bit set and SW_ENABLE control bit cleared. The function
Supports you in commissioning a plant
Allows you to utilize an unused channel of the 2PULSE as DO
After you have selected the function, the feedback bits STS_ENABLE and ERR_PULS are
cleared by the 2PULSE, and an active output sequence is aborted. The function takes
precedence over the currently selected operating mode.
You specify the status of the digital output DO with the SET_DO control bit.
When you clear the MANUAL_DO control bit, you deselect the "Direct control of the digital
output DO" function. This deletes the digital output DO. You can then restart an output
sequence with the rising edge of SW_ENABLE.

Control and Feedback Signals/Output Signal

Signals

Meaning

Value range

When the short

control interface is
used (8 bytes)

When the long

control interface is
used (12 bytes)

Channel Channel Channel Channel

1
0
1
0
address address address address
Control signals
SW_ENABLE

MANUAL_DO

SET_DO

To select the function, the

control bit must be
deleted.

0 = SW_ENABLE cleared.

Byte 2:

Byte 6:

Byte 4:

Byte 10:

1 = SW_ENABLE set

Bit 0

Bit 0

Bit 0

Bit 0

You can select and

deselect the function with
the control bit.

0 = direct control of the DO not

selected.

Byte 2:

Byte 6:

Byte 4:

Byte 10:

Bit 1

Bit 1

Bit 1

Bit 1

You use the control bit to

set the status of the digital
output DO.

0 = signal 0 on digital output DO

Byte 2:

Byte 6:

Byte 4:

Byte 10:

1 = signal 1 on digital output DO

Bit 2

Bit 2

Bit 2

Bit 2

1 = direct control of the DO

selected.

Feedback signals
STS_ENABLE

Deleted after the function

has been selected.

0 = pulse output blocked

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = pulse output running

Bit 0

Bit 0

Bit 0

Bit 0

STS_DO

Indicates the signal level

at the digital output DO.

0 = Signal 0 on digital output DO

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = Signal 1 on digital output DO

Bit 1

Bit 1

Bit 1

Bit 1

0 = Signal 0 on digital input DI

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = Signal 1 on digital input DI

Bit 2

Bit 2

Bit 2

Bit 2

Note the update rate.

STS_ DI

Indicates the signal level

at digital input DI.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

311

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions
Signals

Meaning

Value range

When the short

control interface is
used (8 bytes)

When the long

control interface is
used (12 bytes)

Channel Channel Channel Channel

1
0
1
0
address address address address
Output Signal
Digital output
DO

312

The status preset with the 0 = No signal

SET_DO control bit is
1 = Signal
output on the digital output
DO.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.10

Function: Error Detection/Diagnostics

Parameter Assignment Error ERR_PARA

If the 2PULSE cannot identify the parameters as its own, it generates a parameter
assignment error. The two channels are then not assigned parameters.
The 2PULSE slot you configure must match the setup.

Pulse output error ERR_PULS

The 2PULSE detects a channel-specific pulse output error in the pulse output, on/off-delay,
and pulse train modes.
You can find information about causes and responses in the respective operating mode
descriptions and in the section "Technical Specifications for Programming, Reference Lists
(Page 353)".
The pulse output error detected is displayed for the relevant channel with the ERR_PULS
feedback bit.

Short circuit of the encoder supply ERR_24V

The 2PULSE detects a short circuit in the encoder supply that it makes available at terminals
2 and 6.
The short circuit error detected is displayed for the two channels with the ERR_24V feedback
bit.
A drop in the 24 V supply voltage can also result in a short circuit message.

Short circuit digital output ERR_DO

The 2PULSE detects a short circuit on the digital output of the channel.
The short circuit detected is displayed for the relevant channel with the ERR_DO feedback
bit.
Note
If a short circuit occurs, the digital output is able to briefly supply a current substantially
higher than the rated value.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

313

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Diagnostic Message
If a short circuit occurs in the encoder supply or in the digital output, the 2PULSE generates
a diagnostic message for the connected CPU/master. You must enable the "Group
diagnostics" parameter in this case.
Note
Diagnostic messages provide you the information that an error has occurred in one or both
channels of the 2PULSE. You can evaluate the diagnostics with STEP 7.
The diagnostic record DS1 only contains the information for Channel 0. However, a
diagnostic interrupt is also triggered at errors in Channel 1. The feedback signals provide
detailed information about the occurring errors from both channels. Evaluate the feedback
interface in new user programs (see below).

Parameters
Parameter

Meaning

Value Range

Default

Group diagnostics

When group diagnostics is

enabled, the 2PULSE
generates a diagnostic
message for the
CPU/master.

Disable/enable

Disable

Diagnostics DO

The 2PULSE detects a short

circuit of the digital outputs
when "Diagnostics DO" =
On.

Off/on

On

Feedback Signals
Feedback Signals

Meaning

Value Range

Channel 0
address

Channel 1
address

ERR_PARA

Indicates a parameter
assignment error.

0 = no parameter assignment
error

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

Bit 5

Bit 5

0 = no pulse output error

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = pulse output error

Bit 4

Bit 4

0 = no encoder supply short

circuit

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

Bit 7

Bit 7

0 = no digital output short circuit

Byte 0:

Byte 4:

1 = digital output short circuit

Bit 6

Bit 6

1 = parameter assignment error

ERR_PULS
ERR_24V

Indicates a pulse output error.

Indicates a short circuit of the
encoder supply.

1 = encoder supply short circuit

ERR_DO

314

Indicates a short circuit of the

digital output DO.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.11

Parallel connection of both channels

Definition
In order to achieve higher output current, you can connect both channels of the 2PULSE in
parallel. You then obtain a rated current of 4 A. This allows you to also operate final
controlling elements with a higher power requirement directly at the 2PULSE.

Parameter assignment and operation

You can enable parallel connection of the two channels during the configuration in HW
Config by selecting the check box "Parallel connection Channel 0 and 1".
Once enabled, the 2PULSE operates like a single-channel module. All the parameter
assignments and operations via the control interface have to be executed with Channel 0.
Channel 1 cannot be configured and operated.
Feedback signals are also only provided for Channel 0.

Measurement of current
During the measurement of current, the measured values from both channels are averaged
once more. This results in a measuring range up to 4 A.
The measured value of the current is supplied as a SIMATIC S7 analog value in the
feedback interface. A current of 4 A corresponds here to the SIMATIC S7 analog value of
27648.
The accuracy of the current measurement also amounts to 3% of the measuring range in
case of parallel connection.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

315

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

Pin assignment for the parallel connection

The following terminals have to be connected at the terminal module for the parallel
connection of both channels of the 2PULSE:
Terminal 3 and Terminal 7
Terminal 4 and Terminal 8
You then connect the load (e.g. a final controlling element) directly to Terminals 3 and 4 or to
Terminals 7 and 8. The following figure shows a connection layout.
38/6(

6)

70(6DQG
38/6(

(6
''$%

',

9'&

9'&

0
'2

',

'2

&RQQHFWLRQEHWZHHQWKHWHUPLQDOV

Figure 5-19

316

Parallel connection of both channels

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.4 Modes and Functions

5.4.12

Behavior at CPU-Master-STOP

Definition
You can configure the reaction of the 2PULSE to failure of the higher-level controller for the
two channels together.
Response to CPU/master STOP

Channel-specific response and status of the 2PULSE

Turn off DO

Delete the DO digital output

Delete STS_ENABLE and
Terminate the current output sequence

Continue operating mode

The DO digital output remains unchanged

STS_ENABLE remains unchanged and
The current output sequence is continued

DO substitute a value

Output of the channel-specific, substitute value that has been assigned parameters of
the DO digital output
Delete STS_ENABLE and
Terminate the current output sequence

DO keeps last value

The DO digital output remains unchanged

Delete STS_ENABLE and
Terminate the current output sequence

Startup
To start a new output sequence after CPU/master STOP and a set ACK_SW_ENABLE, first
delete SW_ENABLE. Keep deleting until ACK_SW_ENABLE is also deleted.
If the mode is to continue during a change from CPU-/Master-STOP to RUN (startup), the
CPU/Master cannot clear the outputs. Possible solution: In the part of the user program that
is executed during startup, set the "Software enable" (SW_ENABLE = 1) control bit.

Modified Parameter Assignment

The status assumed by the 2PULSE at CPU/master STOP remains even in the case of
parameter assignment or configuration of the ET 200S station. This occurs, for example, at
POWER ON of the CPU/master or the IM 151 or at the resumption of DP transfer.
In "Continue working mode", however, and after loading changed parameters or
configuration of the ET 200S station to the CPU/master, the 2PULSE terminates the
process. As a result, the 2PULSE does the following:
Deletes the DO digital output.
Deletes STS_ENABLE and
Terminates the current output sequence.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

317

2PULSE
5.5 Parameter assignment and compatibility

5.5

Parameter assignment and compatibility

5.5.1

Configuring the 2PULSE

Configuring with HW Config

There are 3 entries for configuring the 2PULSE in HW Config:
2PULSE (6ES7 138-4DD00-0AB0)
Select this entry if you want to operate the 2PULSE in compatibility mode (Page 320).
2PULSE (6ES7 138-4DD01-0AB0)
Using the short control interface
2PULSE ext. control interface (6ES7 138-4DD01-0AB0)
Using the long control interface
Select the control interface in accordance with your requirements:
Short control interface: 8 bytes output data compatible to predecessor module
The control interface uses fewer addresses in the process image.
Long control interface: 12 bytes output data improved controlling possibilities
You can enter the setpoints more conveniently.
All the parameters that you enter in HW Config are subjected to a plausibility check. If
parameters are invalid, the ERR_PARA bit is set and the corresponding channel diagnostics
provided.

Configuring with GSD file

The following rules have to be observed when configuring with a GSD file:
In the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode:
With a time base of 0.1 ms, the values 0 and 1 are not permitted for the time period.
With a time base of 1 ms, the value 0 is not permitted for the time period.
Only values up to half of the time period are allowed for the minimum / pulse duration.
In the "Pulse train" operating mode:
With a time base of 0.1 ms, the values 0 and 1 are not permitted for the time period.
With a time base of 1 ms, the value 0 is not permitted for the time period.
The value 0 is not permitted for the pulse duration (irrespective of the configured time
base).
In the "On/Off-delay" operating mode
The "Function DI" parameter may not be set to HW enable.
With a parallel connection of both channels, all parameters of the second channel have to
be set to 0.

318

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.5 Parameter assignment and compatibility
The "DO substitute value" parameter may only have a value not equal to 0 if the
"Response to CPU/Master stop" parameter is set to "DO switch substitute value".
Different channel-specific parameters are activated depending on the selected operating
mode. The following table lists the active parameters for the individual operating modes.
Parameters that are not listed must be set to 0.
Operating mode

Short control interface

Long control interface

Pulse output

Time base
On-delay
Function DI
Diagnostics DO

Time base
Function DI
Diagnostics DO

Pulse width modulation

Time base
On-delay
Minimum / Pulse duration
Time period
Output format
Function DI
Diagnostics DO

Time base
On-delay
Minimum / Pulse duration
Output format
Function DI
Diagnostics DO

Pulse train

Time base
On-delay
Minimum / Pulse duration
Time period
Function DI
Diagnostics DO

Time base
Function DI
Diagnostics DO

On/Off-delay

Time base
On-delay
Diagnostics DO

Time base
Diagnostics DO

Frequency output

Time base
On-delay
Output format
Function DI
Diagnostics DO

Time base
Output format
Function DI
Diagnostics DO

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

319

2PULSE
5.5 Parameter assignment and compatibility

5.5.2

Compatibility of the 2PULSE with predecessor versions

Compatibility mode
If you
Have selected the entry 2PULSE (6ES7 138-4DD00-0AB0) when configuring in HW
Config
Have plugged the 2PULSE (6ES7 138-4DD01-0AB0) into a slot that is configured for the
2PULSE (6ES7 138-4DD00-0AB0)
The 2PULSE (6ES7 138-4DD01-0AB0) then operates in compatibility mode.
In compatibility mode, the 2PULSE has the functional differences listed in the table.
2PULSE

320

Not in compatibility
mode

In compatibility mode

Return of measured values of the current

Yes

No

Minimum pulse duration

100 s

200 s

"Frequency output" operating mode

Yes

No

Sequence counter for counting output

sequences

Yes

No

Parallel connection of both channels

Yes

No

Isochronous mode

Yes

No

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.6 Diagnostics

5.6

Diagnostics

5.6.1

Diagnostics using the LED display

LED display at the 2PULSE

6)

Group error (red)

Status display for digital input (green)
Status display for the digital output (green)

Status and error displays by means of LEDs on the 2PULSE

The table below shows the status and error displays on the 2PULSE.
Event (LEDs)
SF

Cause

Remedy

On

No parameter assignment. There is a

diagnostic message.
On

Check the error bits types in the

feedback interface. Evaluate the
diagnostics data.

Input DI0 on Channel 0 activated.

On

Input DI1 on Channel 1 activated.

On

Output DO0 on Channel 0 activated.

On Output DO1 on Channel 1 activated.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

321

2PULSE
5.6 Diagnostics

5.6.2

Error types
For information on the structure of the channel-related diagnostics, refer to the manual on
the interface module used in your ET 200S station.

2PULSE error types

The following table shows the error types on the 2PULSE.
Error class
1D

00001: Short circuit

Meaning

Remedy

Short circuit of the sensor supply or the

actuator.

Check the wiring to the switches and

actuators. Correct the process wiring.

A drop in the 24 V supply voltage can

also result in this error message.
9D

01001: Error

Internal module error occurred.

Replace the module.

16D

10000: Parameter assignment

error

Parameters have not been assigned to

the module.

Correct the parameter assignment.

A simple error evaluation is also possible through the corresponding bits in the feedback
interface (Page 353).

322

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

5.7

Application Examples

5.7.1

Overview

Introduction
The following application examples give you an overview of possible uses for the 2PULSE in
different processes.
You use the 2PULSE in various modes according to your process-related requirements.
The table below presents the possible modes for selected technological processes:
Applications/Technological Processes

Mode

Filling of liquids

Pulse output

Heating a liquid

Pulse-width modulation

Packing piece goods

Pulse train

Applying a protective layer

On/Off-delay

Current regulation of a valve

Pulse width modulation

Due to the highly complex nature of these technological processes, each application
example only represents part of a process.
This part illustrates the principle method of operation of the 2PULSE for the selected task.
Assumed prerequisites allow you to evaluate how you can use the 2PULSE optimally in your
process.

Additional Applications
Other possible uses are described in this section.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

323

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

5.7.2

Example: Filling Liquids

Description
Filling is started as soon as a container is under the valve. The valve is opened for a preset
pulse duration by means of the 24 V control signal. The amount of liquid is proportional to
the specified pulse duration.
The 2PULSE generates the 24 V control signal at its digital output for the pulse duration you
have specified. After it has been filled, the container is moved along.

3XPS

9DOYH

,QLWLDWRU

Figure 5-20

9FRQWUROVLJQDO
IURP38/6(

9HQDEOHVLJQDO
WR38/6(

Filling of liquids

Requirements
The volume of liquid to be filled is proportional to the time the valve is open.
The cross-section of the feeder pipe cannot be changed.
The valve only has the two positions OPEN and CLOSED.
The minimum pulse duration must be longer than the on/off times specified by the
manufacturer.

324

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Pulse Output Mode

Use channel 0 of the 2PULSE in pulse output mode for the filling process. In this mode, the
2PULSE generates a pulse at the DO digital output (24 V control signal) for the specifiable
pulse duration to control the valve.

Procedure
1. Start of the filling process: To start the process, use the software enable (SW_ENABLE)
on your control program. The 2PULSE uses the 24 V enable signal (DI digital input) to
check whether the container is correctly positioned. Then open the valve using the control
program (SW_ENABLE 01) and start the filling process.
2. Monitoring the filling process: The error detection/diagnostic function allows you to check
in the program that the process is running correctly.
3. End of the filling process: You can find out when the process has finished in the program
by evaluating STS_ENABLE.
9HQDEOHVLJQDO
',GLJLWDOLQSXW
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(
9FRQWUROVLJQDO
'2GLJLWDORXWSXW

676B(1$%/(

3XOVHGXUDWLRQ PV
&RQWDLQHULV
SRVLWLRQHG

Figure 5-21

)LOOLQJVWDUWV

)LOOLQJHQGV

&RQWDLQHULV
PRYHGDZD\

Flow Diagram for the Filling Process

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

325

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Parameters
The following parameters are required for channel 0 of the 2PULSE to fill liquids in pulse
output mode.
Table 5- 1

Parameter List for the Filling Process

Parameters

Set Value

Meaning

Group diagnosis

Enable

The following errors trigger a diagnostic

message:
Short circuit digital output DO
Short circuit of the encoder supply

Diagnostics DO 0

On

The 2PULSE detects the short circuit error at

the DO 0 digital output.

Response to CPU/master STOP

Turn off DO 0

Mode

Pulse output

Time base

1 ms

All the preset times are specified at a

resolution of 1 ms.

DI function 0

Input

The digital input is used to establish whether

the container is correctly positioned.

On-delay

The valve is opened immediately with

SW_ENABLE = 1

The additional parameters of channel 0 of the 2PULSE have no effect on the pulse output
mode.
The parameters for channel 1 are not relevant in this application example.

326

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Programming/flow diagrams
Below you will find a section from a STEP 7 STL program.
The configured start address of the inputs and outputs of the 2PULSE is 256. Configured
with a short control interface.
You use this part of the program to start the filling process. To do this, memory marker
M30.0 must be set.
The pulse duration in this example is 5000 ms.
STL

Description

Block:
L

PEB256

MB20

Read the feedback messages from channel 0 of the 2PULSE

5000

PAW256

MB10

M20.2

Container is positioned

M30.0

Start of the filling process

M10.0

Set SW_ENABLE=1

MB10

Write control signals to channel 0 of the 2PULSE

PAB258

Write a pulse duration of 5000 ms to channel 0 of the 2PULSE

Generate SW_ENABLE

Wiring / Terminal Assignment Diagram

38/6(

6)

70(6DQG
38/6(

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO

(6
''$%

9HQDEOHVLJQDO
,QLWLDWRU

',

',

9'&

9'&

9FRQWUROVLJQDO
0

9DOYH

'2

Figure 5-22

0
'2

Terminal Assignment of the 2PULSE for Filling Liquids

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

327

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

5.7.3

Example: Heating a Liquid

Description
A liquid is heated with an electrical heating element. The energy needed to do this is
supplied to the heating element by a switching element (a contactor, for example).
The 2PULSE generates a 24 V control signal on its digital output for the switching element.
The temperature of the heating element is determined by the on/off length of the 24 V control
signal.
The longer the 24 V control signal is switched on, the longer the heating process and
therefore the greater the rise in temperature of the fluid.

(OHFWULFDOKHDWLQJ
HOHPHQW

Figure 5-23

9FRQWUROVLJQDO
IURPWKH38/6(

Heating a Liquid

Requirements
The heating element only has two switching states: ON or OFF.
The actual heating current corresponds to the ratio of the on/off duration of the 24 V
control signal.
The minimum pulse or minimum interpulse period must be greater than the response
times of the switching element and heating element.

Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) Mode

Use channel 0 of the 2PULSE in pulse-width modulation mode to control the heating
element. In this mode, the 2PULSE generates a pulse train on the digital output DO (24 V
control signal) with a specifiable ratio of pulse duration/period to control the switching
element.

Sequence
1. Starting heating process: To start the heating process, use the software enable
(SW_ENABLE) in your control program.

328

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples
2. Monitoring heating process: The error detection/diagnostic function allows you to check
via the program that the heating element is being controlled correctly.
Software enable
(SW_ENABLE)

24 V control signal
(DO digital output)
STS_ENABLE

Heating
process starts

Figure 5-24

Flow Diagram for Heating a Liquid

Parameters
The following parameters are required for channel 0 of the 2PULSE to heat a liquid in pulsewidth modulation mode.
Table 5- 2

Parameter List for Heating a Liquid

Parameter

Set Value

Meaning

Group diagnostics

Enable

The following errors trigger a diagnostic message:

Short circuit digital output
Short circuit of the encoder supply

Diagnostics DO 0

On

The 2PULSE detects the short circuit error on the digital

output DO 0.

Response to CPU/master STOP

Turn off DO 0

Mode

Pulse-width modulation

Output format

Per mill

The output value is specified in Per mill (0 to 1000)

Time base

1 ms

All the preset times are specified at a resolution of 1 ms.

Function DI 0

Input

The digital input is not required for this application

On-delay

The 24 V control signal is immediately output with

SW_ENABLE=1

Minimum pulse duration

500

Minimum pulse duration:

This is 500 ms in the selected time base; this also applies
to the minimum interpulse period

Period

30000

This is 30 s in the selected time base

The parameters for channel 1 are not relevant in this application example.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

329

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Programming/Flow Diagram
Below you will find a section from a STEP 7 STL program.
The configured start address of the inputs and outputs of the 2PULSE is 256. Configured
with a short control interface.
This program section starts the heating process. To do this, memory bit M30.0 must be set.
You provide the output value in memory word MW32.
STL

Description

Block:
L

PEB256

MB20

Read the feedback messages from Channel 0 of the 2PULSE

MW32

PAW256

10

PAB259

MB10

M30.0

Start of heating process

M10.0

Set SW_ENABLE=1

MB10

Write control signals to Channel 0 of the 2PULSE

PAB258

Write output value to channel 0 of the 2PULSE

Write period factor 10 x 0.1 to channel 0 of the 2PULSE

Generate control signal SW_ENABLE

Wiring / Terminal Assignment Diagram

38/6(

6)

70(6DQG
38/6(

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO

(6
''$%

',

',

9'&

9'&

9FRQWUROVLJQDO
&RQWDFWRU

0
'2

Figure 5-25

330

'2

Terminal Assignment of the 2PULSE for the Heating of a Liquid

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Additional Applications
Limit-value monitoring of the temperature: To monitor the limits of the temperature of the
medium, use a temperature sensor evaluated by an analog module. You can monitor the
temperature with your control program.
Temperature control: To control the temperature of the medium, use a temperature sensor
evaluated by an analog module. You can use one of the software controllers of SIMATIC S7
to do this. Pass on the manipulated variable calculated by the software closed-loop controller
directly to the 2PULSE using your control program. If you require separate actuators for
heating and cooling, use the second channel of the 2PULSE. If you detect a negative
manipulated variable in your control program, pass on the value to the second channel of the
2PULSE.
Heating up a liquid with a heat exchanger: Basic actuators that only have two end settings
(OPEN/CLOSED) create an almost continuous manipulated variable through the control of
the 24 V control signal. This will enable you to control, for example, the flow through a heat
exchanger using a solenoid valve.

+HDWH[FKDQJHU

6ROHQLGYDOYH

9FRQWUROVLJQDO
IURPWKH38/6(

Figure 5-26

Using a Solenoid Valve to Control the Flow

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

331

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

5.7.4

Example: Packing Piece Goods

Description
Packing is started as soon as a folding box from conveyor 1 is in the correct position. The 24
V control signal controls the pusher and, when the compartmentalized conveyor is in
operation, pushes the piece goods into the folding box. Each pulse corresponds to a
complete movement of the pusher. The next movement of the pusher begins at the next
pulse from the pulse train.
The number of items that have to be packed corresponds to the number of output pulses.
The 2PULSE generates the 24 V control signal on its digital output DO with the number of
pulses you have specified. After the piece goods have been packed, the folding box is
moved on.
Counting begins from the start again when a new folding box passes the initiator.
9FRQWUROVLJQDO
IURPWKH38/6(

3XVKHU

&RPSDUWPHQWDOL]HG
FRQYH\RU

)ROGLQJ
ER[

&RQYH\RU

Figure 5-27

)ROGLQJ
ER[

)ROGLQJ
ER[

,QLWLDWRU

9HQDEOHVLJQDO
WRWKH38/6(

Packing Piece Goods

Requirements
Identical piece goods
Repetition rate depends on the conveyor behavior
Constant speed of the compartmentalized conveyor during pulse output
The pulse duration and interpulse period must be longer than the response time of the
pusher.

332

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Pulse Train Mode

Use channel 0 of the 2PULSE in pulse train mode to pack piece goods. In this mode, the
2PULSE generates a specifiable number of pulses on the digital output DO to control the
pusher. The pulse duration and period of the output signal can be adjusted.

Sequence
1. Starting the packing process: To enable the start, use the software enable (SW_ENABLE
01) in your control program. The 2PULSE uses the 24 V enable signal (HW enable,
digital input DI) to tell whether the folding box is correctly positioned and then starts the
pusher.
2. Monitoring the packing process: The error detection/diagnostic function allows you to
check via the program that the packing process is running correctly.
3. End of the packing process: By evaluating STS_ENABLE, you can find out when the
preset number of goods has been packed.
9HQDEOHVLJQDO
+:HQDEOH
',GLJLWDOLQSXW
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(
9FRQWUROVLJQDO
'2GLJLWDORXWSXW

676B(1$%/(

7KHIROGLQJER[
LVLQSRVLWLRQ
WKHSXVKHU
VWDUWV

Figure 5-28

3UHVHWQXPEHURI
JRRGVSDFNHG

)ROGLQJER[LV
PRYHGDZD\

Flow Diagram for the Packing of Piece Goods

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

333

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Parameters
The following parameters are required for channel 0 of the 2PULSE to pack piece goods in
pulse train mode.
Table 5- 3

Parameter List for the Packing of Piece Goods

Parameter

Set Value

Meaning

Group diagnostics

Enable

The following errors trigger a diagnostic

message:
Short circuit digital output
Short circuit of the encoder supply

Diagnostics DO 0

On

The 2PULSE detects the short circuit error on

the digital output DO 0.

Response to CPU/master STOP

Turn off DO 0

Operating mode

Pulse train

Time base

1 ms

Function DI 0

HW enable

On-delay

The pusher is controlled immediately with the

software enable.

Minimum pulse duration

500

This is 500 ms in the selected time base

Period

1000

This is 1 s in the selected time base. This

results in an interpulse period of 500 ms.

All the preset times are specified at a

resolution of 1 ms.

The parameters for Channel 1 are not relevant in this application example.

334

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Programming/Flow Diagram
Below you will find a section from a STEP 7 STL program.
The configured start address of the inputs and outputs of the 2PULSE is 256. Configured
with a short control interface.
You can use this program section to start the packing process (5 pieces). To do this,
memory bit M30.0 must be set.
The HW enable then starts the pulse train.
STL

Description

Block
L

PEB256

MB20

Read the feedback messages from Channel 0 of the 2PULSE

PAW256

10

PAB259

Generate control signal SW_ENABLE

MB10

Enable the packing process

M30.0

M10.0

Set SW_ENABLE=1

MB10

Write control signals to Channel 0 of the 2PULSE

PAB258

Write the number of pieces (5) to channel 0 of the 2PULSE

Write period factor 10 x 0.1 to Channel 0 of the 2PULSE

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

335

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Wiring / Terminal Assignment Diagram

38/6(

6)

70(6DQG
38/6(

&KDQQHO









&KDQQHO

(6
''$%

9HQDEOHVLJQDO
,QLWLDWRU

',





',

9'&





9'&









9FRQWUROVLJQDO
3XVKHU

0
'2

Figure 5-29

336

0
'2

Terminal Assignment of the 2PULSE for the Packing of Piece Goods

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

5.7.5

Example: Applying a Protective Layer

Description
Metal parts are to be covered with a wax layer. The conveyor belt moves at a constant
speed. As soon as a metal part passes the initiator, the valve is opened. The distance the
item and the wax have to cover is proportional to the time.
The 2PULSE receives a 24 V enable signal from the initiator. The 2PULSE then generates a
24 V control signal at its digital output that opens the valve. The valve remains open while
the Initiator sends the 24 V enable signal to the 2PULSE.
To ensure that the wax hits the metal at the optimum time, a corresponding on/off-delay is
required.

3XPS
9FRQWUROVLJQDO
IURPWKH38/6(
9DOYH

,QLWLDWRU

Figure 5-30

9HQDEOHVLJQDOWR
WKH38/6(

Applying a protective layer

Requirements
The item is moved at a constant and quantifiable speed. (The distance is proportional to
the time.)
The valve only has the two positions OPEN and CLOSED.
The minimum pulse duration must be longer than the on/off times specified by the
manufacturer.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

337

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

On/Off-Delay Mode
Use channel 0 of the 2PULSE in on/off-delay mode to control the valve. In this mode, the
2PULSE generates a 24 V control signal at its DO digital output to control the valve. This 24
V control signal is switched on and off with the 24 V enable signal.

Sequence
1. Starting the procedure: To start the process, use the software enable (SW_ENABLE) on
your control program. The 2PULSE uses the 24 V enable signal (DI digital input) to check
whether a metal object is positioned at the initiator. The valve is opened on expiration of
the on-delay. If the metal object goes past the initiator, the valve is closed after the offdelay has expired.
2. Monitoring the procedure: The error detection/diagnostic function allows you to check by
means of a program that the valve is being controlled correctly.
3. End of the procedure: You can tell on the program by evaluating the STS_DO (status of
the 24 V control signal) when the process has ended.
6RIWZDUHHQDEOH
6:B(1$%/(
9HQDEOHVLJQDO
',GLJLWDOLQSXW
9FRQWUROVLJQDO
'2GLJLWDORXWSXW

676B(1$%/(

0HWDOREMHFW
DWWKHLQLWLDWRU

Figure 5-31

338

9DOYHRSHQ

0HWDOREMHFW
SDVWWKHLQLWLDWRU

&ORVHYDOYH

Flow Diagram for Applying a Protective Layer

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Parameters
The following parameters are required for channel 0 of the 2PULSE to apply a protective
layer in on/off-delay mode.
Table 5- 4

Parameter List for Applying a Protective Layer

Parameters

Set Value

Meaning

Group diagnosis

Enable

The following errors trigger a diagnostic

message:
Short circuit digital output
Short circuit of the encoder supply

Diagnostics DO 0

On

The 2PULSE detects the short circuit

error at the DO 0 digital output.

Response to CPU/master STOP

Turn off DO

Operating mode

On/Off-delay

Time base

1 ms

All the preset times are specified at a

resolution of 1 ms.

On-delay

500

The valve is switched on after an ondelay of 500 ms.

The additional parameters of Channel 0 of the 2PULSE have no effect on on/off-delay mode.
The parameters for channel 1 are not relevant in this application example.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

339

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Programming/Flow Diagram
Below you will find a section from a STEP7 STL program.
The configured start address of the inputs and outputs of the 2PULSE is 256. Configured
with a short control interface.
You use this part of the program to start the process. To do this, memory marker M30.0 must
be set. Set up the off-delay in memory word MW32.
STL

Description

Block:
L

PEB256

MB20

Read the feedback messages from channel 0 of the 2PULSE

MW32

PAW256

10

PAB259

MB10

M30.0

Heating process starts

M10.0

Set SW_ENABLE=1

MB10

Write control signals to channel 0 of the 2PULSE

PAB258

Write off-delay to channel 0 of the 2PULSE

Write on-delay factor 10 x 0.1 to channel 0 of the 2PULSE

Generate SW_ENABLE control signal

Wiring / Terminal Assignment Diagram

38/6(

6)

70(6DQG
38/6(

&KDQQHO

&KDQQHO

(6
''$%

9HQDEOHVLJQDO
,QLWLDWRU

',

',

9'&

9'&

9FRQWUROVLJQDO
9DOYH

0
'2

Figure 5-32

340

0
'2

Terminal Assignment of the 2PULSE for Applying a Protective Layer

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

5.7.6

Current regulation of a valve

Preliminary remark
In order to successfully design a control loop for current regulation of a valve, corresponding
knowledge of control technology and the concrete control task is required.

Description
A proportional valve is used to control the pressure in a vessel. In order to compensate for
thermal effects in the valve, it is addressed with a controlled current. Together with the
higher-level control loop (pressure control), a cascade control system results in which the
current regulation of the valve forms the inner component. The structure of the higher-level
pressure control is not addressed in this example.
The valve is controlled directly through the 24 V control signal of the 2PULSE. Pulse width
modulation is selected as the operating mode. The execution of the current measurement
required for the control is integrated in the 2PULSE.
For the higher-level pressure control, an analog input module detects the data from a
pressure sensor mounted correspondingly. The pressure measured values determined are
input to the pressure regulator that runs on the CPU.
In order to achieve particularly high-performance control, 2PULSE can also be operated in
isochronous mode (see section "Isochronous mode (Page 267)").

3UHVVX
UH
VHQVRU

3XPS

7RWKH
SURFHVV
9FRQWUROVLJQDO
IURP38/6(

3URSRUWLRQDOYDOYH

3XOVHSDXVHUDWLR
&XUUHQW
FRQWUROOHU

0HDVXUHGYDOXHRIWKHFXUUHQW 38/6(

&38

3UHVVXUH
FRQWUROOHU

Figure 5-33

3UHVVXUHPHDVXUHGYDOXH

$QDORJ
LQSXW
PRGXOH

Application example with current-controlled valve

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

341

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Requirements
A valve suitable for controlling (proportional valve)
Suitable electric data of the valve (24 V, max. 2 A or 4 A with parallel connection of both
channels of the 2PULSE)
When designing the control loop, take the additional data of the valve into consideration,
in particular the time constant of the contained inductance and the manufacturer's
recommendation regarding the time period of the PWM signal.

Time period and control cycle

Select a time period less than or equal to the cycle time of the controller. For optimal
control quality, determine the cycle time of the controller on the basis of the time constant
of the inductance.
Do not change the time period during operation.

Parameters
The following parameters are required for Channel 0 of the 2PULSE for the current
regulation of a valve with the "Pulse width modulation" operating mode.
Table 5- 5

Parameter list for current regulation of a valve

Parameter

Set value

Meaning

Group diagnostics

Enable

The following errors trigger a diagnostic message:

Short circuit digital output
Short circuit of the encoder supply

Diagnostics DO 0

On

The 2PULSE detects the short circuit error on the digital

output DO 0.

Response to CPU/master STOP

Turn off DO 0

Operating mode

Pulse width modulation

Output format

S7 analog output

Time base

0.1 ms

Function DI 0

Input

The digital input is not required for this application.

On-delay

The on-delay is not required for this application.

Minimum pulse duration

A minimum pulse duration has a negative affect on

control. 1)

Time period

50

In this example, 5 ms are set for the time period of the

PWM signal. 1)

1)

This means that the corresponding output of the

controller can be used without further conversion.

When setting this parameter, take the recommendations of the valve manufacturer into consideration.

The parameters for Channel 1 are not relevant in this application example.

342

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Programming/flow diagrams
Below you will find a section from a STEP 7 STL program.
Take the following points into consideration:
The configured start address of the inputs and outputs of the 2PULSE is 256. Configured
with a short control interface.
The standard block FB 41 with DB 1 as the instance data block is used as the controller.
The differential component of the controller is deactivated. The block is therefore only
used as a PI controller. The FB 41 "CONT_C" is contained in the "Standard Library"
supplied with STEP 7 in the "PID Control Blocks" directory. Detailed information about
FB 41 is available in the System and Standard Functions
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1214574) reference manual.
The following example program does not provide for an explicit enable. The controller
starts operating immediately after the CPU start.
NOTICE
Therefore, take the required safety precautionary measures for your real system.

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

343

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples
First, you have to initialize the controller at a restart with the following STL program in
OB 100. Adapt the parameters of the FB 41 as required. The program furthermore sets the
factor for the time period to "10" (meaning that the active factor is 1.0) and sets the
SW_ENABLE bit to "1". This is used by the 2PULSE to start operation.
STL

Description

CALL FB41,DB1

Reset controller block

COM_RST

:=TRUE

MAN_ON

:=FALSE

PVPER_ON

:=TRUE

P_SEL

:=TRUE

I_SEL

:=TRUE

INT_HOLD

:=FALSE

I_ITL_ON

:=FALSE

D_SEL

:=FALSE

CYCLE

:=T#5MS

SP_INT

:=0.000000e+000

PV_IN

:=

PV_PER

:=

MAN

:=

GAIN

:=2.000000e+000

TI

:=T#10MS

TD

:=

TM_LAG

:=

DEADB_W

:=

LMN_HLM

:=1.000000e+002

LMN_LLM

:=0.000000e+000

PV_FAC

:=1.000000e+000

PV_OFF

:=0.000000e+000

LMN_FAC

:=1.000000e+000

LMN_OFF

:=0.000000e+000

I_ITLVAL

:=0.000000e+000

DISV

:=

LMN

:=

LMN_PER

:=

QLMN_HLM

:=

QLMN_LLM

:=

LMN_P

:=

LMN_I

:=

LMN_D

:=

PV

:=

ER

:=

10

PAB 259

PAB 258

344

Set the factor for the time period to 10

Set SW_ENABLE to 1

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples
Afterwards, you have to call the control block cyclically in a cyclic interrupt OB (OB 30 to
OB 38). The cycle time of the cyclic interrupt OB has to be made known to the FB 41 using
the parameter CYCLE, in the above example 5 ms. When the controller is called, the
measured value of the current and the PWM setpoint of the 2PULSE are interconnected
directly with the controller. Other cyclic calls are not necessary.
STL

Description

CALL FB41,DB1
COM_RST

:=FALSE

MAN_ON

:=

PVPER_ON

:=

P_SEL

:=

I_SEL

:=

INT_HOLD

:=

I_ITL_ON

:=

D_SEL

:=

CYCLE

:=

SP_INT

:=

PV_IN

:=

PV_PER

:=PEW258

MAN

:=

GAIN

:=

TI

:=

TD

:=

TM_LAG

:=

DEADB_W

:=

LMN_HLM

:=

LMN_LLM

:=

PV_FAC

:=

PV_OFF

:=

LMN_FAC

:=

LMN_OFF

:=

I_ITLVAL

:=

DISV

:=

LMN

:=

LMN_PER

:=PAW256

QLMN_HLM

:=

QLMN_LLM

:=

LMN_P

:=

LMN_I

:=

LMN_D

:=

PV

:=

ER

:=

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

345

2PULSE
5.7 Application Examples

Monitoring and setting the control

With a variable table, you can monitor or set all the important parameters of the control. If,
for example, you change the DB1.SP_INT setpoint, you see how the measured value of the
current in DB1.PV responds. Note that certain values of the DB 1 are already assigned when
called in OB 100.
The following table shows an example of a variable table.
Address

Display format

Description

DB1.SP_INT

FLOATING POINT

Setpoint of the current (0.0 to 100.0)

DB1.PV

FLOATING POINT

Controller-internal representation of the measured

value of the current (0.0 to 100.0)

DB1.GAIN

FLOATING POINT

Proportional gain of the controller

DB1.TI

FLOATING POINT

Integration time of the controller

Additional optimization possibilities

Depending on the concrete implementation, the master control behavior of the current
regulator can be improved by a precontrol. In the simplest case the setpoint of the current
multiplied by a constant factor can be added to the controller output.
Depending on the application, manual operation or controlled starting and stopping of the
control is required. The corresponding integrated functions of the FB 41 can be used to
this purpose.
The data transfer at the fieldbus causes dead times. In isochronous mode, you can
achieve a state in which these dead times are constant. This makes a more aggressive
setting of the controller parameters possible, thus improving the control quality.

Wiring / Terminal Assignment Diagram

38/6(

6)

70(6DQG
38/6(

&KDQQHO









&KDQQHO

(6
''$%

',
24 VDC

















',
24 VDC

9FRQWUROVLJQDO
9DOYH

0
'2

Figure 5-34

346

0
'2

Terminal assignment of the 2PULSE for the current regulation of a valve

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.8 Technical Specifications of the 2PULSE, Terminal Assignment

5.8

Technical Specifications of the 2PULSE, Terminal Assignment

Overview
General technical specifications
Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

15 81 52

Weight

Approx. 40 g

Data for Specific Modules

Number of Channels

Voltages, Currents, Potentials

Rated load voltage L+ (from the power module)
Reverse polarity protection

24 VDC
Yes 1)

Galvanic isolation
Between the channels
Between the channels and backplane bus

No
Yes

Permissible potential difference

Between different circuits

75 VDC, 60 VAC

Insulation tested with

500 VDC

Encoder supply
Output voltage
Output current

L+ -0.8 V

Current consumption
From the backplane bus
From load voltage L+ (no load)

max. 10 mA

Power loss of the 2PULSE

Typ. 1.8 W

Max. 500 mA (Total current at terminals 2 and

6), short circuit proof

Approx. 30 mA

Data for the Digital Inputs

Input voltage
Rated value
For signal "1"
For signal "0"

24 VDC
11 V to 30 V
-30 V to 5 V

Input current
with "1" signal

10 mA (typically)

Minimum pulse duration/interpulse period

25 s

Maximum response time

100 s

Input characteristic

In accordance with IEC 1131, Part 2, Type 2

Connection of 2-wire BEROs

Permitted residual current

Possible

Shielded cable length

Max. 100 m

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2 mA

347

2PULSE
5.8 Technical Specifications of the 2PULSE, Terminal Assignment
General technical specifications
Data for the Digital Outputs
Output voltage
with "1" signal

Minimum L+ - 1 V

Output current
with "1" signal
Rated value
Permitted Range
With "0" signal (residual current)
Measurement of current

Accuracy

2 A 2) (4 A at parallel connection)
7 mA...2 A
max. 0.1 mA
Yes, in the "Pulse width modulation" and "Pulse
train" operating modes
3%

Minimum pulse duration

In compatibility mode

100 s

Accuracy

(period duration x 100 ppm) 100 s 3)

Output delay (with resistive load)

At "1" to "0" transitions
At "1" to "0" transitions

max. 100 s

Lamp load

Maximum 10 W

200 s

max. 200 s

Control of a digital input

Yes

Switching frequency

Up to 5 kHz

4)

Take the technical specifications of your

connected load into consideration.
Limitation (internal) of the inductive circuit
interruption voltage

L+ -(50 V ... 65 V)

Short circuit protection for output

Response threshold

Yes

Cable lengths
Unshielded
Shielded

Typ. 10 A to 16 A
600 m
1000 m

Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics

348

Status indicators

Green LED for DI 0, DI 1, DO 0, DO 1

Diagnostic functions
Group error
Diagnostic information readable

Red LED "SF"

Yes

1)

Polarity reversal can lead to the digital outputs being switched through.

2)

See the figures below

3)

With a load of 50

4)

Asymetrical edge slopes appear to be a higher percentage when switching the outputs on and
off at higher frequencies

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.8 Technical Specifications of the 2PULSE, Terminal Assignment
The figures below show you the maximum permissible output current in relation to the
ambient temperature and the frequency.






$

$

$

$

$

$

$

$

N+]PV
FRQWLQXRXVO\RQ

$

N+]V

$

$

&XUUHQW$

$

$ N+]V
$

N+]V








$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&

Figure 5-35

Resistive Load - both channels independent, PWM 50/50





$

$
$



$
$

$
$

$ FRQWLQXRXVO\RQ
$ N+]PV
$

N+]V

&XUUHQW$

$

$
$







$

N+]V
N+]V



$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&

Figure 5-36

Resistive Load - both channels independent, PWM 90/10

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

349

2PULSE
5.8 Technical Specifications of the 2PULSE, Terminal Assignment

N+]PV



$

$ RU

$

FRQWLQXRXVO\RQ
$ N+]V
$ N+]V

$


$
$

&XUUHQW$

$

N+]V









$PELHQWWHPSDUDWXUHr&

Figure 5-37

Resistive Load only one channel, PWM 50/50





$
$

N+]PV

$
$

$ RU

FRQWLQXRXVO\RQ

$

$

$


$

$


$

&XUUHQW$

N+]V
N+]V

N+]V









$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&

Figure 5-38

350

Resistive Load only one channel, PWM 90/10

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.8 Technical Specifications of the 2PULSE, Terminal Assignment


$

$

$

$
$

&XUUHQW$

$
$

$
$

$

$

N+]PV
FRQWLQXRXVO\RQ
N+]V

$

N+]V

$
$

N+]V







$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&

Figure 5-39

Resistive Load both channels in parallel, PWM 50/50




$

$

$

$

$ FRQWLQXRXVO\RQ

$

$

$ N+]PV
$

&XUUHQW$

$

N+]V

$
$



N+]V



$ N+]V



$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHr&

Figure 5-40

Resistive Load both channels in parallel, PWM 90/10

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

351

2PULSE
5.8 Technical Specifications of the 2PULSE, Terminal Assignment

Terminal Assignment
The following figure shows the terminal assignment for the 2PULSE.
View

Terminal Assignment

Meaning
Channel 0: Terminal 1 to 4
Channel 1: Terminal 5 to 8

38/6(

24 VDC: Encoder supply

M: Chassis ground

6)

DI: Input Signal

70(6DQG
38/6(

&KDQQHO









DO: Output Signal

(Maximum 2 A per channel)

&KDQQHO

(6
''$%





9'&





9'&

0





0





',

'2

',

'2

Wiring Rules
The cables (terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 5 and 6) must be shielded. The shield must be
supported at both ends. To do this, use the shield contact (see the appendix of the ET 200S
Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348)
operating instructions).

352

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.9 Technical Specifications for Programming, Reference Lists

5.9

Technical Specifications for Programming, Reference Lists

Assignment of the short control interface (8 bytes)

Address

Assignment

Channel 0

Channel 1

Word 0

Word 4

Depending on the mode

Pulse output: Pulse duration
Pulse width modulation: Output value
Pulse train: Number of pulses
On/Off-delay: Off-delay
Frequency output: Output frequency

Byte 2

Byte 6

Bit 7: Reserve = 0
Bit 6: Reserve = 0
Bit 5: Reserve = 0
Bit 4: Reserve = 0
Bit 3: Reserve = 0
Bit 2: SET_DO
Bit 1: MANUAL_DO
Bit 0: SW_ENABLE

Byte 3

Byte 7

Depending on the mode

Pulse output: On-delay factor
Pulse-width modulation: Period duration factor
Pulse train: Period duration factor
On/Off-delay: On-delay factor
Frequency output: On-delay factor

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

353

2PULSE
5.9 Technical Specifications for Programming, Reference Lists

Assignment of the long control interface (12 bytes)

Address

Assignment

Channel 0

Channel 1

Word 0

Word 6

Depending on the mode

Pulse output: Pulse duration
Pulse-width modulation: Output value
Pulse train: Number of pulses
On/Off-delay: Off-delay
Frequency output: Output frequency

Word 2

Word 8

Depending on the mode

Pulse output: On-delay
Pulse-width modulation: Time period
Pulse train: Time period
On/Off-delay: On-delay
Frequency output: On-delay

Byte 4

Byte 10

Bit 7: Reserve = 0
Bit 6: Reserve = 0
Bit 5: Reserve = 0
Bit 4: Reserve = 0
Bit 3: Reserve = 0
Bit 2: SET_DO
Bit 1: MANUAL_DO
Bit 0: SW_ENABLE

Byte 5

354

Byte 11

Depending on the mode

Pulse output: Not used
Pulse-width modulation: On-delay factor
Pulse train: Pulse-pause ratio
On/Off-delay: Not used
Frequency output: Not used

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.9 Technical Specifications for Programming, Reference Lists

Assignment of the Feedback Interface

Address

Assignment

Channel 0

Channel 1

Byte 0

Byte 4

Bit 7: ERR_24V
Bit 6: ERR_DO
Bit 5: ERR_PARA
Bit 4: ERR_PULS
Bit 3: ACK_SW_ENABLE
Bit 2: STS_DI
Bit 1: STS_DO
Bit 0: STS_ENABLE

Byte 1

Byte 5

Bit 0 to Bit 3: Sequence counter SEQ_CNT

Word 2

Word 6

Measured value of the current

Bit 4 to Bit 7: Reserve = 0

Note
Depending on the interface module IM 151 and the configuration, the feedback value
(substitute value) supplied is 16#7FFF7FFF or 16#00000000.

Notes on the Control Signals

Control Signal

Notes

"Pulse output" operating mode:

Pulse duration 1) 2)

The time that is set for the DO digital output on expiration of the ondelay.

On-delay factor 1)

You can change the configured on-delay before the start of the output
sequence:
On-delay = Factor 0.1 configured on-delay

On-delay 2)

The time from the start of the output sequence to the output of the pulse
train.

"Pulse width modulation" operating mode:

Output value 1)

Time period factor 1)

You can change the configured period duration:

Period duration = Factor 0.1 configured period duration

Time period 2)

When specifying the time period take into account the set minimum
pulse duration and the response time of your final controlling element
that is connected to the digital output DO.

On-delay factor 2)

You can change the configured on-delay before the start of the output
sequence:
On-delay = Factor 0.1 configured on-delay

2)

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

Value that is output with pulse-width modulation at the DO digital output

on expiration of the on-delay.

355

2PULSE
5.9 Technical Specifications for Programming, Reference Lists
Control Signal
"Pulse train" operating mode:

Notes

Number of pulses 1)

Time period factor 1)

You can change the configured time period before the start of the output
sequence:
Time period = Factor x 0.1 x configured time period

Time period 2)

When specifying the time period take into account the set minimum
pulse duration and the response time of your final controlling element
that is connected to the digital output DO.

Pulse-pause ratio

2)

2)

Number of pulses that are output at the DO digital output on expiration of

the on-delay.

You can set the ratio of the pulse duration to the interpulse period:
Pulse-pause ratio = (Setpoint / 255) time period

"On/Off-delay" operating mode:

Off-delay 1)

On-delay factor 1)

You can change the configured on-delay before the start of the output
sequence:
On-delay = Factor 0.1 configured on-delay

On-delay 2)

The time between a positive edge of the digital input DI and its output on
the digital output DO.

The time between a negative edge of the digital input DI and its output
on the digital output DO.

2)

"Frequency output" operating mode:

Output frequency 1)

On-delay factor 1)

You can change the configured on-delay before the start of the output
sequence:
On-delay = Factor 0.1 configured on-delay

On-delay 2)

The time from the start of the output sequence to the output of the
frequency.

2)

Frequency that is output at the DO digital output after expiration of the

on-delay.

Direct control of the digital output

MANUAL_DO

You use the control bit to select and deselect the function for directly
controlling the digital output.

SET_DO

You use the control bit to set the status of the digital output DO.

Software enable (SW_ENABLE)

1)
2)

You must always issue the software enable in your control program. If
you don't use a HW enable, the output sequence will be started by the
positive edge of the software enable. If you delete the software enable,
the current output sequence will be terminated.

When using the short control interface

When using the long control interface

356

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

2PULSE
5.9 Technical Specifications for Programming, Reference Lists

Notes on the feedback signals

Checkback signal

Notes

ACK_SW_ENABLE

Indicates the status of the software enable pending at the 2PULSE.

ERR_24V

Indicates a short circuit or drop of the encoder supply.

ERR_DO

Indicates a short circuit at the digital output.

ERR_PARA

Indicates a parameter assignment error.

ERR_PULS

"Pulse output" operating mode:

Indicates a pulse output error. If the pulse duration is reduced after expiration of the on-delay
so the time is less than the time already output, this is detected by the 2PULSE.
The 2PULSE deletes the feedback bit ERR_PULS next time the output sequence starts.
"Pulse train" operating mode:
Indicates a pulse output error. If the number of pulses is reduced after expiration of the ondelay and the smaller number of pulses is already output, this is detected by the 2PULSE.
The 2PULSE deletes the feedback bit ERR_PULS next time the output sequence starts.
"On/Off-delay" mode:
Indicates a pulse output error if the pulse duration or interpulse period is too short.
The 2PULSE deletes the ERR_PULS feedback bit at the next positive edge of the software
enable or at the next edge at the DI digital input.

STS_ DI

Indicates the signal level at the digital input DI.

STS_DO

Indicates the signal level at the digital output DO.

STS_ENABLE

"Pulse output" operating mode:

Is set at the start of the output sequence until the pulse duration expires. If you delete the
software enable (SW_ENABLE) or the 2PULSE detects a pulse output error (ERR_PULS),
STS_ENABLE is deleted.
"Pulse-width modulation" operating mode:
Set at start of output sequence. If you delete the software enable (STS_ENABLE),
SW_ENABLE is deleted.
"Pulse train" operating mode:
Is set at the start of the output sequence until the output of the last pulse. If you delete the
software enable (SW_ENABLE) or the 2PULSE detects a pulse output error (ERR_PULS),
STS_ENABLE is deleted.
"On/Off-delay" mode:
Indicates the status of the software enable (SW_ENABLE) detected by the 2PULSE.
"Frequency output" operating mode:
Set at start of output sequence. If you delete the software enable (STS_ENABLE),
SW_ENABLE is deleted.

SEQ_CNT

Counts the completed output sequences in the "Pulse output", "Pulse train" and "On/Offdelay" operating modes.
No function in the "Pulse width modulation" and "Frequency output" operating modes.

Measured value of the

current

Current at the DO as a SIMATIC S7 analog value

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

357

2PULSE
5.9 Technical Specifications for Programming, Reference Lists

Parameter List
Parameters

Value Range

Default

Group diagnostics

Disable/enable

Disable

Response to CPU/master STOP

Turn off DO/

Continue working mode/
DO substitute a value/
DO keep last value

Turn off DO

Parallel connection Channel 0 and

1

Off/on

Off

Diagnostics DO

Off/on

On

Substitute value DO

0/1

Operating mode

Pulse output /
Pulse width modulation (PWM) /
Pulse train /
On/Off-delay
Frequency output

Pulse width modulation

Output format (in the "Pulse width

modulation" operating mode)

Per mill/S7 analog output

Per mill

Output format (in the "Frequency

output" operating mode)

1 Hz / S7 analog output

1 Hz

Channel 0

Time base

0.1 ms/1 ms

0.1 ms

Function DI

Input/HW enable

Input

On-delay

0 65535

Minimum pulse duration

0 65535

Time period

1 65535 / 2 65535

20000

Diagnostics DO

Off/on

On

Substitute value DO

0/1

Operating mode

Pulse output /
Pulse width modulation (PWM) /
Pulse train /
On/Off-delay
Frequency output

Pulse width modulation

Output format (in the "Pulse width

modulation" operating mode)

Per mill/S7 analog output

Per mill

Output format (in the "Frequency

output" operating mode)

1 Hz / S7 analog output

1 Hz

Channel 1

Time base

0.1 ms/1 ms

0.1 ms

Function DI

Input/HW enable

Input

On-delay

0 65535

Minimum pulse duration

0 65535

Time period

1 65535 / 2 65535

20000

358

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

Index
1

1Count24V
Counting modes, 19
Isochrone mode, 12
Measuring modes, 54
Operating modes, 17
Technical specifications, 115
Terminal assignment, 16
1Count5V
Counting modes, 129
Isochronous mode, 122
Measuring Modes, 165
Operating modes, 127
Technical specifications, 228
Terminal assignment, 126
1SSI
Encoder types, 232
Encoder value detection, 241
In fast mode, 239
In standard mode, 239
Isochronous mode, 233
Normalization, 243
Technical Specifications, 261
Terminal assignment, 238

Brief instructions on commissioning

1Count24V, 13
1Count5V, 123
1SSI, 234
2PULSE, 268

2
2PULSE
Application examples, 323
Direct control of the DO, 311
Frequency output, 303
Isochronous mode, 267
Measurement of current, 310
On/Off-delay, 295
Parallel connection of both channels, 315
Pulse output, 273
Pulse train, 289
Pulse width modulation, 279
Technical Specifications, 347
Terminal Assignment, 350

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07

C
Comparator of the 1SSI, 245
Control and feedback interface
Accessing with STEP 7 programming, 49, 79, 104,
192, 217, 258
Control interface
1Count24V counting modes, 45
1Count24V measuring modes, 75
1Count24V position feedback, 101
1Count5V counting modes, 155
1Count5V measuring modes, 188
1Count5V position feedback, 215
1SSI standard mode, 256
2PULSE (long), 352
2PULSE (short), 351
Count continuously, 21, 131
Counting modes
Control interface, 45, 155
Feedback interface, 45, 155

D
Direction detection, 244
Direction reversal, 244

E
Encoder value detection
Free-wheeling, 241
Isochronously, 241
Synchronous, 241

359

Index

Feedback interface
1Count24V counting modes, 45
1Count24V measuring modes, 75
1Count24V position feedback, 101
1Count5V counting modes, 155
1Count5V measuring modes, 188
1Count5V position feedback, 215
1SSI fast mode, 259
1SSI standard mode, 256
2PULSE, 353
Frequency Measurement, 59, 61, 172, 170

Parameters
1Count24V counting modes, 52
1Count24V measuring modes, 82
1Count24V position feedback, 107
1Count5V counting modes, 163
1Count5V measuring modes, 195
1Count5V position feedback, 221
1SSI, 251
2PULSE, 356
Period Measurement, 67, 69, 182
Periodic counting, 26, 136
Position feedback, 92, 206
Control interface, 101, 215
Feedback interface, 101, 215

G
Gate functions
in counting modes, 30, 139
in measuring modes, 72, 185
In position feedback, 93, 207

Isochronous mode
1Count24V, 12
1Count5V, 122
1SSI, 233
2PULSE, 267

Single counting, 23, 133

L
Latch Function, 247

Rotational speed measurement, 65, 177

T
Technical Specifications
1Count24V, 115
1Count5V, 228
1SSI, 261
2PULSE, 347

M
Measuring
Frequency, 59, 61, 172
Period, 67, 69, 182
Rotational speed, 63, 65, 177
Measuring modes
Control interface, 75, 188
Feedback interface, 75, 188
Mode
Frequency measurement, 61, 172
Period measurement, 69, 182
Rotational speed measurement, 65, 177

360

Technological Functions
Operating Instructions, 06/2010, A5E00124867-07